Home

Encoder Model D9032 User and Service Manual, Software Version

1. Language Code Code Swedish swe Tagalog tgl Tahitian tah Tajik tgk Tamil tam Tatar tat Telugu tel Thai tha Tibetan tib bod Tigrinya tir Tonga tog Tsonga tso Tswana tsn Turkish tur Turkmen tuk Twi twi Uighur uig Ukrainian ukr Urdu urd Uzbek uzb Vietnamese vie Volapuk vol Walloon wln Welsh wel cym Wolof wol Xhosa xho Yiddish yid Yoruba yor Zhuang za 4019394 Rev B ISO 639 2 Language Codes D 7 Language Code Code Zulu zul a Languages that have two synonymous codes D 8 ISO 639 2 Language Codes 4019394 Rev B Appendix E SNMP Quick Setup Guide Overview Introduction This appendix is a quick guide to the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP In This Appendix This appendix contains the following topics Topic See Page Introduction E 2 SNMP Managers E 4 SNMP Hints and Common Pitfalls E 5 4019394 Rev B SNMP Quick Setup Guide E 1 Introduction The SNMP Protocol SNMP is a protocol for management of remote devices It was designed for managing all kinds of devices such as routers printers and also broadcast equipment from companies like Scientific Atlanta You may find further reference information on SNMP in RFC 1157 Though SNMP can support different transport layer protocols the SNMP commonly runs on top of the Internet protocol UDP Which transpor
2. Topic Continued See Page Reduced Delay Guidelines 5 29 Delay Bit Rate and Consecutive B pictures 5 31 Setting Up the Video Encoder Aspect Ratio 5 33 Setting Up the Video Encoder Rate 5 35 Setting Up the Statistical Multiplexing 5 38 Setting Up the Stand Alone Variable Bit Rate 5 45 Section E Setting Up the Pre Processor 5 47 Setting Up the Pre Processor Parameters 5 47 3 2 Pulldown and 3 2 Pulldown Inversion 5 52 Section F Setting Up the Audio 5 54 Enabling or Disabling the Audio Channels 5 54 Setting Up the Layer II Audio Input 5 55 Setting Up the Layer II Channel Information 5 58 Setting Up the Layer II Processing 5 59 Setting Up the Layer II Test Tones 5 60 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Audio Input 5 62 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Processing 5 66 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Channels 5 68 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Passthrough 5 70 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Test Tones 5 71 Setting Up the Linear Dolby E Audio Input 5 73 Setting Up the Linear Dolby E Processing 5 75 Setting Up the Linear Dolby E Linear Parameters 5 76 Section G Setting Up the VBI 5 77 Selecting VBI Source and Enabling VBI Resources 5 77 Setting Up the VBI Lines in 625 Lines Systems 5 81 Setting Up the VBI Lines in 525 Lines Systems 5 83 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 3 Overview Continued Topic
3. 11 Uncheck the Maintain TS Rate box if your receiver can handle non constant TS rates Maintain TS Rate means that your ar transmitting null packages in the IP output so that the transmitted rate is equal to the ASI output rate By unchecking this box null packets are not transmitted in the IP stream Note You should enable this when PCR jitter is a critical parameter 12 Click Apply 13 Click the Quality of Service icon from the sub pages summary Video Pre Processor audo ver C om Ts output Psr TS Output m Quality of Service oS Mode ass QoS Mod IP Streaming Quality of Service C Differentiated Service ToS CoS Precedence C Custom PCR Synchronization Conditional Access Tos ee Normal z Routine Apply Reload Help 14 Choose the desired quality of service QoS Mode either Differentiated Service ToS CoS Precedence or Custom The default is ToS CoS Precedence These settings are used to guide the selection of the actual service parameters when transmitting data through a network 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 95 Setting Up the IP Streaming Parameters Continued Set the CoS Precedence mode settings Some networks offer service precedence which treats high precedence traffic with a higher priority than other traffic by accepting only traffic above a certain precedence at the time of high load Choose from Routine Priority Immediate Flash
4. Auto concatenation Advanced Video Input SDI a Pre installed in all versions of the product b Pre installed in all North American basic configurations c Pre installed in North American basic configurations with 4 stereo pairs of audio Note All installed options are enabled at delivery Video and Audio Channels You may order the D9032 Encoder with either one SDI input one composite input or with both You may order the D9032 Encoder with either two or four stereo audio channels The audio channels may be part of the video or stand alone audio channels 4019394 Rev B Introduction 2 3 Encoder Model D9032 Continued Encoding Bit Rates Video and audio data can be encoded at the following bit rates and coding standards Input signal Bit rate Coding standard Video signal 0 5 to 15 Mbit s MPEG 2 Main Profile at Main Level MP ML 1 5 to 50 Mbit s 4 2 2 Profile at Main level Audio signal 32 to 384 kbit s MPEG 1 Layer II 56 to 640 kbit s Dolby Digital Dolby Digital passthrough 2 399 968 bit s Linear Dolby E a Requires a license VBI and Related Signals The following VBI signals are supported for 625 lines PAL 625 lines SDI 525 lines NTSC and 525 lines SDI 625 lines PAL 625 lines SDI 525 lines NTSC 525 lines SDI e Transparent lines e Transparent lines e Transparent e Transparent e DVB VBI Teletext e DVB VBI Teletext lines lines e Te
5. Remember my password Hint If you have forgotten your user name and password you can reset them from the front panel user interface Type the password if you have previously created a logon 1 4 Quick Setup Read Me First 4019394 Rev B Chapter 2 Introduction Overview Introduction This chapter is a general introduction to the Encoder Model D9032 It describes the most common applications and interfaces of the In This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic See Page Encoder Model D9032 2 2 Application Examples 2 6 Video Interfaces 2 8 Audio and Data Interfaces 2 9 Transport Stream Outputs 2 11 Control and Management Interfaces 2 12 4019394 Rev B Introduction 2 1 Encoder Model D9032 General Description The design of the Encoder Model D9032 is compact The D9032 Encoder is a 1U encoder that fits into a 19 inch rack It features one channel high quality SDI and or composite video processing It is targeted at distribution and contribution applications and supports Dolby Digital Linear passthrough of Dolby E and Layer II audio encoding The D9032 Encoder features advanced pre processing for optimum performance at low bit rates Optional PreSightPlus combined with the Regulus Statistical Multiplex Controller is one of the industry s leading solutions for bandwidth saving encoding The D9032 Encoder offers built in support for SCT
6. Structure To see the Lock menu from the Main menu press the Right arrow key five times and then the SELECT key Each parameter is described in the following For instructions on how to select and store settings see About the Front Panel page 4 2 The menu has the following structure 04 058 Lock Parameters Unlocked Locked Description From this menu you may lock or unlock the front panel When the front panel is locked you can only see settings but not change them from the front panel menus 4 34 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B Chapter 5 Setup and Monitoring Overview Control Modes You can set up and control the D9032 Encoder by using the front panel keyboard the embedded Web Interface or a PC and the ROSA management system Front Panel Keyboard The D9032 Encoder can be operated from the front panel keyboard For further information see Front Panel Operation page 4 1 Embedded Web Interface The D9032 Encoder is delivered with an embedded web based GUI enabling you to set and control the unit via an IP network ROSA Management The ROSA COPERNICUS system is a multi server multi client based system enabling you to set up and manage a whole network of encoders In the ROSA Single User system the server and client is located on the same PC Consequently it has only one simultaneous user ROSA enables full control and monitoring functionality of the D9032 Encoder installations with redundancy switch
7. gt S gt Potrete trovare il presente simbolo attaccato a questo prodotto Questo simbolo indica un calore eccessivo o pericoloso Alimentazione Chiusura Cavi Fusibili Importante Questo prodotto di Classe I Va messo a terra Questo prodotto si inserisce in una presa di corrente La presa di corrente deve essere in prossimit del prodotto e deve essere facilmente accessibile Collegare questo prodotto solamente alla fonte di alimentazione indicata sul pannello posteriore di questo prodotto Se questo prodotto non dotato di un interruttore principale il cavo di alimentazione funge a questo scopo Proteggete da umidit questo prodotto Non aprire la chiusura di questo prodotto a meno che non sia specificato diversamente Non inserire oggetti attraverso le fessure della chiusura Staccare sempre tutti i cavi di alimentazione prima di svolgere l assistenza tecnica al prodotto Per scollegare un cavo tirate la spina o il connettore non tirare mai il cavo stesso Non calpestare o sottoporre a sollecitazioni i cavi o le prese Se AC fornito il D9032 Encoder contiene fusibili su fasi neutro Utilizzare sempre un fusibile che abbia il tipo e la potenza corretti e che sia autorizzato all uso nel paese o nella giurisdizione nella quale il prodotto installato Il tipo e la potenza corretti sono indicati sul prodotto Riparazionoi di fabbrica Per le riparazioni contattate solamente personale tecnico autoiz
8. D9032_E neoder_10 11 67 190 Location Assign Resource Name s E Cancel 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 11 Assigning the D9032 Encoder Agent as a Unit in ROSA Continued 4 Click Assign Resource Name ROSA automatically gives the resource a name containing the device name and IP address The location is the physical location of the unit You might have a main site with e g 60 D9032 Encoders but also a number of remote sites that also have some D9032 Encoders and are linked with the main site via a LAN In ROSA you can define the different physical locations of your units For example main_headend_Brussels_airport hub_Brussels_south hub_Brussels_north etc Suppose there is a problem with one of the encoders the location that was assigned to the unit tells the service technician immediately where to go and find the failing unit Click OK Repeat the above procedure for every D9032 Encoder agent you want to assign as a unit in ROSA Close the window Result The D9032 Encoder is now in the COPERNICUS Explorer window Once you have set up the trap destination the ROSA system will be able to receive traps messages from the D9032 Encoder For further information on how to set up trap destinations see Setting Up the Trap Destinations page 5 128 5 12 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Working With the User Interface in ROSA Opening the User Interface To
9. Hearing Impaired For program speech without music and effects Background noise is reduced so that only one primary sound source is perceived Visually Impaired Used for audio description Audio description is an ancillary component associated with a TV service which delivers a verbal description of the visual scene as an aid to understanding and enjoyment for e g viewers who have visual impairments 5 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 113 Setting Up the VBI PIDs and the Teletext Descriptor Table To Set Up the VBI PIDs and the Teletext Descriptor Table Proceed as follows to set up the VBI PIDs and the teletext descriptor table 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the PSI tab and the VBI icon from the sub pages C Gpam Oa eon ps iy psi m BI Transport Stream EBU Teletext PID 8040 ideo Gaudio DVB VBI PID e041 dDVB VBI Teletext Descriptor Tag DVB v vel Proprietary PID bos ooo S NIT Teletext Descriptor Table Index Enable Language Type Magazine Descriptor Page 1 C en finitialpage a fi i 2 1 limitarase lh n 3 r ena intiaPae li e 4 Pien ntlpage z n 5 r Jena initairags lft 2 6 PF ena linnapea J hh 7 r eno ntara MaE E 8 r Eng intiaPae oli o eS 9 D leno ntalpage z nC n 10 O eng Initial Page X Boo t wS ooo xl Apply Reload
10. Second order digital multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kbit s and using positive justification A digital audio interface for broadcasting studios Internet protocol protocol specification Daytime Protocol Entity MIB URN for the CLEI Code Conformance Statements for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol GNMPv2 Proposed edition Formatting AES EBU Audio and Auxiliary Data into Digital Video Ancillary Data Space Proposed edition Ancillary Data Packet and Space Formatting Definition of vertical switching point for synchronous switching G 2 4019394 Rev B Applicable Documents Continued TR 101 154 V1 4 1 Digital Video Broadcasting DVB Implementation guidelines for the use of MPEG 2 systems Video and audio in satellite cable and terrestrial broadcasting applications UL 60950 2000 Safety of information technology equipment 4019394 Rev B G 3 G4 4019394 Rev B Glossary AES EBU ASCII ASI ASI ASI Aspect ratio BISS B pictures CA Clear Session Word Audio Engineering Society European Broadcasting Union AES EBU is the name of a digital audio transfer standard The AES and EBU developed the specifications for the standard AES EBU is an alternative to the S PDIF standard American Standard Code for Information Interchange The ASCII set of 128 characters includes letters numbers punctuation and control codes Each
11. Normal Extended C Low Reload Help Note The maximum video rate must be higher than or equal to the default video rate and the default video rate must be higher than or equal to the minimum rate 5 38 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Statistical Multiplexing Continued 2 Set the maximum video rate This setting is used to guarantee that the rate for a channel does not exceed a specified value The legal range is from 1 5 to 15 Mbit s If you do not need limitation to a specific rate we recommend that you use a setting about 2 to 3 times the default video rate or just leave the setting at its maximum 15 Mbit s Example A typical application is that you want to extract programs from the statistical multiplex bouquet and forward these programs separately In that case you may need to limit the maximum rate of each channel to extract so that you avoid overflow of the equipment that handles the extracted statmux programs The maximum video rate limit setting does not imply that the Statistical Multiplex Controller will try to go up to that rate but simply that it will not exceed that rate The maximum video rate during operation may be lower if the statmux pool size does not allow room for it Note Stating a maximum rate limit may reduce the probability of reaching the target video quality Note You should use the target video quality limit setting and not the ma
12. Dolby Digital Description The audio delay setup on the Major B On DSP Delay low Audio DSP is too low error Remedy Increase the audio delay Dolby Digital Description The encoder failed to lock to Major B On Embedded audio the embedded audio not locked Remedy Check that the audio channels are embedded where required Check the sources of the embedded audio Dolby Digital Description The audio input signal is Minor B On Overload on the overloaded The audio input level is too audio input high and close to the clipping level signal Remedy Increase the clipping level or reduce the input level Dolby Digital Description The frame size code field is Minor None On Passthrough lower than expected and has changed FRMSZCOD Remedy Lower the bit rate on the Dolby lower and encoder changed Dolby Digital Description The frame size code field is Major B On Passthrough not valid FRMSZCOD not Remedy Use a valid bit rate on the Dolby valid encoder Dolby Digital Description Sampling frequency code Major B On Passthrough field does not match FSCOD does not Remedy Set the sampling frequencies on match the Dolby encoder and the passthrough encoder to the same 4019394 Rev B Service and Maintenance 6 11 Message Description and Remedy Severity Default Enable alarm category Dolby Digital Description The sampling frequency Major B On P
13. Encoder Model D9032 User and Service Manual Software Version 2 11 Please Read This Entire Guide Veuillez lire enti rement ce guide Bitte das gesamte Handbuch durchlesen Sirvase leer completamente la presente guia Si prega di leggere completamente questa guida Important Please read this entire guide before you install or operate this product Give particular attention to all safety statements Important Veuillez lire enti rement ce guide avant d installer ou d utiliser ce produit Pr tez une attention particuli re a toutes les r gles de s curit Zu beachten Bitte lesen Sie vor Aufstellen oder Inbetriebnahme des Ger tes dieses Handbuch in seiner Gesamtheit durch Achten Sie dabei besonders auf die Sicherheitshinweise Importante Sirvase leer la presente guia antes de instalar o emplear este producto Preste especial atenci n a todos los avisos de seguridad Importante Prima di installare o usare questo prodotto si prega di leggere completamente questa guida facendo particolare attenzione a tutte le dichiarazioni di sicurezza Scientific Atlanta ACISCO COMPANY Encoder Model D9032 User and Service Manual Software Version 2 11 Notices Trademark Acknowledgements e Scientific Atlanta and the Scientific Atlanta logo are registered trademarks of Scientific Atlanta Inc Cisco Cisco Systems and the Cisco Systems logo are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems Inc and or
14. Encoder Program Delay Setup Method Delays O Manual Auto d4spect Ratio Encoder Rate Encoding Delay D ms Actual Pre Processing Delay ms Actual End To End Delay ms Apply The GUI automatically displays the actual pre processing delay and the actual end to end delay The end to end delay includes the pre processing delay and the encoding delay but excludes any additional delay in external equipment such as implementation delay in decoders 2 Select the Manual or Auto delay setup method If you select Manual you may specify the encoding delay in ms If you select Auto the D9032 Encoder automatically sets the delay to the maximum which gives the best picture quality Note It is recommended that you only use the manual delay setup method if it is important to have a specific delay time from the encoder to the decoder For more information see Reduced Delay Guidelines page 5 29 Note You may specify a delay which is shorter not longer than the automatic delay Note When you reduce the encoding delay the picture quality may be degraded Note The total end to end delay becomes longer when you have enabled pre processing 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 27 Setting Up the Video Encoder Delays Continued 3 If relevant set the Manual Encoding Delay Note This may be useful for applications where the delay ona return channel is important or for game shows with viewer interaction Note This setti
15. Help 2 If relevant type the EBU Teletext PID You may type a figure in the range from 16 to 8190 Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other element Important Transmission of teletext is only applicable in 625 lines systems Teletext may also be transmitted as DVB VBI Teletext see the description of the DVB VBI PID below 3 If relevant type the DVB VBI PID The DVB VBI may contain VPS WSS DVB VBI Teletext and transparent lines encoded according to the DVB VBI specifications The legal range is from 16 to 8190 Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other program element 8 Note that the DVB tables use the PIDs from 16 to 20 5 114 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the VBI PIDs and the Teletext Descriptor Table Continued 4 When selecting the DVB VBI PID choose the DVB VBI Teletext Descriptor Tag either DVB or EBU When you select DVB the DVB VBI descriptor is used according to DVB standards When you select EBU the DVB VBI descriptor in the PMT contains a teletext PID instead of a DVB teletext descriptor when the DVB VBI PID contains teletext This setting is used to ensure compatibility with older set top boxes If relevant type the Proprietary Transparent lines PID You may type a figure in the range from 16 to 8190 Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other program element If relevant set up the teletext descriptor table I
16. Note The D9032 Encoder will stop encoding if you specify a bit rate lower than the ones specified above If the D9032 Encoder does not have the 4 2 2 option installed any setting outside the main profile is ignored For information on how to set up the bit rate budget see Making a TS Rate Budget page 5 21 Note Observe the minimum bit rates for the various GOP lengths For the relationship between bit rate profile number of B pictures and codec delay see Reduced Delay Guidelines page 5 29 The table below shows the lowest recommended bit rate at various GOP lengths GOP Lowest Recommended Rate in Fixed Video Rate Encoding l h ength 720 704 640 Pixels 544 528 480 Pixels 352 Pixels Pixels Width Pixels Width Width Width Width Ionly 26Mbit s 25 5 Mbit s 25Mbit s 2 4 5 24 Mbit s Mbit s 22 24 Mbit s 2 3 75 2 3 5 Mbit s 2 3 25 2 3 Mbit s Mbit s Mbit s 23 23 Mbit s 2 2 75 2 2 5 Mbit s 2 2 25 2 2 Mbit s Mbit s Mbit s 24 22 Mbit s 2 1 9 Mbit s 2 1 8 Mbit s 2 1 6 Mbit s 2 1 5 Mbit s Note The setting supports rates between 0 5 and 15 Mbit s for the 4 2 0 Chroma format and between 1 5 and 50 Mbit s for the 4 2 2 Chroma format However you must observe the rates above Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Video Encoder Rate Continued 4 For statistical multiplexing with two pools select Statmux pool A or B For further information see Regu
17. Synchronize 0ption License Start Time 01 00 hh mm IP Network Apply Help 2 Enable the synchronization This means that the D9032 Encoder will synchronize to the clock of the COPERNICUS server ROSA PC or any other time server with the address specified in the Server Address field Only the TCP based daytime service is implemented as defined in the RFC 867 Note To use the Time Clock synchronization you must run the BNDTServ exe file on the COPERNICUS server ROSA PC This file is located on the ROSA CD 3 Type the synchronization interval in minutes The COPERNICUS ROSA PC clock is automatically downloaded to the D9032 Encoder at the specified interval starting when you Click Apply To synchronize once a day at 1 o clock am set the interval to 1440 min and Start Time to 01 00 Note To maintain accurate synchronization between the COPERNICUS server ROSA PC it is recommended that you synchronize once a day 4 Type the synchronization offset in minutes The range is from 1440 to 1440 This feature is used when the clock server is placed in a different time zone than the D9032 Encoder 5 Type the IP address of the synchronization server 6 Do one of the following e Type the synchronization start time and click Apply or 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 133 Setting the Clock Synchronization Continued e click Apply to store the entered settings and click Time Now if you want the synchronization to t
18. Video Programs PMT PID Parameters A figure between 16 and 8190 Description The PID of the Video Program Map Table PMT Observe that you Video Programs PID Parameters Description APn lt n 1 to 8 gt ProgNo may not use the same PID for any other program element A figure between 16 and 8190 The PID of the video Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other program element Parameters A figure between 1 and 65535 Description The program number of the audio channel APn lt n 1 to 8 gt PMT PID Parameters A figure between 16 and 8190 1 Note the DVB tables use the PIDs from 16 to 20 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 7 PSI Menu Continued Description APn lt n 1 to 8 gt ProgName Parameters Description Teletext PID Parameters Description VBI PID Parameters Description Transparent PID Parameters Description The PMT PID of the audio program Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other program element Up to 30 Alphanumeric characters The name of the audio program The supported character set is ASCII N A A figure between 16 and 8190 The PID of the EBU teletext Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other program element N A A figure between 16 and 8190 The PID of the DVB VBI The DVB VBI may contain VPS WSS DVB VBI Teletext and transparent lines encoded according to the DVB VBI s
19. 188 bytes structure 204 bytes without Reed Solomon Aux Item Specification Number of connectors 1 Usage IP streaming to backup receiver or for PCR synchronization Type of connector Eight pin RJ 45 Ethernet type 100 Base T Transport stream bit rate Follows the ASI output rate Transport stream formats 188 bytes structure 204 bytes without Reed Solomon 4019394 Rev B Technical Specifications A 17 Transport Stream Output Continued Conditional Access Item Specification BISS E According to BISS E Basic Interoperable Scrambling System with Encrypted Keys EBU Tech 3292 rev 2 August 2002 BISS Modes BISS 0 scrambling off BISS 1 Session Word BISS E Clear Session Word BISS E Injected ID and Encrypted Session Word A 18 Technical Specifications 4019394 Rev B Section E Control and Management Interfaces Ethernet Management Interface Item Specification Number of connectors 1 Type of connector Eight pin RJ 45 MDI Ethernet type 10 100 Base T Required setup IP address default gateway and subnet mask Alarm Interface Item Specification Number of outputs 3 each having one set of contacts closed and one set open during normal operation Alarms are signalled by reversing the polarity of the two contact sets Type of connector 9 pin sub D female Max voltage lt
20. 6 6 21 6 5 6 72 Zz 7 24 1 Closed captions output packets are part of the video tributary It is recommended that you only enable the output packets that you know you will use C4 Transport Stream Rates 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries Continued Rate TS Rates Mbit s Mbit s 7 5 7 75 8 8 26 9 9 29 10 10 31 11 11 34 12 12 36 13 13 39 14 14 42 15 15 44 16 16 47 17 17 49 18 18 52 20 20 57 22 22 62 24 24 67 26 26 72 28 28 78 30 30 83 32 32 88 34 34 93 36 36 98 38 39 03 40 41 08 45 46 21 50 51 34 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates C 5 Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries Continued Layer Il Audio The various audio rates require the following transport stream rates These figures apply to audio attached to the video or to another audio only program respectively to an audio only program Required TS Capacity kbit s Required TS Capacity kbit s Audio Attached to the Video or Audio Only Audio Attached to an Audio Only Program Audio 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Encoding Rate Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency 32 kbit s 36 6 36 39 2 36 6 36 39 2 48 kbit s 522 50 4 54 8 5
21. Before any other connection is made the unit must be connected to a protected ground terminal as described below e Via the three wire power cord of the AC power supply This connection is mandatory In addition via the protective ground terminal on the rear panel of the unit This connection provides additional protection of the equipment To Mount the D9032 Encoder To mount the D9032 Encoder in a rack do the following 1 Mount rails in the rack to support each D9032 Encoder to be installed For further information contact your rack supplier 2 Place the D9032 Encoder in its position in the rack 3 Mount the D9032 Encoder securely to the rack by securing four screws in the holes in the front panel mounting flanges 4 Make sure that air can circulate freely from the front of the D9032 Encoder 5 Do not block the air outlet holes on the back of the D9032 Encoder To Connect AC Power To connect AC power to the D9032 Encoder do the following 1 Connect the power cord supplied with the D9032 Encoder between the rear panel power receptacle and an 100 to 240 V AC power outlet 2 Make sure that the power cable is connected to protective ground See Grounding at the beginning of this section 3 4 Installation 4019394 Rev B Connection of Scientific Atlanta Equipment to DC Power Sources General Some Scientific Atlanta products can be powered by DC power supplies In general two categories of DC power sup
22. Description IP address of the destination network When IPsec is enabled by setting a destination address and a pre shared key for encryption you won t be able to communicate with the device until you have established a secure connection between the encoder and the destination network devices Use the numeric keys to type the IP address Press the SELECT key to store the entered values Press the Up arrow key to leave the menu Important For the changes to take effect you must reset the D9032 Encoder after you have finished setting or changing the IP address The D9032 Encoder will display a reminder Note The reset may take up to 90 seconds Note The IP Address is not affected by the Default command IP IPsec Pre Shared Key Parameters 16 character alphanumeric key Description Password for the secure connection When IPsec is enabled by setting a destination address and a pre shared encryption key you won t be able to communicate with the device until you have established a secure connection between the encoder and the destination network devices Use the numeric keys to type the pre shared encryption key Use the down arrow to enter letters Press the SELECT key to store the entered values Press the Up arrow key to leave the menu Important For the changes to take effect you must reset the D9032 Encoder after you have finished setting or changing the pre shared key The D9032 Encoder will display a reminder Note The
23. Flash Override Critic ECP Internetwork Control or Network Control The default is Routine Tos CoS Precedence Routine z e Each of the three available modes and the RFC Request for Comment references to set these modes are described in the following table Mode Description Differentiated Service Refer to RFC 2474 and RFC 3260 Supports configuration of TOS bits in the IP header allowing integration in Diff Serve networks ToS CoS Precedence Type of service precedence Refer to RFC 791 Custom Refer to RFC 3168 e Set the CoS Precedence mode settings Some networks offer service precedence which treats high precedence traffic with a higher priority than other traffic by accepting only traffic above a certain precedence at the time of high load e When you select Differentiated Service as the QoS mode you need to set the Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP for the stream The Code Point is a 6 bit field which indicates the type of service the packet carries when the encoder is connected to a router i e to set the priority Code Point e When you select Custom as the QoS Mode set the 8 bit field that contains the QoS bits This value is a multiple of the value set for the Differentiated Service Code point ToS Custom 15 Click Apply 5 96 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Streaming Video to Many Set top Boxes Multicasting Typical Dis
24. In This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic See Page Section A Replacing Fans and Fuses 6 2 Introduction 6 2 Replacing the Fan 6 3 Replacing the DC Fuse 6 7 Replacing an AC Fuse in the Power Supply 6 6 Replacing the DC Fuse 6 7 Section B Status Signaling 6 8 Front Panel LEDs 6 8 Messages 6 9 4019394 Rev B Service and Maintenance 6 1 Section A Replacing Fans and Fuses Introduction General Service Information This section provides general service guidelines Furthermore you will find some troubleshooting information Adjustment and Calibration The D9032 Encoder does not require regular adjustments or calibrations however to ensure proper cooling the fan needs to be replaced every 4th year In addition the fan can be replaced if the installed fan is not functioning correctly 6 2 Service and Maintenance 4019394 Rev B Replacing the Fan General To ensure proper cooling of the D9032 Encoder replace the fan every fourth year WARNING Allow only qualified service personnel to open the unit Otherwise personal injury or equipment damage may occur Before You Start You need the following tools and accessory Item Part Number Screwdriver PH 1 N A Flat bladed screwdriver N A Internal hex 5 5 mm screwdriver N A Fan kit 4008940 To Replace the Fan Do as follows to replace the fan 1 Switch off the po
25. Setting Up the Trap Destinations 5 128 Removing a Trap Destination 5 130 Reading the Module Information 5 131 Setting the Date and Time Manually 5 132 Setting the Clock Synchronization 5 133 Installing and Enabling Software Options 9 135 Setting Up the IP Networking 5 137 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 5 Section A Getting started with ROSA Installing ROSA and Drivers Installation Procedure Before you can set up your D9032 Encoder device under ROSA you must proceed as follows 1 Install the ROSA COPERNICUS management software Install e ROSA Single User SU if you want additional features like backup tasks trend analysis UDDs and set up all D9032 Encoders from the same PC or The ROSA Client if you have the COPERNICUS installed Note If you are unfamiliar with installing ROSA and drivers please refer to chapter 1 in the ROSA manuals described in Related Documentation page xxviii 2 Install the D9032 Encoder device driver For further information see Installing the D9032 Encoder Device Driver page 5 7 3 Set the IP address of the D9032 Encoder from the front panel For further information see System Menu page 4 25 1 Since the ROSA Client and ROSA SU offer identical functionality you can also log on toa server with the ROSA SU 5 6 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Installing the D9032 Encoder Device Driver Before You Start Before you can install the D9032 Encoder device driver yo
26. Trap Destination Modules clock option License GIP Network 2 Click in the left column outside the row you want to delete Note To select consecutive rows click the first column in the first row press and hold down SHIFT and then click the first column in the last row Note To select rows that are not consecutive press and hold down CTRL and then click the first column in each row 3 Click the Delete Row s button 5 130 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Reading the Module Information Proceed as follows to read the module Information 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the System tab and the Modules icon from the sub pages system Modules Temperatures System Configuration Number message Settings message Log Main Board Part Number Trap Destination Software Part Number 000700605 i Modules Module List F ao ligamee Slot Description HY Part Number S Part Number GIP Network 2 Adv Video Inputs 401279403 007009630 The GUI automatically displays e the system configuration number e the part number of the main board and e the part number of the embedded software The system configuration number is used for showing which modules are installed in the D9032 Encoder For each installed module GUI shows the module name hardware and software part number of the module 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 1
27. el D9032 Encoder tiene doble polo fusible neutral Use siempre un fusible del tipo y capacidad nominal correctos y que haya sido aprobado para su uso en el pa s o jurisdicci n en que se instale este producto El tipo y capacidad nominal correctos del fusible se indican en este producto Revisi n y reparaci n de f brica Solo personal aprobado por la f brica puede darle servicio al producto viii 4019394 Rev B Precauzioni di sicurezza Proteggetevi da scosse elettriche e proteggete il vostro sistema da possibili danni Questo prodotto soddisfa le norme internazionali per la sicurezza ed il design Seguite tutte le procedure di sicurezza contenute in questa guida e i simboli di sicurezza applicati al prodotto Se circostanze avverse compromettono la sicurezza d uso di questo prodotto interrompetene l uso e assicuratevi che il prodotto non venga pi utilizzato Evitare infortuni alla persona e danni al prodotto Non procedere oltre a qualunque simbolo fino a quando non si siano comprese pienamente le condizioni indicate Questo simbolo che appare nella letteratura di accompagnamento del prodotto indica importanti istruzioni d uso e di manutenzione Sul prodotto potete vedere questo simbolo che indica un dispositivo terminale sotto tensione la freccia punta verso il dispositivo Potrete trovare il presente simbolo applicato a questo prodotto Questo simbolo indica un terminale protettivo di messa a terra
28. provided 2 On receipt of instructions return the product by prepaid freight Refer to the section Returning Products for details 4019394 Rev B Customer Information 7 3 Returning Products Introduction You must have a return material authorization RMA number to return a product Contact the nearest customer service center and follow their instructions Returning a product to Scientific Atlanta for repair includes the following steps e Obtaining a RMA number e Obtaining a customer service center shipping address e Packing and shipping the product Obtaining an RMA Number and Shipping Address You must have an RMA number to return products RMA numbers are valid for 60 days If you already have a number but it is older than 60 days you must contact a customer service representative to revalidate the number You can return the product after the RMA number is revalidated Follow these steps to obtain an RMA number and shipping address 1 Contact a customer service representative to request anew RMA number or revalidate an existing one Refer to the earlier section titled Hotlines to find a customer service telephone number in your area Provide the following information to the customer service representative e Product name model number part number serial number if applicable e Quantity of products to return e A reason for returning the product e Your company name contact telephone number email add
29. system controller xxviii video encoder setting up delay 5 27 video input connectors 3 17 front panel setup 4 9 setting up 5 22 specifications A 2 video quality setting up 5 41 VPS Auto 5 55 W Web Interface general 5 1 Web interface log on 5 15 requirements 5 14 summary screen 5 17 Index 4 4019394 Rev B Index Continued WSS general 5 33 line 23 blanking 5 80 setting up 5 77 4019394 Rev B Index 5 Scientific Atlanta Canada Inc Scientific Scientific Atlanta Inc A Cisco Company www scientificatlanta com Atlanta This document includes various trademarks of Scientific Atlanta Please see the Notices section of this ACISCO COMPANY document for a list of the Scientific Atlanta trademarks used in this document All other trademarks shown are trademarks of their respective owners Cisco Cisco Systems and the Cisco Systems logo are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems Inc and or its affiliates in the U S and certain other countries Product and service availability is subject to change without notice 2007 Scientific Atlanta Canada Inc All rights reserved June 2007 Printed in USA Part Number 4019394 Rev B
30. 110 Ohms if the audio interface is an AES EBU interface Use 75 Ohms if the audio interface is an AES 3id interface Set the analog clipping level The legal range is from 6000 to 24000 mdBu You typically set the clipping level 6 dB above your maximum program level So for a maximum level of 9 dBu set the clipping to 15000 mdBu If your maximum level is 15 dBu set the clipping level to 21000 mdBu The resolution is 500 mdBu Note You will only get unity gain if you set the clipping level to the same value for the encoder as the maximum output level in the decoder Set the relative delay The legal range is from 1000 to 1000 ms Use this field if you want to adjust the encoding audio delay to synchronize audio with video in a program which has both Example If you use external video equipment which adds to the video delay type a negative external audio delay value corresponding to the external video delay Note You cannot set a negative relative audio delay greater than the end to end delay determined by the video encoder Set the External delay The legal range is from 0 to 2000 ms If you use an external audio encoder which adds to the audio delay type a delay value corresponding to the external audio delay For embedded audio select the embedded packet pair The SDI video input can contain up to 8 stereo audio channels each represented by a packet 1 to 4 and pair 1 or 2 You can transfer up to 4 of these channels C
31. 2 stereo audio Dolby AC3 and Dolby E passthrough Layer II audio Closed Captions ASI IP output 4013873x 10 D9032 Encoder PAL NTSC dual pass 4 2 0 SD encoder 4 stereo audio Dolby AC3 and Dolby E passthrough Layer II audio Closed Captions ASI IP output 4013873x 01 D9032 Encoder PAL NTSC ClearSight 4 2 0 SD encoder 2 stereo audio Dolby AC3 and Dolby E passthrough Layer II audio Closed Captions ASI IP output 4013873x9 11 D9032 Encoder PAL NTSC ClearSight 4 2 0 SD encoder 4 stereo audio Dolby AC3 and Dolby E passthrough Layer II audio Closed Captions ASI IP output 4013873x 02 D9032 Encoder PAL NTSC ClearSight SDI 4 2 0 SD encoder 2 stereo audio Dolby AC3 and Dolby E passthrough Layer II audio Closed Captions ASI IP output 4013873x 12 D9032 Encoder PAL NTSC ClearSight SDI 4 2 0 SD encoder 4 stereo audio Dolby AC3 and Dolby E passthrough Layer II audio Closed Captions ASI IP output a X 1 denotes DC power supply unit 2 denotes AC power supply unit with EU power cord 3 denotes AC power supply unit with US power cord 4 denotes AC power supply unit with UK power cord and 5 denotes AC power supply unit with AU power cord 4019394 Rev B Equipment and Accessories F 3 Options and Accessories Continued Software Options The following software options are available Part number Description 7012281 IP Statistical Multiplexing 70
32. 2 pulldown detector of the D9032 Encoder detects if there is a distinctive pattern of the 3 2 pulldown cadence and controls the encoder actions time stamping etc The D9032 Encoder tracks the input material and goes automatically and seamlessly in and out of 3 2 pulldown inversion if the 3 2 PDI feature has been enabled No user intervention is therefore required for channels with mixed film video originated content Especially for low bit rates the 3 2 PDI feature provides a significant improvement of the picture quality when encoding 525 line material that originates from film The improvement varies with the encoding rate and the nature of the material Evidently the overall benefit to your service depends on how often 3 2 pulldown material actually appears In normal 525 line distribution applications we recommend that you enable 3 2 PDI 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 53 Section F Setting Up the Audio Enabling or Disabling the Audio Channels Before you Begin The D9032 Encoder supports two stereo or four mono channels Note The GUI presents the Layer II channels as mono channels and the Dolby Digital and Linear Dolby E channels as stereo channels This implies that it is possible to assign individual PIDs to up to four Layer II mono channels and to up to two Dolby Digital or Linear Dolby E stereo channels Each of the audio inputs to the D9032 Encoder accepts either an analog digital AES EBU or AES 3id
33. 3 Replacing an AC Fuse in the Power Supply 0 0 0 ccc eeeeesesessesesesesesseenesecseseeeneseeeeaes 6 6 Replacing the DC Fuses icy a agian isa ie eaves eae ee eee a EEEE EE e 6 7 Section B Status Signaling cc esssscsseeseesseeeceecesecseeseeeeeeseeaecseeeeseeessecseceeeseeeees 6 8 Front Panel LEDS neenu nna a Sonat asceas a e aa a i r a a a 6 8 Messages Iri poata E E E RRE E me E ETE E cae coed 6 9 Customer Information VOT VI NE TE EA E E E E E E A T 7 1 Product SUPP OF bina enne ane a T R Ei E A E A EN 7 2 Returning Prod CtS a enere ereay senders tote tea aE ta ee RATS p Ea E PETITA TEREP EITEAN E NO REEDS 7 4 Technical Specifications DAE aA AETA A A EREA A 1 Section A Video Input and Processing cccceccescessesseeeceeeseeseeseeeecesecaecseeeeeeeeeseeneenes A 2 MPEG 2 Encoder Speciica tons aiecc is seuteta concn cas tata Gesbccrdea Bet sshacbetudn et ap ce Merwin Oa vaatscdnes A 2 Composite Video MPUts nuserise cts a E e EE E okies hb E diel ohne E A a ia A 3 VBI Specifications in Composite Video s ssseseseseeeeseseseesesesrsteststsreressssstsrerssesesesesse A 6 SID M Eo oA i A E E E RAEE AN TE AEA EEE A 8 Embedded Data in SDI cccccscssscsscsseessesseesceseesecsseseeseseecssecsseseeeaessesaecaaesseesesesesenaeens A 9 Section B Audio Input and Processing cccceccescssesseesceseeseeseeeeeeeessecsecseeseeneeeeeeaes A 12 A dio TAPE ets bac ead en ta ae ns pci aN ail liv aaa oak vee E A a ei A 12 Au
34. 75 2 75 2 225 6 263 2 263 2 413 6 413 6 413 6 564 601 6 601 6 Lines 6 Teletext 75 2 75 2 112 8 263 2 263 2 263 2 413 6 413 6 451 2 601 6 601 6 601 6 Lines 7 Teletext 75 2 112 8 112 8 263 2 263 2 263 2 413 6 451 2 451 2 601 6 601 6 639 2 Lines 8 Teletext 112 8 112 8 112 8 263 2 263 2 300 8 451 2 451 2 451 2 601 6 601 6 639 2 Lines 9 Teletext 112 8 112 8 112 8 263 2 300 8 300 8 451 2 451 2 451 2 601 6 639 2 639 2 Lines 10 Teletext 112 8 112 8 150 4 300 8 300 8 300 8 451 2 451 2 488 8 639 2 639 2 639 2 Lines 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates C9 Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries Continued 0 Transparent 1 Transparent 2 Transparent 3 Transparent Line Line Lines Lines E e E E e E E Sa gt gt D gt F e gt gt yn gt gt P z P z eu x P z gt gt gt gt o H WN a H W S u W S H W ii a2 18 e le 12 Je g op 2 e 2 e EF S e 2 e Ie 2 ie 2 a 2 Je 2 2 lg o E o o o Z H ea Z H ea Z H a0 Z H ea 11 Teletext 112 8 150 4 150 4 300 8 300 8 300 8 451 2 488 8 88 8 639 2 639 2 676 8 Lines 12 Teletext 150 4 150 4 150 4 300 8 300 8 338 4 488 8 488 8 488 8 639 2 639 2 676 8 Lines 13 Teletext 150 4 150 4 150 4 300 8 338 4 338 4 488 8 488 8 488 8 63
35. 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 and 384 kbit s Sample frequency 32 44 1 and 48 kHz Layer Il Audio Performance at 384 kbit s Item Specification SINAD at 1 020 Hz gt 80 dB Idle channel noise lt 86 dBq0ps A weighted Technical Specifications 4019394 Rev B Audio Processing Continued Dolby Digital Encoding Item Specification Encoding According to ATSC Standard Digital Audio Compression AC 3 Rev A August 2001 Audio Coding Modes Dual Mono 1 1 Mono 1 0 Stereo 2 0 Audio data rate 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384 448 512 576 and 640 kbit s Sample frequency 32 44 1 and 48 kHz Dolby Digital Audio Performance at 640 kbit s Item Specification SINAD at 1 020 Hz gt 80 dB Idle channel noise lt 86 dB A weighted Linear Audio Encoding Item Specification No of channels 1 stereo per audio encoder Encoding Linear Sample frequency 48 kHz Resolution 20 bits Transmission According to SMPTE 302M Passthrough of Dolby E Item Specification Pre encoding Encoding by external Dolby E encoder according to ATSC Standard Digital Audio Compression AC 3 Rev A August 2001 Linear Audio Dolby E Performance Item Specification Frequency response 0 15 dB re 1 kHz 20 to 20 000 Hz
36. A 17 video data bit rate A 2 reference input installation 3 11 Reference output specifications A 13 replacing the DC fuse 6 7 returning products 7 4 4019394 Rev B Index 3 Index Continued ROSA assigning the Encoder agent 5 11 installing Encoder device driver 5 7 license 5 7 ROSA Copernicus system 2 12 5 1 Single User system 2 12 5 1 S Safety v x A 23 G 1 G 2 G3 SDI input 3 17 setting up 5 22 specifications A 8 software enabling or disabling options 5 136 license 5 7 software version device driver 5 121 SPDIF setting up 5 74 specifications A 13 Stand alone Variable Bit Rate 5 45 statistical multiplexing connector 3 17 default video rate 5 43 front panel setup 4 9 setting up 5 38 5 45 specifications A 16 status signalling 6 8 system interfaces connectors 3 18 T teletext setting up 5 84 specifications A 6 transparent lines specifications A 7 A 10 transparent lines DVB specifications A 7 A 10 trap destination removing 5 130 setting up 5 128 TS IP output setting up 5 93 TS rates ASI SPI C 16 layer II audio C 6 satellite interfaces C 16 teletext C 14 transparent lines C 13 video C 4 V Variable bit rate 5 45 VBI enabling 5 79 installing option 5 135 setting up lines in 525 lines systems 5 83 setting up lines in 625 lines systems 5 81 version device driver xxviii ROSA management system xxviii SNMP protocol driver xxviii
37. B G 1 Applicable Documents Continued ETSI TR 102 154 v1 1 1 2001 04 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 IEC 60950 1999 IEC 68 2 1 IEC 68 2 6 IEC 68 2 29 1987 IEC 68 2 56 IEEE 802 3 1996 ISO IEC 11172 3 1993 ISO IEC 13818 1 1995 ISO IEC 13818 2 2000 ISO IEC 13818 3 1994 ITU R BT 470 6 ITU T Rec G 742 1972 ITU R Rec 647 1986 RFC 791 1981 RFC 867 1985 RFC 4133 RFC 4152 RFC 1904 1996 SMPTE 272M 1994 SMPTE 291M 1998 SMPTE RP 168 2002 Digital Video Broadcasting DVB Implementation guidelines for the use of MPEG 2 Systems Video and Audio in Contribution and Primary Distribution Applications Radio Frequency Devices Safety of information technology equipment Basic Environmental Testing Procedures Basic Environmental Testing Procedures IEEE Standard for Local and metropolitan area networks Part 3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection CSMA CD Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications Information Technology Coding of moving pictures and associated audio for digital storage media at up to about 1 5 Mbit s Part3 Audio Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and Associated Audio Systems Partl Audio Information Technology Generic coding of moving pictures and associated audio Part 2 Video Information Technology Generic coding of moving pictures and associated audio Part 3 Audio Conventional Television Systems
38. C PCT n Gaudio Processing Layer II Dynamic Range Compression Film Standard v Dolby Digital Ch 1 Audio 1 RF Overmodulation Protection off Mi Processing channels Pre Emphasis None 4 aPassthrough Bandwidth Lowpass Filter On x Test Tones Ch 2 Audio 2 DC Highpass Filter On al ch 3 Audio 3 A ach 4 Audio 4 Bit Stream Mode Main Audio Service w S Linear Dolby E Dolby Surround Mode No Indication v Copyright Original PES Frame Count 8 Apply 2 Select one of the dynamic range compression presets built into the Dolby Digital encoding decoding algorithm Each setting reduces the output of the audio bit stream to a characteristic dynamic range You may select between None Film Standard Film Light Music Standard Music Light Speech 3 If relevant enable the RF Overmodulation Protection By enabling this setting you use an RF pre emphasis filter to prevent RF over modulation in set top decoders The default is Off 4 If relevant select the 50 15 microseconds of CCITT J 17 Pre Emphasis Setting Pre Emphasis to on signifies a pre emphasis on the incoming signal Consequently the D9032 Encoder performs a de emphasis filtering of the signal 5 66 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Dolby Digital Processing Continued 10 11 12 If relevant enable the Bandwidth Lowpass Filter By enabling this filter you apply
39. CONTINUAL DEVELOPMENT OF NEW TECHNIQUES FOR INTRUDING UPON AND ATTACKING NETWORKS WE DO NOT WARRANT THAT ANY SOFTWARE ITEM OR ANY HARDWARE ITEM ON WHICH THE SOFTWARE ITEM IS USED WILL BE FREE FROM VULNERABILITY TO INTRUSION OR ATTACK EXCEPT FOR CLAIMS FOR PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY ITEMS OR SERVICES FURNISHED HEREUNDER WE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FOR INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OR LOSS OF PROFITS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS TRANSACTION OR ANY ACTS OR OMISSIONS ASSOCIATED THEREWITH OR RELATING TO THE SALE LICENSE OR USE OF ANY ITEMS FURNISHED WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON BREACH OF WARRANTY CONTRACT TORT OR OTHER LEGAL THEORY AND REGARDLESS OF THE CAUSES OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES WHETHER WE WERE AWARE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR WHETHER ANY OTHER REMEDY PROVIDED HEREIN FAILS IN NO EVENT SHALL OUR TOTAL LIABILITY HEREUNDER EXCEED AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID FOR ITEMS PURCHASED HEREUNDER IN NO EVENT SHALL WE BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER FOR ANY DAMAGES RELATED TO A LICENSED SOFTWARE ITEM IN EXCESS OF THE LESSER OF TEN THOUSAND UNITED STATES DOLLARS US 10 000 OR THE LICENSE FEE PAID BY PURCHASER TO US FOR THE LICENSED SOFTWARE ITEM If the Purchaser returns an Item to us that is not defective under the Warranty or for which the Warranty Period has expired we will perform diagnostic tests on the Item and repair the Item if
40. Continued See Page Setting Up the Teletext 5 84 Setting Up the Output Formats for Closed Captions 5 86 Section H Digital Program Insertion DPI 5 88 Setting Up the DPI 5 88 Section Setting Up the TS Output 5 91 Setting Up the TS Output Parameters 5 91 Setting Up the ASI Output Parameters 5 92 Setting Up the IP Streaming Parameters 5 93 Streaming Video to Many Set top Boxes Multicasting 5 97 Setting Up the PCR Synchronization 5 99 Setting Up the Conditional Access Parameters 5 101 Section J Setting Up the PSI 5 103 Enabling Disabling the PSI SI Information 5 103 Setting Up the Transport Stream 5 104 Setting Up the Video Program 5 105 Defining the Audio only Programs 5 106 Setting Up the Layer II Audio Program 5 107 Selecting the Dolby Digital Audio Descriptor Mode 5 109 Click Apply Setting Up the Dolby Digital Audio Program 5 110 Setting Up the Linear Audio Program 5 112 Setting Up the VBI PIDs and the Teletext Descriptor Table 5 114 Setting Up the NIT 5 117 Setting Up the Cable NIT 5 118 Setting Up the Satellite NIT 5 119 Setting Up the Terrestrial NIT 5 120 Section K Working with the System 5 121 Reading the System Information or Managing the System 5 121 5 4 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Overview Continued Topic Continued See Page Reading the Encoder Temperatures 5 123 Setting Up the Message Parameters 5 124 Viewing Messages 5 126 Viewing the Message Log 5 127
41. Driver Type Driver Version Required Core Company Task Driver 3 0 1 Device Driver 3 0 37 3 20 Device Driver 3 0 7 1 0 1 Device Driver 3 04 Device Driver 3 0 3 Device Driver 3 0 1 Device Driver 3 0 0 Protocol Driver 3 0 23 Device Driver 3 0 9 Component Driver 3 0 8 Protocol Driver 3 0 31 3 0 12 3 0 15 3 0 15 3 0 15 3 0 15 3 0 15 3 0 15 3 0 10 3 0 12 3 0 12 Scientific Atlanta Scientific Atlanta Scientific Atlanta Scientific Atlanta Scientific Atlanta Scientific Atlanta Scientific Atlanta Scientific Atlanta Scientific Atlanta Scientific Atlanta Scientific Atlanta OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Install Help 5 8 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Search Range for the D9032 Encoder Agent To Set Up the Search Range Do as follows 1 From the COPERNICUS Explorer right click the SNMP Protocol and select Properties The SNMP protocol is under Protocol Drivers 2 Click the Add button 3 Select IP address from the Identify Agent by drop down list 4 Type the IP address of the D9032 Encoder in the IP address range From field 5 Select protocol version SNMPv2C Identify Agent by Agent Protocol IP address Protocol Version C SNMPy 1 Host Name SNMPyv2C IP address range Advanced Communication From 10 11 67 112 Parameters To l Advanced Cancel 6 Click Advanced m Com
42. IP Address page 4 27 Note The default gateway setting is not affected by the Default command Note The default gateway 0 0 0 0 means that no gateway is used Reset Parameters N A Description Resets boots the D9032 Encoder The D9032 Encoder displays a message asking you to confirm the resetting of the unit Press SELECT to reset and the Up arrow key or PREV to leave the menu without resetting Note You should reset the D9032 Encoder if e there has been a temperature alarm causing the D9032 Encoder to disable functionality e you have set or changed the IP address subnet mask or gateway of one of the IP interfaces of the D9032 Encoder via the front panel display Note The reset may take up to 90 seconds Default Parameters N A Description The D9032 Encoder will display a message asking you to confirm the defaulting of the unit Press SELECT to default and the Up arrow key or PREV to leave the menu without defaulting Use the default settings if you have set up the D9032 Encoder with illegal and incompatible settings to get the encoder back ina functional state Note The default may take up to 10 seconds IP Management Port Parameters Management IP TS Out IP Description Selects between the two management ports 4 28 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B System Menu Continued IP IPsec Destination Address Parameters lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt
43. IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO i ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD AVC VIDEO AND OR ii DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA L L C SEE HTTP WWW MPEGLA COM Notices Continued Accordingly please be advised that service providers content providers and broadcasters are required to obtain a separate use license from MPEG LA prior to any use of AVC MPEG 4 H 264 encoders and or decoders Safety Precautions Protect yourself from electric shock and your system from damage e This product complies with international safety and design standards Observe all safety procedures that appear throughout this guide and the safety symbols that are affixed to this product e If circumstances impair the safe operation of this product stop operation and secure this product against further operation Avoid personal injury and product damage Do not proceed beyond any symbol until you fully understand the indicated conditions You may find this symbol on the product and or in the literature that accompanies this product It indicates important operating or maintenance instructions You may
44. If relevant connect the output signals from the D9032 Encoder connectors ASI OUT 1 and or ASI OUT2 to the ASI input connectors of the equipment after the D9032 Encoder The equipment after the D9032 Encoder could be a Transport Stream Multi plexer such as the D9600 Re multiplexer and Transport Stream Processor If relevant connect the output signals from the D9032 Encoder connectors ASI MONITOR to an ASI monitor decoder If relevant connect the output signals from the D9032 Encoder connectors IP TS OUT and Aux to an IP Router or switch Use a shielded Cat 5 or better ethernet cable For further information see Connecting the IP TS Output page 3 21 Connect the power sources of all the units For further information see the specific product manuals in question When connecting the power source to the D9032 Encoder it takes less than 90 seconds for the unit to initialize The front panel display shows the startup display 1 2 Quick Setup Read Me First 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Setup Setting Up the IP Parameters of the D9032 Encoder Always verify that the IP parameters of the D9032 Encoder are correct before you try to control the unit for the first time from the ROSA management system Also do as follows when a D9032 Encoder is added to or reinserted in the installation Proceed as follows to set the IP settings of the D9032 Encoder and if necessary change them 1 Press the MENU key on the front panel of the
45. If you select Embedded the D9032 Encoder extracts the audio embedded in the active SDI video signal of the program Select the sample rate of the signal You set the sampling rate to 32 44 1 or 48 kHz Note It is not recommended to increase the encoding sample rate above the input sample rate Note For the lowest audio bit rates use the lowest sample rate for improved quality Select the analog input impedance Set the input impedance to 600 Ohms if 600 Ohm termination is required in your system Set the encoder s input impedance to High if the source may not be loaded 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 63 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Audio Input Continued 8 10 11 Select the digital input impedance Use 110 Ohms if the audio interface is an AES EBU interface Use 75 Ohms if the audio interface is an AES 3id interface Note Only channels 3 and 4 support AES EBU Set the analog clipping level The legal range is from 6000 to 24000 mdBu You typically set the clipping level 6 dB above your maximum program level So for a maximum level of 9 dBu set the clipping to 15000 mdBu If your maximum level is 15 dBu set the clipping level to 21000 mdBu The resolution is 500 mdBu Note You will only get unity gain if you set the clipping level to the same value for the encoder as the maximum output level in the decoder Set the relative delay This setting is only applicable to internal Dolb
46. Linear Dolby E 2 If relevant set and enable the left and or right test tones Note Test Tones are not applicable when Passthrough of Dolby Digital is selected Note When Test Tones Left or Test Tones Right are set to Off the respective channel encodes the incoming signal This option determines whether to send a test pattern to the left and or right channel and the frequency Hz or kHz and amplitude of that test pattern See the table below for possible options 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 71 Setting Up Dolby Digital Test Tones Continued Test Pattern Values Frequency Amplitude dBFS Off 125 Hz 1 05 500 Hz 1 05 1 kHz 1 05 1 kHz 21 dB 21 05 1 kHz 61 dB 61 05 2 kHz 1 05 10 kHz 1 05 Silence Note Digital Silence is used to create a stream with perfect or digital silence Note The test tone frequencies apply at a sampling frequency of 48 KHz 3 Click Apply 5 72 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Linear Dolby E Audio Input To Set Up the Linear Dolby E Audio Input Proceed as follows to set up the Linear Dolby E Audio Input 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Audio tab expand the Linear Dolby E icon and click the Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 or Ch 4 icon from the sub pages summary video pre processor audio C ver C o a Layer II C Enable Sample Rate Converter dolb
47. NoName Apply 2 Type the program number in the Program field The program number must be unique within the transport stream and in the range from 1 and 65535 Zero disables the program in question 3 Type the PMT PID in the PMT field The legal range is from 16 to 81904 Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other program element 4 Type the program name in the Program Name field You may type alphanumeric characters Up to 30 characters are allowed The supported character set is ASCII 5 Type the name of the program provider in the Program Provider field You have a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters at your disposal 6 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for any other programs you want to define 7 Click Apply 4 Note that the DVB tables use the PIDs from 16 to 20 5 106 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Layer Il Audio Program To Set Up the Layer Il Audio Program Proceed as follows to set up the Layer II Audio Program 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the PSI tab expand the Layer II icon and click one of the channel icons from the sub pages oPsI Ch 1 2 Audio 1 Transport Stream chi video Program Ref Video v Audio PID 8001 Enable PCR G Layer II O OCh 1 2 Audio Language swe Language Type Undefined v ach 3 4 Audio 2 och 5 6 Audio 3 Ch 2 Ch 7 8 Audio 4 Program
48. Systems sijis ssissecisvvseessvoevssevevostessteepovtvepvveorenes 5 81 Setting Up the VBI Lines in 525 Lines Systems e ssseeseesissesssreseerereesisesresseseesesees 5 83 Setting Upthe Teletext isa asear e iE a eatarra aie E EE aE A 5 84 Setting Up the Output Formats for Closed Captions sssssesssisseseeresrssesresrseeresese 5 86 4019394 Rev B xxiii Contents Continued Section H Digital Program Insertion DPI ccccscecsesecssesseeseeteesecsseeseeseeeeceeceseeseeas 5 88 Setting Upthe DEL sisisi acs rary abortive Sh tomes E scm E pai a Ra 5 88 Section Setting Up the TS Output ccceccsseeeeseeeeceseesecseeseeeessaecnecseeeseeseseees 5 91 Setting Up the TS Output Parameters wi scasiwns iicneenrnea mage denmeintes 5 91 Setting Up the ASI Output Param ete neat s ssdevsnand sersnmaneastomamersasn lene umeannnnuseeah ise 5 92 Setting Up the IP Streaming Parameters iissccscasicstsssheurtoiacteanbagtensanelpnibnatonseatersiactaeres 5 93 Streaming Video to Many Set top Boxes Multicasting s sssessssessrssseseesessessssesees 5 97 Setting Up the PCR Synchronization sessessesessesessestesesrestesesessesrestenesreseseenessenteneneess 5 99 Setting Up the Conditional Access Parameters isi i cci se tedessvanescensnsnctocedesevestorendiceger 5 101 Section J Setting Up the PSI a ae a Teena EE E EE EEEE EERE 5 103 Enabling Disabling the PSI SI Information ss ssessssesessesresissess
49. Type the number of B Pictures The number of B pictures must be 0 1 or 2 Note Some limitations apply in order to adhere to the MPEG standard See below for the legal GOP length with zero one and two B pictures Zero B One B Two B pictures pictures picture LegalGOP 1to 2 to 3 4 6 7 9 10 12 13 15 16 18 19 length 21 22 24 25 27 28 30 31 Note Generally it pays off to increase the GOP length if the video bit rate is low however lock up time in the decoder is increased for long GOPs For many applications GOP length of 12 with 2 B pictures or a GOP length of 15 with 2 B pictures is a suitable choice Set the Generate Display Sequence Extension Header to Yes if your decoder supports Display Sequence Extension Headers The default setting is No Set the Generate Composite Display Parameters to Yes if your input is composite The default setting is No This setting takes only effect if your input is composite and you use the clear sight module Set the value to No if your decoder doesn t support Composite Display Parameters Click Apply 5 26 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Video Encoder Delays To Set Up the Video Encoder Delays Proceed as follows to set up the Video Encoder Delays 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Video tab expand the Encoder icon and click the Delays icon from the sub pages
50. a single ended cable for the digital inputs For further information see Connecting the Audio Inputs page 3 12 Connect the statmux interface connector of each of the D9032 Encoders to one of the 16 statmux channel connectors of the Regulus Controller Use a one to one RS 232 cable For further information see Connecting the Statmux Interface page 3 17 If relevant connect the audio input signals for channels 3 and 4 to the terminal block connector labelled ANA DIG AUDIO IN 3 amp 4 For further information see Connecting the Audio Inputs page 3 12 If relevant connect the cable from the external alarm system to the ALARM connector For further information see Connecting to the Contact Closure or Cue Tone Interfaces page 3 16 4019394 Rev B Quick Setup Read Me First 1 1 Connecting the Units Continued 7 10 11 12 If relevant connect the external contact closure equipment or cue tone equipment to the contact closure respectively cue tone interface of the D9032 Encoder For further information see Connecting to the Contact Closure or Cue Tone Interfaces page 3 16 Connect the ETHERNET 10 100 BASE T MANAGEMENT connector of the D9032 Encoders to the Ethernet LAN of the ROSA management system or to the Ethernet for local setup via the embedded user interface Use a shielded Cat 5 or better ethernet cable For further information see Connecting the Ethernet Management Interface page 3 19
51. also supports Linear audio Audio Only The D9032 Encoder supports four mono or two stereo audio only programs One or more audio sources can be combined to make up a program 2 10 Introduction 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Outputs DVB ASI Transport Stream Output The D9032 Encoder has three DVB ASI outputs These outputs can be used as an input for e g a satellite modem or a multiplexer One of the outputs is an ASI monitor output for monitoring of the outgoing data stream Unlike the two other ASI outputs the monitor output cannot be muted The outputs support SI generation with standard tables compliant to MPEG 2 and DVB IP Transport Stream Output The D9032 Encoder has two IP TS outputs These outputs can be used as inputs to IP networks The output rate follows the ASI output rate 4019394 Rev B Introduction 2 11 Control and Management Interfaces Embedded Web Interface The embedded Web Interface enables you to set up and control the D9032 Encoder using the Ethernet management interface ROSA Management The ROSA COPERNICUS system is a multi server multi client based system enabling you to set up and manage a whole network of encoders In the ROSA Single User system the server and client is located on the same PC Consequently it has only one simultaneous user ROSA enables control and monitoring functionality of the D9032 Encoder installations with redundancy switching error reporting and remote cont
52. encoding 23 Line start 525 lines encoding 228 H Resolutions 352 480 528 544 640 704 and 720 V Resolutions 576 for 625 25 and 480 for 525 29 97 a If possible set the decoder to the corresponding line start A 2 Technical Specifications 4019394 Rev B Composite Video Input Video Formats Item Specification Composite video PAL systems B D G H I K M N and NTSC system M acc to BT 470 6 a The PAL M and PAL N video formats are only supported with the onboard composite module and not with the Advanced Video Input module Input Characteristics Item Specification Number of inputs 1 Type of connector BNC female Nominal internal termination 75Q impedance Return loss internal or external gt 35 dB 10 Hz to 5 5 MHz termination with or without power Nominal input level 0 dBV Maximum non useful DC 4V component Video Synchronization and Clamp Onboard Composite Module Item Specification Non math video sources No disturbances in picture with a maximum subcarrier deviation of 1 Hz Line frequency tolerance 30 ppm of nominal line frequency correct sync and clamp Maximum input line time jitter 300 ns Video Synchronization and Clamp Advanced Video Input Module Item Specification Clamp low frequency suppression gt 20 dB at 50 Hz gt 34 db at 5 Hz Input leve
53. expand the relevant channel icon and click the Test summary video Pre Processor audio C ve C om ai Audio Test Tones amp OLayer II O Enable Test Tones Ch 1 2 Audio 1 Processing Test Tones Left Off v Ch 1 Left all Mc 7 ma 2 etapa Test Tones Right Off v Test Tones Apply H Ch 3 4 Audio 2 och 5 6 Audio 3 ach 7 8 Audio 4 dolby Digital Linear Dolby E 2 If relevant set and enable the left and or right test tones Note When Test Tones Left or Test Tones Right are set to Off the respective channel encodes the incoming signal This option determines whether to send a test pattern to the left and or right channel and the frequency Hz or kHz and amplitude of that test pattern See the table below for possible options Test Pattern Values Frequency Amplitude dBFS Off 125 Hz 1 05 500 Hz 1 05 1 kHz 1 05 1 kHz 21 dB 21 05 1 kHz 61 dB 61 05 2 kHz 1 05 10 kHz 1 05 Silence Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Layer Il Test Tones Continued Note Digital Silence is used to create a stream with perfect or digital silence Note The test tone frequencies apply at a sampling frequency of 48 KHz 3 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 61 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Audio Input To Set Up the Dolby Digital Audio Note If the GUI displays grayed out fields or button
54. find this symbol on the product and or in the literature that accompanies this product It indicates a live terminal the symbol pointing to the terminal device You may find this symbol on the product and or in the literature that accompanies this product It indicates a protective earth terminal You may find this symbol on the product and or in the literature that accompanies this product It indicates excessive or dangerous heat gt Obe Power e Important This is a Class I product You must earth this product This product plugs into a socket outlet The socket outlet must be near this product and must be easily accessible Connect this product only to the power source that is indicated on the back panel of this product e If this product does not have a mains power switch the power cord serves this purpose Enclosure e Do not allow moisture to enter this product e Do not open the enclosure of this product unless otherwise specified e Do not push objects through openings in the enclosure of this product Cables e Always disconnect all power cables before servicing this product Always pull on the plug or the connector to disconnect a cable Never pull on the cable itself Do not walk on or place stress on cables or plugs Fuses e When AC supplied the D9032 Encoder has double pole neutral fusing e Always use a fuse that has the correct type and rating and is approved for use by the country
55. for a description of software GUIs other than that of ROSA Before You Begin Before you can view any messages from the D9032 Encoder in ROSA you must set up the trap destination for the messages For further information see Setting Up the Trap Destinations page 5 128 Overview When viewing messages you can specify which columns to show for each message and the order in which they are shown For further information please see the ROSA manual To View the Messages in ROSA Proceeed as follows to view the messages in ROSA 1 Right click the D9032 Encoder icon from the COPERNICUS Explorer window 2 Select All messages or Pending messages If you select pending messages you will only see the active messages 3 Select the message you want to investigate The following table shows the most important message columns Heading Meaning Msg Info The main message description Name The detailed message description Msg Subject The channel in question Note Some messages from the D9032 Encoder contain additional details If you right click and select Toggle Detail from the menu you may get additional detailed information 5 126 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Viewing the Message Log Important Normally you use the ROSA message view to see any messages from the D9032 Encoder For further information see Viewing Messages page 5 126 However if ROSA COPERNICUS has been shut down or there have b
56. is disconnected The default video rate is also used to set up the TS rate budget For information on how much the other tributaries require of the available capacity see Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries page C 3 The standard default setting is 5 Mbit s For further information on setting up the default rates see Determining the Default Video Rate page 5 43 4 12 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B Video Menu Continued Video Bit Rates Statmux Bit Rates Maximum Parameters Steps Description 1 500 000 to 15 000 000 1 bit s This setting is used to avoid that the rate for a channel exceeds a specified value If you do not need rate limitation you should leave the setting at the maximum 15 Mbit s Example A typical application is that you want to extract programs from the statistical multiplex bouquet and forward these programs separately In that case you may need to limit the maximum rate of each channel to extract so that you avoid overflow of the equipment that handles the extracted statmux programs Note The maximum rate limit setting does not imply that the Statistical Multiplex Controller will try to go up to that rate but simply that it will not exceed that rate The maximum rate during operation may be lower if the statmux pool size does not allow room for it Stating a maximum rate limit may reduce the probability of reaching the max quality limit Video Bit Rates Variable Bit Ra
57. letter or other character is represented by a number Asynchronous Serial Interface A 270 Mbit s data stream similar to the 270 Mbit s SDI signal Note that the 270 Mbit s is only the ASI rate You may put in any MPEG stream from about 1 5 Mbit s to 120 Mbit s Asynchronous Serial Interface A 270 Mbit s data stream similar to the 270 Mbit s SDI signal Note that the 270 Mbit s is only the ASI rate You may put in any MPEG stream from about 1 5 Mbit s to 64 Mbit s Asynchronous Serial Interface A 270 Mbit s data stream similar to the 270 Mbit s SDI signal Note that the 270 Mbit s is only the ASI rate You may put in any MPEG stream from about 1 5 Mbit s to 64 Mbit s The width to height ratio of an image A 4 3 aspect ratio means the horizontal size is a third again wider than the vertical size Standard television ratio is 4 3 or 1 33 1 Wide screen DVD and HTDV aspect ratio is 16 9 or 1 78 1 Basic Interoperable Scrambling System Bidirectionally Predictive Pictures Pictures that are coded based on both preceding and subsequent pictures Content Advisory data The clear session word is the 12 character unencrypted BISS E key that is used to scramble descramble the transmitted data The clear SW once entered via the user interface is not readable through any unit interface DCE Data Communication Equipment DPI Digital Program Insertion DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency There is no baseband multiplexing done on DTMF sign
58. process is called 3 2 pulldown Basically 3 2 pulldown inversion brings back movie s original frame rate from NTSC s 30 fps to 24 fps 3 2 Pulldown The 3 2 pulldown technique is used to generate video at NTSC frame rate from a 24 fps film source With this technique additional video frames are generated from the film frames according to a characteristic repetitive pattern Refer to the figure below Original film Source video Visual Video frames frames frames appearance to be encoded v 1 v v v v v y A y m v SO CMD OO RA Bs 00 10 A J An unwanted side effect of this process is picture redundancy and higher load of an encoder The 3 2 pulldown inversion technique inverts the process and removes the redundant frames thus increasing encoding efficiency 3 2 Pulldown Inversion The 3 2 PDI feature of the D9032 Encoder excludes the pictures of a 525 line video signal that have been duplicated through 3 2 pulldown and allows the D9032 Encoder to encode the original frames at film rate The data in the Transport Stream from the D9032 Encoder includes information on picture repetition so that a standards compliant decoder may output a video signal at correct 29 97 Hz NTSC frame rate 5 52 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B 3 2 Pulldown and 3 2 Pulldown Inversion Continued Encoder Behavior The 3
59. relevant set the minimum video rate The legal range is from 0 5 to 15 Mbit s The instantaneous rate during statmux operation will not go below the stated minimum video rate The instantaneous rate may be higher than the stated minimum video rate if so determined by the rate algorithm The minimum statmux rate depends on the complexity of the picture and the picture resolution We recommend as a starting point that you set the minimum video rate to half the default video rate Note The lowest recommended minimum rate varies depending on the horizontal resolution and the delay mode Horizontal Lowest Minimum Rate Mbit s Resolution Extended Normal Low Delay Delay Delay 720 704 1 11 1 30 1 49 640 0 91 1 10 1 40 544 528 0 86 1 00 1 31 480 0 76 0 86 1 20 352 0 65 0 76 0 99 5 40 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Statistical Multiplexing Continued 5 Set the priority The priority setting determines how to weight the video quality of a channel compared to the other channels in the statmux pool There is a total of 16 values from 0 to 15 so that you may give each of the 16 potential statmux channels a different priority if you want to You are also allowed to give different channels the same priority If all channels are equally important the priority setting should be the same for all channels The standard setting for all channels is 8 We recommend that you leave the p
60. reset may take up to 90 seconds Note The Pre Shared is not affected by the Default command IP IPsec Clear Pre Shared Key Parameters N A Description Clears the Pre Shared encryption Key Software Version Parameters N A Description The software version of the system controller 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 29 System Menu Continued Module Info Main Parameters Description Module Info CVI HQ Parameters Description Module Info SDI Parameters Description Module Info Adv Video Input Parameters Description Module Info Dual Audio Parameters Description Option License VBI Parameters Description N A The hardware and the software part numbers of the main board N A The hardware and the software part numbers of the high quality composite optional input module N A The hardware and the software part numbers of the SDI input module N A The hardware and the software part numbers of the Advanced Video Input module Enabled Disabled The hardware part number of the optional audio module The audio module contains two stereo channels or 4 mono channels Enabled Disabled Note VITC data in the incoming signal will automatically be transferred to the transport stream output independently of the VBI option The status of the license signifies the following Status Explanation Enabled The option is present and
61. setting is not affected by the Default command Note The default gateway 0 0 0 0 means that no gateway is used lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt The IP address of the IP TS Out interface Use the numeric keys to type the IP address Press the SELECT key to store the entered values Press the Up arrow key to leave the menu When you leave the IP menu by pressing the UP arrow key once more the IP Mask and Gateway parameters are validated against each other and stored Any inconsistencies will be shown in the display Important For the changes to take effect you must reset the D9032 Encoder after you have finished setting or changing the IP address subnet mask and default gateway The D9032 Encoder will display a reminder Note The reset may take up to 90 seconds Note The IP Address is not affected by the Default command lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt The subnet mask of the IP TS Out interface Setup similar to IP TS Out IP IP Address page 4 27 Note The subnet mask is not affected by the Default command 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 27 System Menu Continued IP TS Out IP Gateway Parameters lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt Description The default gateway of the IP TS Out interface The D9032 Encoder uses this gateway to route IP traffic across the network Setup similar to IP TS Out IP
62. settings file import or by a change via ROSA SNMP Remedy Not applicable Information None On Statmux interface RS 232 error Description An error in the RS 232 statmux interface has been detected Remedy Check that the RS 232 cabling is OK and that the equipment connected to the RS 232 interface operates as required Major On Subcarrier unlock Description The input is not able to lock to the subcarrier Remedy The frequency offset is likely too high Color reproduction may suffer Check your video source Major 4019394 Rev B Service and Maintenance 6 17 Message Description and Remedy Severity Default Enable alarm category Sync unstable Description The composite video Major B On synchronization signal is unstable Remedy Check the video source or use a frame synchronizer System boot Description System boot has been Information None On completed completed Remedy Not applicable Teletext input Description The teletext signal has Major None Off loss disappeared from the input Remedy Check your video source and the equipment that generates teletext Temperature Description The temperature is Warning B On approaching high approaching the upper limit for safe limit operation Remedy Check that the Fan malfunction message is enabled and not active Apply external cooling if the ambient temperat
63. software package for your D9032 Encoder For further information see Installing and Enabling Software Options page 5 135 For the D9032 Encoder the term pre processing covers noise reduction and pre analysis In the GUI of your D9032 Encoder you may enable or disable the pre processing When you have enabled pre processing you may then separately enable and disable noise reduction and pre analysis If you have not enabled pre analysis you may still use the horizontal luminance and chrominance filters but you will not get the benefit from the adaptive noise filters or the look ahead on the encoding and statmux control The pre analysis embraces the techniques the D9032 Encoder applies to gain knowledge about the video material before encoding takes place It is used to control the encoding the statmux allocation and the noise reduction filtering The PreSightPlus analysis suite includes e Luminance level analyzer e Complexity measure with motion compensation e Look ahead e 3 2 Pulldown detector e Auto Concatenation detector All of the above require that pre analysis has been enabled For the highest possible video quality you should enable the pre analysis The pre analysis interacts with the control of the MPEG 2 encoding engine so that MPEG 2 parameters and encoding behavior may be changed dynamically frame by frame For statistical multiplexing the look ahead of the pre analysis provides an early warning of th
64. source guidelines 3 6 A AC fuse rating 6 6 A 21 accessory kit F 2 Action on input loss 5 23 AES EBU input 3 17 AES 3id setting up 5 56 AFD setting up 5 33 alarm connector 3 18 interface 3 18 specifications A 19 system connectors 3 18 view 5 126 alarm relay connector 3 18 overview 2 13 analog audio front panel setup 4 17 4 18 4 20 specifications A 12 ASI output front panel setup 4 23 setting up 5 92 specifications A 17 A 18 audio input connector 3 17 front panel setup 4 17 4 18 4 20 specifications A 12 audio rate A 14 A 15 Auto Concatenation 5 25 C centralized DC power systems 3 7 clock synchronization setting up 5 133 closed captions setting up 5 87 component input specifications A 8 composite input specifications A 3 connectors alarm system 3 18 ASI outputs 3 20 audio input 3 17 contact control 3 16 data input 3 17 macro 3 16 management 3 19 statmux 3 17 video input 3 17 contact control connector 3 16 pin allocation 3 16 D D9032 Encoder driver license 5 7 license driver 5 7 data input 3 17 connector 3 17 data interfaces specification A 16 DC fuse rating 6 7 A 21 replacing 6 7 default video rate guidelines 5 43 setting up 5 40 delay audio 5 107 5 110 guidelines 5 29 setting up video 5 27 device driver installing 5 7 license 5 7 version 5 121 4019394 Rev B Index 1 Index Continued digital audio AES
65. that the Used Payload 3 If required apply Reed Solomon error correction codes to your output Select 188 or 204 bytes mode The value must be the same in the encoder and the decoder Format Meaning 188 188 bytes mode without Reed Solomon algorithm 204 RS OFF 204 bytes mode without the Reed Solomon algorithm applied This means that there is RS overhead but only with dummy bytes 204 RSON 204 bytes mode with Reed Solomon algorithm for ASI outputs For IP outputs there is no Reed Solomon algorithm Note If you use a modulator you should switch off the RS error correction 4 If relevant select Disable Output when Backup is required If you select Yes and check the Trigger Backup box on the System Message page for the event in question the ASI and IP outputs will be disabled when the backup trigger alarm occurs Note The output on the monitor port will not be disabled 5 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 91 Setting Up the ASI Output Parameters To Set Up the ASI Output Parameters Proceed as follows to set up the ASI Output 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the TS Output tab and the ASI icon from the sub pages TS Output ASI Bas Enable Output on v S o asinmi Packet O Burst Used Payload bit s The GUI displays the bit rate of the used payload if you press Reload If the D9032 Encode
66. the Linear Audio Program To Set Up the Linear Audio Program Proceed as follows to set up the Linear Audio Program 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the PSI tab expand the Linear icon and click one of the channel icons from the sub pages AEE psi Ch 1 Audio 1 Transport Stream PID 8001 video amp audio Language swe Language Type Undefined v Layer I Apply Dolby Digital amp Linear Dolby E Ch 1 Audio 1 Ch 2 Audio 2 Ch 3 Audio 3 Ch 4 Audio 4 2 Type the audio PID The legal range is from 16 to 8190 Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other program element 7 Note that the DVB tables use the PIDs from 16 to 20 5 112 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Linear Audio Program Continued 3 Type the audio language You must type in three letters The supported languages are according to ISO 639 2he audio language is signalled in a PSI table and used by satellite receivers Refer to Appendix D for the standard codes for the representation of names of languages according to ISO 639 2 4 Select the audio language type This is a language descriptor which besides the audio language above indicates which type of audio you transfer Language Type Meaning Undefined Undefined Used widely for the main program sound Clean Effects Expressly having no language i e the sound track without any speech
67. the MS Internet Explorer the path of the settings file should less than 50 characters long Click Transfer Settings File From Device if you want to create a settings file You can save the settings file on your hard disk or on a network where other D9032 Encoders can import the settings file Important You must give the file name the extension ini in order to be able to see it when you want to Transfer Settings File From Device Note The settings file is a plain ASCII file which can be edited in a ASCII editor like notepad If relevant upgrade the software of your D9032 Encoder Important It is recommend that you store the old setting files before upgrading to a new software version This enables you to restore your settings if you need to downgrade Note It may take several minutes to upgrade the software for all 4 modules If possible keep an eye on the front panel and make sure NOT to power cycle the encoder when the front panel reads that a upgrading process is taking place Important Due to a restriction in the MS Internet Explorer the path of the software package file appl pkg should be less than 50 characters long If relevant enter the CLLI Common Language Location Identifier Code This is normally an 11 character alphanumeric code used to identify the location of the encoder within a network 10 If relevant lock the front panel by checking the box 11 Click Apply 5 122 Setup and Monitor
68. to encode 525 lines material This improves the picture quality when encoding 525 lines material that originates from film Important Make sure the pre analysis has been enabled and that auto concatenation has been disabled Otherwise the 3 2 PDI will not work You disable auto concatenation from the Video Encoder tab page Turn off the 3 2 PDI in the following instances Situation Reason Your decoders are not fully MPEG The decoders may not accept information 2 compliant on picture repetition and cannot regenerate a correct video sequence You need to encode all frames ina 3 2 PDI removes some of the frames and 525 lines system this means that you cannot provide full picture to picture transparency from the video input to the Transport Stream Note The 3 2 PDI feature is not applicable for 625 lines 25 Hz systems The D9032 Encoder automatically disables 3 2 PDI if you set the D9032 Encoder to PAL or SD1625 input format Note Enabling 3 2 PDI increases the delay with 1 frame Important Do not enable or disable 3 2 PDI during live operation The D9032 Encoder restarts if you enable or disable 3 2 PDI 5 48 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Pre Processor Parameters Continued 5 Set the horizontal luminance and chrominance low pass filters The horizontal filters are used to improve the visual appearance during reduced resolution and or when there is noise in the pi
69. to 8190 Description You may not use the same PID for any other program element Dolby Digital lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Parameters Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Description Select the channel you want to set up Dolby Digital lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Control Parameters Enable Disable Description Enable or disable the channel in question Dolby Digital lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Input Parameters Analog Digital Embedded Description The D9032 Encoder inputs the signal from the Analog Digital input connector in the selected format If you select Embedded the D9032 Encoder extracts the audio embedded in the active SDI video signal of the program The packet and pair is set in the GUI Dolby Digital lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Sample Rate Parameters 32000 Hz 44100 Hz 48000 Hz Description The sample rate of the input signal It is not recommended to increase the encoding sample rate above the input sample rate For the lowest audio bit rates use the lowest sample rate for better quality Dolby Digital lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Data Rate Note This menu will only be displayed if you have installed the Dolby Digital option Parameters 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 kbit s Description Settings for the compressed bit rate are available from 56 to 640 kbit s Increasing the number in this field increases the audio bandwidth at the encoder improving the quality of the audio transmitted by the encoder The def
70. type a figure in the range from 16 to 8190 Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other element 4 Accept the suggested Video PID or type a new one You may type a figure in the range from 16 to 8190 Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other element 5 Type the SDT program name You may type alphanumeric characters Up to 30 characters are allowed The supported character set is ASCII 6 Type the name of the SDT program provider You have a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters at your disposal 7 Click Apply 3 Note that the DVB tables use the PIDs from 16 to 20 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 105 Defining the Audio only Programs To Define the Audio Only Program Proceed as follows to define the Audio only Program 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the PSI tab and click the Audio icon from the sub pages summary video Pre Provessor audo ver om I EPEE IPSI Audio Program Transport Stream Audio Program Table video Program Program PMT PID Program Name Program Provider audio 1 2 8021 Radio 1 Lowland Radio Layer II Dolby Digital 2 3 8022 Radio 2 Lowland Radio QLinear Dolby 3 4 8023 Radio News Highland Radio aval QNIT 4 5 8024 NoName NoName 5 6 8025 NoName NoName 6 7 8026 NoName NoName 7 8 8027 NoName NoName 8 9 8028 NoName
71. until a system reset or a video input loss or until the VII WSS returns Unless you have specific requirements set the Signaled AFD to DVB mode You select DVB mode when the signaled aspect ratio must follow the generated AFD value in accordance with DVB standard TR 101 154 V1 4 1 You set up the generated AFD value via the Active Format Descriptor combo box described in step 2 You select Proprietary mode when the encoder is used together with the Titan IRD MKII decoder from Scientific Atlanta This decoder needs the original video aspect ratio to produce a correct center cut picture on a 4 3 monitor 6 Click Apply Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Video Encoder Rate To Set Up the Video Encoder Rate Proceed as follows to set up the Video Encoder Rate 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Video tab expand the Encoder icon and click the Encoder Rate icon from the sub pages Summary video Pre Processor audio ver I om video Encoder Rate H Encoder Video Rate Mode Encoder Rate Fixed O Statistical Multiplexing statistical Multiplex Saat ea Alone Wana O Stand alone Variable Bit Rate Fixed Video Rate 5 000 000 bit s Statistical Multiplexing Pool Pool O Pool B Apply 2 Select Fixed mode or Stand alone Variable Bit Rate or Statistical Multiplexing mode Note To be able to use the statistical multiplexing feature you must hav
72. use the same PID for any other element 5 88 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the DPI Continued 10 11 12 13 Set the Bandwidth Reservation Bit Rate The bandwidth reservation bit rate describes the packet bandwidth of the DPI stream in bits per second Possible range is 1540 to 35000 bit s and 0 0 disables the reservation of a fixed bandwidth for DPI Note The bandwidth reservation bit rate is typically used in connection with encryption of the encoded signal so that the splice cannot be detected Set the Heart Beat Duration Period The heart beat is used to signal a live DPI PID connection Possible range is from 0 to 3600 seconds between heart beat packets Note Typically you won t need the heartbeat duration setting if you have set the bandwidth reservation bit rate to something different from 0 Set up the Event Source This is the Event Source ID for the alternate program to be inserted The legal range is from 0 to 15 The default is 0 Set up the Event Number This number indicates together with the Event Source the unique identification of the program to be inserted The legal range is from 0 to 268435455 Set up the Program ID This indicates the ID of the alternate Program to be inserted The legal range is from 0 to 65535 Set up the Avail Count This parameter represents the expected maximum number of breaks e g advertisements in the program Entering 0 means that the paramet
73. yi 13 14 Empty vi 14 13 Empty i 115 16 Empty i 16 17 Empty 17 18 Empty i 18 19 Empty v 119 20 Empty i 20 21 Closed Captions i 21 Type Empty xj Empty i Empty b Empty y Empty 4 Empty Empty v Empty v Empty x Empty x Empty x Closed Captions 4 Anniv Relnad Haln data and select the data type 2 Click on the fields to activate the drop down menu of the various lines with VBI Important You must also enable the VBI resource for the data to be transferred For further information see Selecting VBI Source and Enabling VBI Resources page 5 77 The following table shows the VBI data the lines in which it may be located and the maximum number of selectable lines Data Lines Max Number of Lines Transparent Lines 10 to 22 field 1 and 10 to 22 4 per field Proprietary field 2 VITC 10 to 20 and 273 to 282 1 per field Closed Captions 21 fields 1 and 2 1 per field 3 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring Setting Up the Teletext To Set Up the Teletext Proceed as follows to set up the Teletext 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the VBI tab and the Teletext icon from the sub pages summary video Pre Processor audio ver om VBI Teletext 4625 Lines Setup O Inverted Teletext 5
74. 0 0 IP 0 0 0 0 Port Number 666 Port Number 666 TTL 128 Maintain TS Rate Number of TS 7 Packets z Apply 2 From this page you set up the IP parameters for the main receiver as well as a backup receiver For information about how to set up the IP parameters of the D9032 Encoder IP TS Out connector and Aux connector see Setting Up the IP Networking page 5 137 3 Select UDP from the Mode select box to enable IP streaming Depending on the status of Enable Backup box this setting enables IP streaming on one or two ports as described in the next step 4 Check the Enable Backup box to automatically stream IP packets to the backup receiver as well Note Data is streamed to the backup receiver from the Aux connector If the Enable Backup box is unchecked and the Mode described above is UDP IP streaming is only enabled to the main receiver Note Data is streamed to the main receiver from the IP TS Out connector 5 Type the MAC address of the receiver of IP streaming packets The MAC address implies unicast streaming 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 93 Setting Up the IP Streaming Parameters Continued 6 Type the IP address of the receiver of IP streaming packets IP multicast addresses class D must for practical reasons be in the range from 224 0 1 0 to 239 255 255 255 Addresses outside this range are used for broadcast or unicast services 7 Type the destination port of the receiver of IP s
75. 0 chroma format if you want to run statistical multiplexing 6 Enable Auto Concatenation if the video input has been previously encoded Important You must disable 3 2 PDI to make auto concatenation work as 3 2 PDI and auto concatenation cannot coexist 3 2 PDI can be disabled from the Pre Processor tab page When auto Concatenation is enabled the D9032 Encoder monitors the input video searching for the fingerprint of a previously encoded I frame MPEG 2 intra coded picture Whenever this is detected the D9032 Encoder will align the position of target encoding I frames to the position of the input I frames This is done with a few seamless adjustments to the GOP Note The alignment of the GOP sequence when cascading a number of encoders is known to cause considerably less degradation to the picture quality than if no effort is made to align the anchor frames Note The encoding GOP length must be a multiple of the GOP length used in the previously encoded input material for the detection of I frames to work Note For auto concatenation to work the previous encoding must be with full picture resolution You should use the SDI input interface If you use the Composite input interface analog noise may prevent certain detection of the input I frame position 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 25 Setting Up the Video Encoder Continued ie 10 11 Type the GOP Length The GOP length must be in the range from 1 to 32
76. 0 seconds 1 You can also set up the IP address of the D9032 Encoder from the GUI 4019394 Rev B Quick Setup Read Me First 1 3 Setting up the D9032 Encoders from ROSA or Via the Web Interface To Set up and Manage the D9032 Encoders From ROSA Proceed as follows to set up and manage the D9032 Encoders from ROSA 1 4 From the ROSA Management system select the D9032 Encoder to set up Unless changed the default IP address of the D9032 Encoder is 150 158 230 250 If you haven t previously defined a user name and password double click the D9032 Encoder icon to open the GUI If you have previously defined a user name and a password right click and select Properties Type user name and password To Set up and Manage the D9032 Encoder Via the Embedded Web Interface Proceed as follows to set up and manage the D9032 Encoder via the embedded Web interface 1 4 Start up Microsoft Internet Explorer The Internet Explorer must be version 6 0 or greater Type the IP address of the D9032 Encoder in the Address Bar and press Enter Unless changed the default IP address of the D9032 Encoder is 150 158 230 250 Per default the Encoder has no user name and password This means that the IP address alone is sufficient to launch the encoder GUI Proceed to steps 3 and 4 below if you have created a logon Type the user name if you have previously created a logon a User name sa v Password ee
77. 062590 DPI signalling 70062580 Statistical Multiplexing 70041750 4 2 2 70041730 PreSightPlus Noise Reduction 40091530 Dolby Digital Channel land 23 40091540 Dolby Digital Channel 3 and 4 70047060 Auto Concatenation 4015093 SDI Input combined ClearSight and SDI module a Pre installed in all North American basic configurations F 4 Equipment and Accessories 4019394 Rev B Options and Accessories Continued Optional Accessories The following optional accessories are available Part Description To be used Comment number 4008850 Kit AC Power Supply Unit Spare part 4009980 Kit DC Power Supply Unit Spare part 4008940 Kit fan unit The fan lifetime is at least 4 years at 45 C ambient temperature 4008851 Kit Dual Audio Module Spare part 4015092 Kit Advanced Video Input Board Spare part upgrade kit 40123349 H 264 upgrade kit Upgrade kit a See the AVC MPEG 4 H 264 license notice in the Notices section at the front of the manual 4019394 Rev B Equipment and Accessories F 6 Equipment and Accessories 4019394 Rev B Appendix G References Applicable Documents AES3 1992 ANSI SMPTE 12M 1995 AS NZS 2002 ATSC Standard August 2001 708 B December 1999 CSA C 22 2 No 60950 2000 EIATIA 232 E 1991 EN 55022 1998 including A1 2000 EN 55024 1998 including A1 2001 EN 60950 2000 EN 61000 3 2 2000 EN 61000
78. 22 57 6 54 8 56 kbit s 62 7 64 8 62 7 62 7 64 8 62 7 64 kbit s 67 9 72 70 5 73 1 UE 70 5 80 kbit s 83 6 86 4 86 2 88 8 86 4 86 2 96 kbit s 99 2 100 8 101 8 104 4 108 101 8 112 kbit s 120 1 122 3 117 5 120 1 1229 125 3 128 kbit s 135 8 136 7 133 2 135 8 136 7 141 160 kbit s 167 1 165 5 172 3 167 1 172 7 172 3 192 kbit s 198 4 201 5 203 7 203 7 201 5 203 7 224 kbit s 229 8 230 3 235 235 2S 235 256 kbit s 266 3 266 3 266 3 266 3 266 3 266 3 320 kbit s 329 331 1 329 334 2 331 1 336 8 384 kbit s 396 9 395 8 399 5 396 9 395 8 39915 a Applies to 188 byte packet mode If 204 byte packet mode is used you must multiply by a factor of 204 188 C 6 Transport Stream Rates 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries Continued Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Passthrough The various audio rates require the following transport stream rates These figures apply to audio attached to the video or to another audio only program respectively to an audio only program Required TS Capacity kbit s Required TS Capacity kbit s Audio Attached to the Video or Audio Only Audio Attached to an Audio Only Program Audio 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Encoding Rate Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency 56 kbit s 58 8 59 4 58 8 62 7 64 8 64 6 64
79. 25 Lines Setup Teletext closed Captions aa rer Fenaa H 2 Unless you have specific requirements don t check the Inverted Teletext box When you check the Inverted Teletext box the D9032 Encoder accepts inverted framing words Typically inverted framing words are found in the teletext data when you use the teletext system for transmission of proprietary data Inverted Teletext is discarded by the TV sets Note Inverted teletext is processed and sent together with normal teletext according to the standard EN 300 472 It is not marked to be inverted teletext in the transport stream as specified in the DVB VBI standard EN 301 775 For encoders with the ClearSight or SDI module set the maximum number of EBU teletext lines to be transmitted from the input signal You set this to 16 unless you have specific requirements Important The Maximum Teletext Lines setting is grayed out if you have installed the Adv Video Input board In this case you set up both the DVB VBI and EBU teletext lines under the 625 lines setup page Note The 16 lines denote a maximum of 16 lines per field i e 32 lines When using this method of transferring teletext you don t use the 625 Lines Setup In stead every line is examined and if it contains teletext it is transferred If it doesn t contain teletext or is specified to contain transparent lines it is not transferred The lowest lines in field one will be transmitted first and then
80. 3 3 1995 including A1 2001 EN 300 468 V1 4 1 EN 50083 9 E 1998 ETR 162 E1 ETR 211 E 2 1997 ETR 290 05 1997 ETSI EN 300 468 V1 4 1 2000 11 Serial transmission format for two channel linearly represented digital audio data Television Audio and Film Time and Control Code Limits and methods of measurements of radio disturbance characteristics of information technology equipment Digital Audio Compression AC 3 Rev A Digital Television DTV Closed Captioning Safety of information technology equipment Interface between data terminal equipment and data circuits Limits and methods of measurements of radio disturbance characteristics of information technology equipment Information technology equipment Immunity characteristics Limits and method of measurement Safety of information technology equipment Limits for harmonic current emission Limitations of voltage fluctuations and flicker Digital Video Broadcasting DVB Specification for Service Information SI in DVB systems Interfaces for CATV SMATV headends and similar professional equipment Allocation of Service Information SI codes for DVB systems Digital broadcasting systems for television guidelines on implementation and usage of service information Measurement guidelines for DVB systems Digital Video Broadcasting DVB Specification for Service Information SI in DVB systems 4019394 Rev
81. 3 pin Tyco male Input voltage Nominal voltage 48 V DC Voltage range 38 to 58 V DC Input power consumption lt 75 W fully equipped Internal fuse 3 15 AT single fuse in supply conductor 4019394 Rev B Technical Specifications A 21 General Mechanics Item Specification Sub rack According to IEC 297 3 Height 1 U 44 5 mm 1 75 Width 482 mm 19 Depth 480 mm 18 9 Installation depth 550 mm 21 6 Weight 7 6 kg 17 Ibs Connector access Rear Grounding stud M4 screw non detachable at rear panel A 22 Technical Specifications 4019394 Rev B General Continued Environment Item Specification Storage Transportation General The product is within the original packaging Humidity 95 Relative Humidity at 50 C 122 F according to IEC 60068 2 78 Test Cab Temperature 20 to 70 C 4 to 158 F Vibration transportation According to MIL STD 810E Method 514 4 Category 1 Basic transportation Fall transportation According to ETS 300 019 part 1 2 Transportation class 2 3 and thus EN IEC 60068 2 32 test Ef Free fall Operation Humidity 95 Relative Humidity at 50 C 122 F according to IEC 60068 2 78 Test Cab Temperature 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F Altitude 70 to 106 kPa ETS 300 019 part 1 3 stationary use Class 3 2 and thus EN IEC 60068 2 13 test M Cooling Fa
82. 3 terminal grounding type safety plug or a 2 terminal polarized safety plug The wide blade or the third terminal is provided for safety Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type or polarized safety plug To properly ground this equipment follow these safety guidelines e Grounding Type Plug For a 3 terminal plug one terminal on this plug is a protective grounding pin insert the plug into a grounded mains 3 terminal outlet Note This plug fits only one way If this plug cannot be fully inserted into the outlet contact an electrician to replace the obsolete 3 terminal outlet e Polarized Plug For a 2 terminal plug a polarized plug with one wide blade and one narrow blade insert the plug into a polarized mains 2 terminal outlet in which one socket is wider than the other Note If this plug cannot be fully inserted into the outlet try reversing the plug If the plug still fails to fit contact an electrician to replace the obsolete 2 terminal outlet Grounding Terminal If this equipment is equipped with an external grounding terminal attach one end of an 18 gauge wire or larger to the grounding terminal then attach the other end of the wire toa ground such as a grounded equipment rack Safety Plugs European Union e Class I Mains Powered Equipment Provided with a 3 terminal AC inlet and requires connection to a 3 terminal mains supply outlet via a 3 terminal power cord for proper connection to the pro
83. 30 V AC lt 6 0 V DC Max current lt 1A Contact Closure Interface Item Specification Connector type Terminal block Usage DPI according to SCTE 35 8 contacts Ground Input sense Cue Tone Interface Item Specification Connector type Terminal block shared with contact closure inputs Usage DPI according to SCTE 35 Input Impedance gt 20 kW Nominal input level 0 dBu Input level range 18 dBu to 6 dBu 4019394 Rev B Technical Specifications A 19 Control and Management Interfaces Continued Front Panel Interface Item Specification LCD 2 lines of 40 characters backlit LCD Keypad Arrow keys 0 to 9 Select Menu Prev and F1 to F4 keys The F1 to F4 keys are not supported in this release LEDs Green LED for power on Red LED for Alarm indication A 20 Technical Specifications 4019394 Rev B Section F Power and General Specifications Power AC Power Connector Item Specification Number of inputs 1 Type of connector Standard 3 pin IEC with filter no switch Input voltage 100 240 V AC 10 Input power consumption lt 75 W fully equipped Input frequency 47 to 63 Hz Fuse 2 0 AT fuse in both line and neutral conductor DC Power Connector Item Specification Number of inputs 1 Type of connector
84. 31 Setting the Date and Time Manually Proceed as follows to set the Date and Time 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the System tab and the Clock icon from the sub pages C o system Clock CaTemperatures Current Time 2000 01 05 20 01 47 Message Settings Trap Destination Modules OcClock synchronize 40ption License IP Network The GUI displays the internal date and time of the D9032 Encoder 2 Type the new date and time in the format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS in the Current Time field YYYY designate the year MM the month DD the day HH the hours MM the minutes and SS the seconds The time is the 24 hour clock 3 Click Apply Note After loss of power and after reset the time setting is lost If synchronization is enabled the time is sent from the COPERNICUS ROSA PC clock at the next synchronization 5 132 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting the Clock Synchronization Proceed as follows to set the Clock Synchronization 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the System tab expand the Clock icon and click the Synchronization icon from the sub pages A system Synchronize Temperatures O Enable Synchronization Message Settings R Message Log Interval 720 minutes Trap Destination P 2n Gecis k pues amp Clock Server Address 10 11 66 147
85. 32 Encoder connectors ASI OUT 1 and or ASI OUT2 to the ASI input connectors of the equipment after the D9032 Encoder Use a 75 ohm double braided cable The equipment following the D9032 Encoder could be a Transport Stream Multiplexer such as the combination of a Continuum DVP D9600 Re multiplexer and Transport Stream Processor Note The two outputs are identical and can be used for back up purposes 2 If you want to check the ASI output signal connect an ASI monitor to the ASI monitor connector Note The ASI monitor output cannot be muted but otherwise it works just like the two primary outputs 3 20 Installation 4019394 Rev B Connecting the IP TS Output The Ethernet Interface The RJ 45 interface IP TS OUT for 100 BASE T Ethernet is for output of the transport stream encapsulated in IP packets to the Main receiver Note You must set up the IP address the default gateway and the subnet mask in order to match the network connection This is done through the front panel menu For further information see Front Panel Setup page 1 3 Pin Allocation Ethernet Connector The following table shows the Ethernet connector and the pin allocation MDI interface Connector Pin Pin allocation 1 Tx 2 Tx 3 Rx 4 Not connected 5 Not connected 00 052 6 Rx 7 Not connected 8 Not connected Informative Notes For reliable Ethernet operation to run over a maximum segment len
86. 7 5 a PS r l OA Va Ba AATAL AO QUOI A l 04 129 Ne 3 8 Installation 4019394 Rev B Section B Connector Panel Overview D9032 Encoder Connector Panel The following drawing shows the AC version of the connector panel Cue Contact Analog Audio AC Power Not Used ASI Monitor Management ee a In i Closure n 1 2 PA NAV ANY 1 COMPOSITEIN REFIN ASIOUT1 ASIOUT2 ASIMONITOR ALA 10 100 BASE T STATMUX ETHERNET 100 BASE T NS Gienitossndo DIGITAL AUDIO IN D NYZ cocco0000000 UZAS j LEENAN NING A A MANAGEMENT AUX i out 5G r 2 ANA DIG l N3 amp 4 Composite Input ASI Output 1 2 Alarm Statmux IP TS Out Digital Analog D igital Audio In Main Audio In 04 032 Connectors The following table describes the function and type of the various connectors Connector Function Connector Number and Type Power AC or DC power IEC 60320 Sheet 14 or DC connector COMPOSITE IN Composite input PAL NTSC BNC REF IN Reference input for synchronization BNC to an external video source ASI OUT 1 ASI output Two identical outputs BNC ASI OUT 2 Outputs can be muted ASI Monitor ASI output This output cannot be BNC muted ALARM Alarm relays 9 pin sub D female 10 100 BASE T For control and management of local RJ45 MANAGEMENT and remote D9032 Encoder units 4019394 Rev B Installation 3 9 Overview Continued C
87. 8 5 124 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Message Parameters Continued For each of the messages select alarm relay A B C or none from the relay scroll list Note Any A alarm will result in the alarm LED on the front panel being illuminated Normally the A alarm is also used for triggering a backup via the ROSA Element Manager For information on alarm relays seeConnecting to the Contact Closure or Cue Tone Interfaces page 3 16 For each of the messages select a severity from the scroll list The following categories are available e Critical e Major e Minor e Warning Information Check Trigger Backup if you want the Digital Headend Backup task to be notified or the ASI and IP outputs to be turned off when the alarm event occurs For further information refer to the Digital Headend Backup Task Driver for Rosa 3 0 User s Guide part number 6985066 If required set a message Delay for each event in the range from 0 to 600 seconds In the event of the alarm this setting delays the display or reporting of the alarm until the delay has expired Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 125 Viewing Messages The ROSA and Web Interface From the ROSA Control and Management System you can view messages from several units on the network With the web interface you may have trap receiving software like the trap ringer installed Please consult the applicable manuals
88. 8 160 192 224 256 320 and 384 kbit s Note The bit rate must be lt 192 kbit s if you set the Layer II mode to Mono Note If you use Joint stereo we recommend that you use bit rates up to 128 or 192 kbit s Joint Stereo with a bit rate of 256 or 384 kbit s reduces sound quality compared to stereo 12 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 57 Setting Up the Layer Il Channel Information To Set Up the Layer Il Channel Information Proceed as follows to set up the Layer II Channel Information 1 From the Layer II sub pages expand the relevant channel icon and click the left or right channel icon summary i video Pre Processor audio vea I bom a A audio chi Layer II Emphasis off z S 3Ch 1 2 Audio 1 Processing Copyright Ch 1 Left allt ae ch 2 Right Sina Original Test Tones Apply Reload Help Each 3 4 Audio 2 Apply Reload j Help Ch 5 6 Audio 3 ach 7 8 Audio 4 C3Dolby Digital aLinear Dolby E Important The left channel applies to all encoding modes whereas the right channel only applies to Single Mono Right 2 Enable or disable Emphasis Normally emphasis is set to off Setting emphasis to on signals that the incoming data signal has pre emphasis Note Observe that the D9032 Encoder only sets a flag and that no de emphasis filtering takes place 3 Check the Copyright check box if you want to signal that the encoded bit stream is protected by c
89. 8 Mbit s distribution application Note When the number of statmux channels is high you may typically reduce the default video rates slightly while maintaining the same subjective quality If you have experience from a fixed rate service it may be a good idea to start using default video rates comparable to the previous fixed rates Note The above default video rates are only provided as guidance The actual default video rates in your setup will depend on your application the anticipated source material and your quality requirements The smaller the size of the statmux pool compared to the target video quality the less frequently you will reach the quality limit The table below shows our lowest recommended default video rate at various GOP lengths in Statmux mode GOP Lowest Recommended Default Rate in Statmux Mode length ength 720 704 640 Pixels 544 528 480 Pixels 352 Pixels Pixels Width Pixels Width Width Width Width Ionly 26Mbit s 2 5 5 Mbit s 25Mbit s 2 4 5 24 Mbit s Mbit s 22 24Mbit s 2 3 75 Mbit s 2 3 5 Mbit s 2 3 25 2 3 Mbit s Mbit s 23 23 Mbit s 2 2 75 Mbit s 2 2 5 Mbit s 2 2 25 2 2 Mbit s Mbit s 24 22 Mbit s 2 1 9 Mbit s 2 1 8 Mbit s 2 1 6 Mbit s 21 5 Mbit s 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 43 Determining the Default Video Rate Continued 2 If required set the default video rate higher for some of the channel s This improves the quality of the changed channels when the Statistical Multiplex Co
90. 9 2 676 8 676 8 Lines 14 Teletext 150 4 150 4 188 338 4 338 4 338 4 488 8 488 8 526 4 676 8 676 8 676 8 Lines 15 Teletext 150 4 188 188 338 4 338 4 338 4 488 8 526 4 526 4 676 8 676 8 714 4 Lines 16 Teletext 188 188 188 338 4 338 4 376 526 4 526 4 526 4 676 8 676 8 714 4 Lines 17 Teletext 188 188 188 338 4 376 376 526 4 526 4 526 4 676 8 714 4 714 4 Lines 18 Teletext 188 188 225 6 376 376 376 526 4 526 4 564 714 4 714 4 714 4 Lines 19 Teletext 188 225 6 225 6 376 376 376 526 4 564 564 714 4 714 4 752 Lines 20 Teletext 225 6 225 6 225 6 376 376 413 6 564 564 564 714 4 714 4 752 Lines 21 Teletext 225 6 225 6 225 6 376 413 6 413 6 564 564 564 714 4 752 752 Lines 22 Teletext 225 6 225 6 263 2 413 6 413 6 413 6 564 564 601 6 752 752 752 Lines 23 Teletext 225 6 263 2 263 2 413 6 413 6 413 6 564 601 6 601 6 752 752 789 6 Lines C 10 Transport Stream Rates 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries Continued Line Either WSS or VPS 0 Transparent 1 Transparent Line No WSS or VPS Either WSS or VPS 2 Transparent Lines Either WSS or VPS 3 Transparent Lines No WSS or VPS Either WSS or
91. 9394 Rev B Compliance Electromagnetic Compatibility Safety FCC Part 15 Subpart B This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules CE marked according to EMC directive 89 336 EEC and 93 68 EEC European standards EN 55 022 EN 55 024 EN 61000 3 2 and EN 61000 3 3 C Tick marked according to AS NZS CISPR 22 2002 UL listed according to UL60950 cUL listed according to CSA C22 2 no 60950 CE marked according to LVD directive 73 23 EEC and 93 68 EEC European standard EN 60950 CB certification according to IEC 60950 4019394 Rev B xvii Warranty and Disclaimer The terms we us and our are used to refer to Scientific Atlanta Inc The term Item is used to refer to our products including software provided hereunder We make no representations that our product is fully compatible with similarly represented equipment from other vendors due to the wide range of implementation possibilities of the applicable standards We extend the following watranty coverage to the original purchaser only hereafter referred to as Purchaser Items must be purchased from an authorized Scientific Atlanta representative or distributor We warrant good title to any hardware Item furnished hereunder During the Warranty Period as defined below we warrant that any hardware Item manufactured by or for us will be free from material de
92. AL or SDI625 input format Enabling 3 2 PDI increases the delay with 1 frame Do not enable or disable 3 2 PDI during live operation The video encoding engine restarts if you enable or disable 3 2 PDI Frame Sync Parameters Off Internal Clock External Reference Description Select External Reference if you want to synchronize your video to the reference signal on the reference input If you set the frame synchronization to Off the video encoding is locked to the video input Internal Clock means that the video is synchronized to the internal 27 MHz reference clock 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 15 Audio Menu Structure To see the Audio menu from the Main menu press the RIGHT arrow key twice and the SELECT key Each parameter is described in the following For instructions on how to select and store settings see About the Front Panel page 4 2 The menu has the following structure Audio Layer II Dolby Digital gt lt Linear Audio Dolby E inear Audio Dolby E h3 Ch4 L fe chi ch2 c Mode Bit depth Enable ProgRef chi Control Input Bit depth Mode gt chi lt ProgRef Audio PID Layer II Dolby Digital Chl Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 Ch7 Ch8 cht Ch2 ch3 cha Chi Chi Control Input Sample Rate Bit Rate gt I lt Mode Prog Ref Audio PID Chi Chi Control Input Sample Rate Data Rate gt lt Mode Passthrough ProgRef Audio PID 05 082 Audio Parameters Layer II Dolby Dig
93. Atlanta technical support center for repair A general Description A general software error has Major B On software error has occurred occurred Remedy If problems are observed reset the encoder When persistent contact your Scientific Atlanta technical support center for further assistance All settings were Description All settings were set to Information None On defaulted default as a result of a default command Remedy Not applicable An option has Description An installed option license Information None On expired expired Remedy Order the needed license through your local Scientific Atlanta Technical support center 4019394 Rev B Service and Maintenance 6 9 Message Description and Remedy Severity Default Enable alarm category Application file Description An application code has Information None On downloaded been downloaded to the encoder The system will reboot Remedy Wait for the unit to reboot Backup required Description Backup is required One of _ Critical None On the events configured to trigger a backup event has occurred Remedy Look at the other messages to find the cause of this event Can t enable Description The installed license file Information None On option as it is not doesn t contain information about the installed enabled license Remedy Order the needed license through your local Scientific Atlanta Tech
94. Audio In connector Hint For digital audio connections use a coaxial cable designed for 75 ohm AES 3id For analog channels 1 and 2 do as follows Spring Cage Plug Step Action Connector l 1 Connect the analog audio input cable to the OB spring cage plug connector Use a flat blades screwdriver with a width of 2mm and a maximum thickness of 0 4 mm to press in the spring representing the pin to be connected Push the wire in the hole above the spring and release the spring 2 Connect the spring cage plug connector to the Analog Audio In 1 amp 2 part of the terminal block connector For channels 3 and 4 connect the analog or digital audio input to the Ana Dig Audio In 3 amp 4 part of the terminal block connector The input type of channels 3 and 4 is set up in the GUI Note For digital audio connections use a balanced cable designed for 110 ohm AES EBU digital audio or a coaxial cable designed for 75 ohm AES 3id Use a high quality balanced audio cable for the analog inputs If you have many or heavy audio cables connected to the D9032 Encoder you may need to suspend the cables in your rack to prevent unnecessary mechanical stress on the audio connector If relevant use the Digital Out pins of channels 3 and or 4 to synchronize external equipment to a reference clock The reference clock is locked to the video 4019394 Rev B Installation 3 15 Connecting to the Contact Closure or C
95. BI VII VPS processing units to descramble the transmitted data A digital data broadcasting service transmitted in the field blanking interval of the television signal Teletextis intended to display text or pictorial material on television receivers equipped with a Teletext decoder Total Harmonic Distortion Telecommunications Industry Association The TIA is a national trade organization of companies that provide communications and information technology products systems distribution services and professional services in the US and around the world Transport Stream Time To Live User Datagram Protocol A connectionless protocol that like TCP runs on top of IP networks Unlike TCP IP UDP IP provides very few error recovery services offering instead a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network Vertical Blanking Interval The VBI is the first 22 lines in each field of a PAL signal 15 lines in an NTSC signal These lines do not contain any video information but are used for field synchronization purposes Video Index Information Video Program System A system that facilitates programming of video recorders with the program identification code from the TV program Recording automatically begins when the video recorder finds the matching code in the incoming video signal Glossary 4 4019394 Rev B Index Numerics 48 V DC power source guidelines 3 5 48 V DC to 60 V DC power
96. BI PIDs exist and may be transferred simultaneously For Name of PID VBI Contents DVB VBI DVB VBI Teletext ETSI WSS AFD WSS VPS transparent lines in DVB VBI format EBU Teletext EBU formatted teletext Transparent lines Transparent lines in proprietary format information about how much bandwidth the various VBI tributaries use in the transport stream see Appendix B Transport Stream Rates 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 77 Selecting VBI Source and Enabling VBI Resources Continued Restrictions on VBI Lines to be Transferred When Pre Processing is Enabled With low bit rates the end to end delay from encoder to decoder rises This may cause encoder internal VBI buffer overflow To avoid this you need to follow certain restrictions with regard to the number of VBI lines to be transferred The following table shows that a minimum video bit rate results in a given end to end delay which again causes the restrictions on the maximum number of trans parent lines per field to be transferred The example presupposes that you have e enabled pre processing e 8 teletext lines per field and e no other VBI The example covers both 625 and 525 lines systems Minimum Video Bit Rate with End to End Maximum Number of Proprietary Pre processing Delay Transparent Lines per Field 3 8 Mbit s 1 0s 4 2 4 Mbit s 13s 3 in one field and 4 in the other 1 9 Mbit s 15s 3 1 6 Mbit
97. Basic Composite Input will be available If you select ClearSight all VBI features will be available For digital inputs select the SDI Resolution The standard setting is 10 bits Set the input resolution to 8 bits if you have 8 bits input equipment such as a video tape recorder which only supports 8 bits of video data The encoding resolution is always 8 bits as defined by the MPEG standard 5 22 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Video Input Continued 10 11 For NTSC signals set the Pedestal Level Select 7 5 unless national stipulations state otherwise You may select between 0 and 7 5 Select External Reference if you want to synchronize your video to the reference signal on the reference input or Internal Clock if the video is synchronized to the internal 27 MHz reference clock If you set the frame synchronization to Off the video encoding is locked to the video input Internal Clock means that the video is synchronized to the internal 27 MHz reference clock Select the Action on Input Loss This means that if there is an input loss a black picture or a 75 color bar will be output The default setting is Black Picture If relevant set a delay on the action This means that the Action on Input Loss above is delayed with the specified number of seconds In the specified number of seconds the last valid picture is shown in freeze mode Please note that this is only possible if the inte
98. Canadienne Statement Industry Canada ICES 003 This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Industrie Canadienne ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la Class A respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada CENELEC CISPR Statement with Respect to Class A Information Technology Equipment This is a Class A equipment In a domestic environment this equipment may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Modifications Accessories This equipment has been designed and tested to comply with applicable safety laser safety and EMC regulations codes and standards to ensure safe operation in its intended environment Refer to this equipment s data sheet for details about regulatory compliance approvals Do not make modifications to this equipment Any changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Modifications have the potential to degrade the level of protection built into this equipment putting people and property at risk of injury or damage Those persons making any modifications expose themselves to the penalties arising from proven non compliance with regulatory requirements and to civil litigation for compensation in respect of consequential damages or injury Use only attachments or accessories specified by the manufacturer xvi 401
99. Composite Video A 6 VBI Specifications in Composite Video A 6 Section B Audio Input and Processing A 12 Audio Input A 12 Audio Processing A 12 Section C Data Interfaces A 16 Section D Transport Stream Output A 17 Section E Control and Management Interfaces A 19 Section F Power and General Specifications A 21 Power A 21 General A 22 4019394 Rev B Technical Specifications A 1 Section A Video Input and Processing MPEG 2 Encoder Specifications General Item Specification Number of channels 1 Encoding engine According to MPEG 2 MP ML or 4 2 2P ML Frame types IL P and B frames Encoding control Adaptive coding parameters and GOP controlled by pre analysis PreSightPlus pre analysis Look ahead for improved statistical multiplexing and normal fixed rate encoding PreSightPlus noise reduction Motion compensated temporal filter can be set to adaptive fixed or none and low pass spatial filter can be set to adaptive fixed or none Systems 525 29 97 Hz and 625 25 Hz Modes fixed rate statmux Video data bit rate MP ML 0 5 to 15 Mbit s 4 2 2P ML 1 5 to 50 Mbit s The minimum bit rate depends on picture resolution and GOP observe the recommendations for minimum rate Video resolution 8 bits per sample Chroma format 4 2 0 or 4 2 2 option Aspect Ratio 4 3 16 9 or auto detect on VII WSS Line start 625 lines
100. D9032 Encoder The MENU key toggles between the start up display and the main menu From the main menu press the RIGHT arrow key 4 times to navigate to the system menu and press SELECT You have now entered the system menu From the system menu press the RIGHT arrow once and press SELECT You have now entered the IP menu Go to the wanted menu item and press the SELECT You use the right and left arrow keys to navigate to the wanted menu item If necessary change the value Use the right arrow key to navigate to the digit to change and press one of the numeric keys to enter a value Press the SELECT key to store the entered value s If necessary change the other IP parameters as described in steps 3 and 4 above Press the UP arrow to leave the IP menu Note When you leave the IP menu by pressing the UP arrow key the IP Mask and Gateway parameters are validated against each other and stored Any inconsistencies will be shown in the display Important For the changes to take effect you must reset the D9032 Encoder after you have finished setting or changing the IP address subnet mask and default gateway Proceed as follows to reset the D9032 Encoder From the main menu press the RIGHT arrow key 4 times to navigate to the system menu and press SELECT key You have now entered the System menu Press the RIGHT arrow key twice to go to the Reset menu Press SELECT twice to confirm the reset Note The reset make take up to 9
101. Disable From this menu you enable or disable passthrough of Dolby Digital The D9032 Encoder accepts a pre encoded Dolby Digital audio input We recommend that you set the maximum data rate to that of the external Dolby Encoder If the data rate of the Dolby Encoder is lower than the setting in the D9032 Encoder the audio will be passed through and only the actual bits in the data stream will be used The default video rate is 640 kbit s 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 19 Audio Menu Continued The external Dolby Encoder must be locked to the clock of the D9032 Encoder This can be achieved by connecting the Digital Output of the audio connector to the external encoder or by means of external equipment if audio option is not installed Dolby Digital lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt ProgRef Parameters Video Audiol Audio2 Audio3 Audio4 Audio5 Audio6 Audio7 Audio8 Description When you select Video the audio in question will be part of the video program When you select one of the audios you define that audio channel to be part of the selected audio program In this way you can set up several audio channels to be part of the same audio program Dolby Digital lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Audio PID Parameters A figure between 16 to 81904 Description Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other program element Linear Dolby E lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Parameters Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Description Select the c
102. E35 digital program insertion DPI which will be used for ad insertion applications in the digital domain Transport output is provided via ASI outputs as well as through IP 100 Base T streaming outputs The D9032 Encoder features Ethernet management interface and supports the open SNMP communication protocol for easy integration into the ROSA control and management system from Scientific Atlanta or into 3rd party SNMP managers Alternatively you may set up and control the D9032 Encoder using the embedded web interface ROSA Control and Management ROSA enables full control and monitoring functionality of the D9032 Encoder installations with redundancy switching error reporting and remote control Software Update All software in the D9032 Encoder is stored in non volatile memory that can be electrically programmed New software releases for the D9032 Encoder can be downloaded via the Ethernet 10 100 Base T Management interface 2 2 Introduction 4019394 Rev B Encoder Model D9032 Continued Software Options The table lists the various software options which can be installed by the use of a license key As can be seen from the list some of the options are pre installed Description Pre analysis VBI DPI signalling Statistical Multiplexing 4 2 2 Noise Reduction Dolby Digital Channel 1P Dolby Digital Channel 2b Dolby Digital Channel 3 Dolby Digital Channel 4
103. EBU specifications A 12 connector 3 12 front panel setup 4 17 SPDIF output specifications A 14 specifications A 13 Dolby Digital 4 18 front panel setup 4 18 4 19 front panel setup audio 4 18 installing option 5 135 setting up 5 62 5 68 specifications A 15 Dolby Digital Passthrough overview 2 9 Dolby Digital passthrough front panel setup 4 19 Dolby E front panel setup 4 20 Dolby E specifications A 15 DPI connector 3 10 general 2 2 setting up 5 88 TS rate C 15 E embedded audio front panel setup 4 17 4 18 4 20 specifications A 12 EMC xiii xv xvi xvii A 23 Encoder agent assigning 5 11 device driver 5 7 encoder setup default video rate 5 43 Ethernet interface front panel setup 4 27 ethernet interface front panel setup 4 25 4 26 overview 2 12 pin allocation 3 19 3 21 3 22 setting up 5 9 specifications A 19 F fan lifetime A 23 replacing 6 3 fixed bit rate encoding delay bit rate and consecutive B pictures 5 31 front panel interface specifications A 20 fuse V XV AC rating 6 6 replacing the DC 6 7 fuse rating AC A 21 DC 6 7 A 21 G GOP legal GOP lengths 5 26 lowest in fixed rate encoding 5 43 lowest in statmux mode 5 43 ground xiii GUI version 5 121 I input mode 4 18 installing Dolby Digital 5 135 driver 5 7 noise reduction 5 135 pre analysis 5 135 ROSA 5 7 VBI 5 135 IP address setting from front panel 4 25 4 26 4 27 set
104. Filtering Less Filtering More Filtering Apply Reload Help 2 Select whether or not you want to enable the pre processor Normally you will enable pre processing as it provides an improved picture quality at a lower video rate Note For applications where the delay is an issue you may need to disable pre processing to keep the end to end delay sufficiently low Hint You may see the resulting end to end delay by clicking the Video tab expanding the Encoder icon on the sub page and clicking the Delay icon 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 47 Setting Up the Pre Processor Parameters Continued 3 Set the Advanced Video Pre analysis Look ahead PreSightPlus pre analysis option to On or Off For the best video quality set the pre analysis to On The pre analysis interacts with the control of the MPEG 2 encoding engine so that MPEG 2 parameters and encoding behavior may be changed dynamically frame by frame For statistical multiplexing the look ahead of the pre analysis provides an early warning of things to happen in the incoming video source In that way the allocation of bits to all the D9032 Encoders that participate in statistical multiplexing runs smoothly and closely coupled to the nature of the video contents Important If one of the statmux programs uses pre analysis they all must use pre analysis Set the 3 2 Pulldown Inversion abbreviated 3 2 PDI to On if you are going
105. I Major None Off VITC input loss Description The VITC signal in the video input signal has disappeared Remedy Check your video source and the equipment that generates VITC Major None Off VPS input loss Description The VPS signal in the video input signal has disappeared Remedy Check your video source and the equipment that generates VPS Major None Off WSS input loss Description The WSS signal in the video input signal has disappeared Remedy Check your video source and the equipment that generates WSS Major None Off Ethernet link down Description A needed AUX or IP TS OUT port is down If IP Streaming is enabled the IP TS OUT port must be connected If IP Streaming with backup is enabled the AUX and IP TS OUT port must be connected Remedy Connect the port in question The cable may be missing or the associated switch may not be working Warning None On Wrong IPsec password Description An attempt to control the encoder in IPsec mode without the correct password was made Remedy use the correct IPsec password Information None 4019394 Rev B Service and Maintenance 6 19 6 20 Service and Maintenance 4019394 Rev B Customer Information Overview Chapter 7 In This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic See Page Product Support 7 2 Returning
106. NTSC signals If you observe a slight ringing on the decoder output use 720 pixels instead For mainstream broadcasting applications slightly reduced resolutions like 640 544 or 528 pixels will often suffice If your bit rate is very low consider using 480 or even 352 pixels horizontal resolution to optimize the picture quality of a low bit rate signal Off On Set the 3 2 Pulldown Inversion abbreviated 3 2 PDI to On if you are going to encode 525 lines material This improves the picture quality when encoding 525 lines material that originates from film Make sure the pre analysis has been enabled and that auto concatenation has been disabled Otherwise the 3 2 PDI will not work You disable auto concatenation from the Video Encoder tab page 4 14 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B Video Menu Continued Turn off the 3 2 PDI in the following instances Situation Reason Your decoders are not fully The decoders may not accept MPEG 2 compliant information on picture repetition and cannot regenerate a correct video sequence You need to encode all frames 3 2 PDI removes some of the in a 525 lines system frames and this means that you cannot provide full picture to picture transparency from the video input to the Transport Stream The 3 2 PDI feature is not applicable for 625 lines 25 Hz systems The D9032 Encoder automatically disables 3 2 PDI if you set the D9032 Encoder to P
107. Products 7 4 4019394 Rev B Customer Information 7 1 Product Support Hotlines Scientific Atlanta provides its customers who have purchased support agreements with telephone support from anywhere in the world If you require technical telephone assistance or product training support or if you have any questions concerning their Scientific Atlanta product you may contact the appropriate Customer Support Center from those listed below Charges may apply for customers without a current support agreement Location Phone Number USA and Canada Toll free 888 949 4786 USA and Canada 1 770 236 4786 United Kingdom and Europe 44 8708 325 420 Asia 852 2522 5059 Note As our customer s needs change so do our support options For the most up to date support contacts and numbers please check our support website http www scientificatlanta com contactus customersupport htm Customers who call a Customer Support Center are asked specific questions in order to identify their needs In this way each call can be directed to the customer support representative most experienced with their Scientific Atlanta product Customer Support Centers also provide the following pre and post sales support services for Scientific Atlanta products Training Support On and off site training plus technical support services are available for purchase for both equipment operators and system administrators Warranty and Post Warrant
108. Ref Video vj C4Dolby Digital PID 8002 O Enable PCR cheney i Language swe Language Type Undefined v nit 2 Select the Program Reference When you select Video the audio in question will be part of the video program When you select one of the audios you define that audio channel to be part of the selected audio program In this way you can set up several audio channels to be part of the same audio program The program reference number refers to the equivalent number in the program column on the main PSI Audio page Note Audio only is encoded by itself without any additional video encoding delay 3 Ifrelevant enable the PCR Important An audio only program consisting of one or more audio tributaries must have at least one PCR PID enabled If the audio is attached to the Video it does not need a PCR PID 4 Type the audio PID The legal range is from 16 to 8190 Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other program element 5 Note that the DVB tables use the PIDs from 16 to 20 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 107 Setting Up the Layer Il Audio Program Continued 5 Type the audio language You must type in three letters The supported languages are according to ISO 639 2 The audio language is signalled in a PSI table and used by satellite receivers Refer to Appendix D for the standard codes for the representation of names of languages according to ISO 639 2 6 Select the audio lan
109. SINAD at 1020 Hz gt 80 dB 3 dB below clipping Idle channel noise lt 80 dBqOps weighted acc to ITU R Rec 468 4019394 Rev B Technical Specifications A 15 Section C Data Interfaces Statmux Interface Item Specification Number of inputs 1 Type of connector 9 pole sub D female DCE Type of input Bi directional asynchronous RS 232 E Baud rates as data interface 38400 Data format 8N1 no parity A 16 Technical Specifications 4019394 Rev B ASI Output IP TS Output Section D Transport Stream Output Item Specification Number of outputs 3 one is designated ASI Monitor Type of connector 75Q BNC Output impedance 75Q according to EN 50083 9 Data amplitude 800 mV peak peak 10 according to EN 50083 9 Return loss gt 15 dB 27 to 270 MHz Transport stream bit rate 1 to 64 Mbit s 100 ppm Transport stream formats According to EN 50083 9 188 bytes structure 204 bytes without Reed Solomon 204 bytes with Reed Solomon Burst or packet format ASI bit rate 270 Mbit s 100 ppm Item Specification Number of connectors 1 Usage IP streaming to main receiver Type of connector Eight pin RJ 45 Ethernet type 100 Base T Transport stream bit rate Follows the ASI output rate Transport stream formats
110. Setting Up the Video Encodefiisensniien ieena n h 5 24 Setting Up the Video Encoder DelayS sss essesesiseesessssestesisesesressssesresinsesesresessesrese 5 27 Reduced Delay Guideliness sirine era aaa e e AE E a EEA 5 29 Delay Bit Rate and Consecutive B pictures essseeseseesesseseeresiereseeresrssesrenreresrerese 5 31 Setting Up the Video Encoder Aspect Ratio s sssssssesssisseseesesessesrestnsesreseseesesresesesrese 5 33 Setting Up the Video Encoder Rate jcc scsstancinsssaapenirn ten ainan anderen aanseens 5 35 Setting Up the Statistical Multiplexing stisiscsicsstisaserncbuontissacastsnesespnnes ckosencatbaae sotbasyaebex 5 38 Determining the Default Video Rate scisvicstssintstssesszesai getasuazaaboncaehosyasek oandarsisnumeseanutlin 5 43 Setting Up the Stand Alone Variable Bit Rate eee ceseeeeeceeseseseeeeeeeeenenes 5 45 Section E Setting Up the Pre ProceSsor ccccccseescsessecssesseeseeseesecsseeseeseseeceseeseeseeas 5 47 Setting Up the Pre Processor Para metersicsnss cssssssebvusnetvsiasetessnestssasosoveubesyswhesvenusvtaaes 5 47 3 2 Pulldown and 3 2 Pulldown Inversion jis ocencpinsguassespansuashoodoieventestrasgenpveasgiuereeeys 5 52 Section F Setting Up the Audio 0 0 ccc cceecesecseesseseceecesecsseseeesessessecsseeeeeseeeseceaeeaeegs 5 54 Enabling or Disabling the Audio Channels se sssssesesssssesessssssesressssesresisesesresessesrese 5 54 Setting Up the Layer II Audio Input s ss sssessssssese
111. Settings Connector Name IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway message Log Management 192 168 0 200 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 254 i S a auxiliary 150 158 230 251_ 255 255 255 0 o 0 0 0 clock its Out 150 158 230 252 255 255 255 0 ooo option License OIP Network Management Port Management z rIPsec IP Address 0 0 0 0 Pre shared Key eesssssccccccooe Apply Reload Help Set the IP Address Subnet mask and Default Gateway of the Management connector This is the IP address of the D9032 Encoder Set the IP Address Subnet mask and Default Gateway of the Aux connector This connector is used for IP streaming to the backup receiver or for PCR synchronization Set the IP Address Subnet mask and Default Gateway of the TS Out connector This connector is used for IP streaming to the main receiver Select the Management port either Management or TS Out Selecting Both enables management on both ports Note If the Management port is set to Both and IPsec is enabled IPsec will only be enabled on the TS Out port i e there will be no security on the Management port Note Note If the ports must be on the same subnet select either TS Out or Management but not Both If the two ports are on the same subnet the encoder will not function properly Note If you change the management port you must reset the encoder either via the Web GUI or front panel LCD top affect the change A warnin
112. Severity Relay Trigger Backup Delay 1 o All settings were defaulted Vv information z None z D poo m 3 0 System boot completed Vv information None z D bo 4 0 Power up self test failed Vv ertical ela A O Poo 5 o Backup required Vv critical el None a D boo 8 oO Alarm queue overflow Vv major e D bpo r 0 Clock synchronization failed V Warming el None z E bo 16 it Temperature outside safe limits Vv ema Al D bo 17 0 Gomer approaching low limit A waning e ld g D g poo 18 0 Temperature approaching high limit Vv warming fe ol al jf 24 o A general software error has occurred Vv major e r boo 25 oO A general hardware error has occurred Vv critical NA od D boo 64 o Settings updated V information zl None z D boo 66 0 i Settings file is rejected IV information None z r eo 67 0 Application file downloaded Vv information None z D boo 68 o Setting inconsistent A information zl None O boo 80 o Fan malfunction v critical A l L boo z Apply Reload Help The GUI displays a table of all available Messages in the D9032 Encoder system 2 For each of the messages check Enable if you want the message to be enabled If you enable a message it means that a message is displayed in the GUI whenever the message event occurs Note You will not be able to see any messages in the GUI until you have set up the trap destination for the messages For further information Setting Up the Trap Destinations page 5 12
113. The delivery types are the I tab and the NIT icon in the left column cable delivery system descriptor Setting Up the Cable NIT satellite delivery system descriptor Setting Up the Satellite NIT and terrestrial delivery system descriptor and Setting Up the Terrestrial NIT none The delivery system descriptors are used to transmit the physical parameters for each transport multiplex in the network IRDs interpret the delivery system descriptor in order to tune to Transport Streams quickly Select None ifthe transmission does nottarget the end user IRD 3 Click Apply 5 20 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Section C TS Rate Budget Making a TS Rate Budget Introduction All the audio and video rates in ROSA are Elementary Stream ES rates When you make a bit rate budget you must note down the bit rates for all the tributaries and look up the corresponding TS rates When you add together all the tributary TS rates you get the total used TS output rate which must be equal to or lower than the specified output TS rate Use the TS rate table in Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries to convert the fixed bit rate or in statmux mode the default rate to TS rates Note The required outgoing TS rate for the D9032 Encoder during statistical multi plexing depends on the maximum instantaneous encoding rate during operation not the default rate We suggest that you make a bit rate budget for the encoders in
114. The settings in the middle provide a good compromise of filtering and detail preservation 4019394 Rev B Pre processing B 5 Delay and Filters Continued You may want to experiment with the 2 frame temporal filter when you only want limited noise filtering This filter is designed to have very little impact on the content though it still eases the burden of the encoder The temporal filters of the D9032 Encoder are designed to handle motion and scene cuts with virtually no memory effect This means that there are no trails or ghosting around moving objects or blurring following a scene cut The more you move the slider to the left for the multi frame 3D temporal filter the more the algorithm will back off close to moving objects and refrain from averaging temporally However all settings will make the algorithm protect the motion look In contrast to the common simple frame averaging filters that often suffer from motion artefacts like smearing and moving objects with ghosting the temporal filter in the D9032 Encoder has little impact on video contents thanks to the decisions made at pixel accuracy and the motion compensation Note For custom filtering you must choose between temporal and spatial filtering The D9032 Encoder allows only one of the two filters to operate We would recommend that you turn off the spatial filter and use the temporal filter unless you are specifically required to use the spatial filter Spatial F
115. This table is based on the ISO 639 2 Standard Codes for the Representation of Names of Languages Language Code _ Code Abkhazian abk Afar aar Afrikaans afr Albanian alb sqi Amharic amh Arabic ara Aragonese arg Armenian arm hye Assamese asm Avestan ave Aymara aym Azerbaijani aze Bashkir bak Basque baq eus Belarusian bel Bengali ben Bihari bih Bislama bis Bosnian bos Breton bre Bulgarian bul Burmese bur mya Catalan cat Chamorro cha Chechen che D 2 ISO 639 2 Language Codes 4019394 Rev B Language Code Code Chinese chi zho Church Slavonic Chuvash chv Cornish cor Corsican cos Croatian scr hrv Czech cze ces Danish dan Dutch dut nid Dzongkha dzo English eng Esperanto epo Estonian est Faroese fao Fijian fij Finnish fin French fre fra Frisian fry Gaelic Gaelic Gallegan glg Georgian geo kat German ger deu Greek 1453 gre ell Guarani grn Gujarati guj Haitian Creole Hausa hau Hebrew heb Herero her 4019394 Rev B ISO 639 2 Language Codes D 3 Language Code Code Hindi hin Hiri ho Hungarian hun Icelandic ice isl Ido ido Indonesian ind Interlingua ina Interlingue ile Inuktitut iku Inupiaq ipk Irish gle Italian ita Japanese jpn Javanese jav Kalaallisut kal Kannada ka
116. VPS 24 Teletext Lines S No WSS or VPS N 263 2 S Both WSS and VPS ie i amy W O 413 6 Both WSS and VPS p N No WSS or VPS lon 601 6 S Both WSS and VPS on N Ol N N Ol 2 Z Both WSS and VPS fon 25 Teletext Lines 26 Teletext Lines 27 Teletext Lines 263 2 263 2 263 2 263 2 263 2 00 8 263 2 300 8 300 8 413 6 451 2 451 2 451 2 451 2 451 2 451 2 451 2 451 2 601 6 601 6 601 6 601 6 601 6 639 2 601 6 639 2 639 2 752 789 6 789 6 789 6 789 6 789 6 789 6 789 6 827 2 28 Teletext Lines 300 8 300 8 300 8 451 2 451 2 488 8 639 2 639 2 639 2 789 6 789 6 827 2 29 Teletext Lines 300 8 300 8 300 8 451 2 488 8 488 8 639 2 639 2 639 2 789 6 827 2 827 2 30 Teletext Lines 300 8 300 8 338 4 488 8 488 8 488 8 639 2 639 2 676 8 827 2 827 2 827 2 31 Teletext Lines 300 8 338 4 338 4 488 8 488 8 488 8 639 2 676 8 676 8 827 2 827 2 864 8 32 Teletext Lines 338 4 338 4 338 4 88 8 488 8 526 4 676 8 676 8 676 8 827 2 827 2 864 8 In 625 lines systems with 4 transparent lines enabled the bit rate is 714 4 kbit s 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates C 11 Tr
117. Video From this page you can set up the video input type resolution and NTSC pedestal picture width the GOP sequence chroma format video aspect ratio encoding delays video encoder AFD rate for fixed rate CBR encoding parameters for statistical multiplexing such as rates priority and quality e Pre processor From this page you can set up the pre analysis and noise reduction parameters e Audio From this page you can set up the audio input parameters such as type impedance sample rate clipping level audio encoding mode bit rates e VBI From this page you enable or disable the various VBI resources e DPI From this page you set up the digital program insertion parameters e TS Output From this page you can set up the output mode format and bit rate You can also set up the parameters for the IP streaming output e PSI From these tab pages you define the PIDs program names and numbers for the various program elements e System From this tab page you can read various system parameters such as serial number software version number system uptime temperatures and slot information You can set up trap destinations see messages and change message settings You can install options and reboot or default the system 5 18 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B The Menu Bar and Buttons The Help Button The GUI of the D9032 Encoder has the following help button CED tanta A CISCO COMPANY ES system The Table of Conten
118. WSS as AFD source does not require WSS to be enabled from the VBI tab page Note however that you must have set line 23 for 625 lines systems to ETSI WSS or AFD WSS For further information see Setting Up the VBI Lines in 625 Lines Systems page 5 81 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 33 Setting Up the Video Encoder Aspect Ratio Continued 4 Select the Active Format Descriptor The AFD is used for signaling to the set top box or IRD how the coded video image is best displayed when the monitor does not match the coded image Example If you have a 16 9 format picture and the decoder receiver has a 4 3 monitor you can select 16x9 with shoot amp protect 4x3 to represent the picture as shoot amp protect 4 3 format Display on a 4 3 Monitor 16 9 Image Shoot amp Protect 4 3 in a 16 9 frame Note AFD is only applicable in 625 lines systems If you select Off no AFD signaling is present in the MPEG user data bits e Auto means that if the input is SDI containing VII the AFD signaling adapts to the incoming AFD bits in the VII signal If the input is Composite or SDI without VII the AFD value signals As source aspect ratio All other selections will force the AFD signaling to the new setting regardless of the video format Composite or SDI and regardless of any incoming VII WSS information Note If the VII WSS is lost in the incoming signal the AFD remains set to the last detected format
119. a low pass filter to the input channel before the Dolby Digital encoding The default is On If relevant enable the DC Highpass filter By enabling this filter you apply a DC high pass filter to the input channel before the Dolby Digital encoding The default is On Select the Bit Stream Mode Use this field to select the type of information that the bit stream conveys This is an information only field for the benefit of operators and other technicians and does not affect the performance or behavior of the actual signal The current system choices are e Main Audio Service e Main Audio Service Dialog e Visually Impaired e Hearing Impaired e Dialog e Commentary e Emergency Flash e Voice Over e Karaoke The default is Main Audio Service Select the Dolby Surround Mode This option indicates whether or not a two channel Dolby Digital bit stream is providing a Dolby Surround encoded program This setting is used only if you have selected Stereo 2 0 Possible options are Dolby Surround Encoded Not Dolby Surround Encoded or Not Indicated The default is No Indication Check the Copyright check box if you want to signal that the encoded bit stream is protected by copyright The copyright has the same meaning as the copyright bit on CDs and DAT tapes i e that it is illegal to copy the contents if the bit is set This box is checked per default Check the Original check box if you want to signal that the encoded bit str
120. access the settings of the D9032 Encoder the ROSA PC must be connected to the unit either using ROSA COPERNICUS from a central control station or ROSA stand alone on a locally connected PC Proceed as follows 1 Right click the D9032 Encoder icon under the Units node in the COPERNICUS Explorer 2 Select Properties If you have the unit in a map you can double click the D9032 Encoder bitmap to open the user interface File view Maps Server Config Messages Performance 2 Bal selje SEES ey Global a Groups E Global Inventory Lab Server 01 Serial Ports Ey Protocol Drivers Units Ef D9030_Encoder_10 11 67 182 Ef D9030_Encoder_10 11 67 188 Ef D9030_Encoder_10 11 67 208 Ef D9030_Encoder_10 11 67 210 Ef D9030_Encoder_10 11 67 214 E 19030_Encoder_10 11 67 220 a 09032 _Encoder_10 11 66 117 BA Important If you have a firewall between the D9032 Encoder and the COPERNICUS server you may need to change the protection settings to allow the SNMP traps from the D9032 Encoder UDP packets to arrive to the COPERNICUS To enable the D9032 Encoder Alarm Message mechanism in ROSA you must add a trap destination IP address to which the D9032 Encoder will start sending its SNMP traps For further information see Setting Up the Trap Destinations page 5 128 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 13 Section B The Web Interface Befo
121. ait partie de la classe I Vous devez le mettre a la terre Ce produit se branche dans une prise murale Cette derni re doit tre plac e a proximit du produit et doit tre facilement accessible Ne branchez ce produit qu a la source d alimentation indiqu e sur son panneau arri re Si ce produit n a pas d interrupteur d alimentation g n rale le cordon d alimentation remplit ce r le Ne laissez pas l humidit p n trer dans ce produit N ouvrez pas l enceinte de ce produit sauf instructions contraires Ne forcez pas d objets dans les ouvertures du bo tier D branchez toujours tous les cordons d alimentation avant de r parer ce produit Tirez toujours sur la prise ou le connecteur pour d brancher un c ble Ne tirez jamais directement sur le c ble Ne marchez pas sur les c bles ou les prises et n y exercez aucune pression Si aliment par une source le D9032 Encoder a fondre double p le fusible au neutre Veillez toujours utiliser un fusible de type et de puissance ad quats agr par le pays ou la juridiction d utilisation du pr sent produit Le type et la puissance des fusibles utiliser sont indiqu s sur le produit R parations effectu es l usine Ne confiez les travaux de r parations qu au personnel autoris par l usine vi 4019394 Rev B Sicherheitsvorkehrungen Sch tzen Sie sich gegen elektrischen Schlag und Ihr Ger t gegen Besch digung Dieses Ger t entspricht internationale
122. ake effect right away Note After loss of power and after reset the time setting is lost If synchronization is enabled the time is sent from the COPERNICUS ROSA PC clock at the next synchronization 5 134 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Installing and Enabling Software Options To Install a Software Option Before you can install a software option you need to obtain a license file Contact your local sales office for further information Proceed as follows to install 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the System tab and the Option License icon from the sub pages summary video Pre Processor audio vet om 7 SS System Option License Grtemperatures Host ID Install License File Message Settings Message Log Install trap Destination Modules E9Clock Options 0ption License Name Status Installation Status IP Network VBI Enable Installed Profile 4 2 2 Enable Installed Statmux Enable Installed Noise Reduction Enable Installed Pre Analysis Enable Installed Dolby Digital Ch 1 Enable Installed Dolby Digital Ch 2 Enable Installed Dolby Digital Ch 3 Enable Installed Dolby Digital Ch 4 Enable Installed DPI Enable Installed Auto Concatenation Enable Installed Ady Video Input SDI Enable Installed Apply The GUI automatically
123. als The signal generated by a DTMF encoder is a direct algebraic summation in real time of the amplitudes of two sine cosine waves of different frequencies DVB Digital Video Broadcasting 4019394 Rev B Glossary 1 Glossary Continued ESW ETS FEC GOP GUI Injected ID IP I picture LED LTC MDI MIB MTU NIT NTSC PAL Encrypted Session Word The encrypted session word ESW and the injected ID are used to calculate the Session Word SW ESWs can be communicated using a non secure channel European Telecommunications Standards Forward Error Correction The amount of redundancy available in the Input Signal This redundancy is used by the Forward Error Correction routine to detect and correct channel errors Group Of Pictures A GOP is a picture sequence which can be coded as an entity E g you can cut between GOPs Therefore the first picture in a GOP has to be intra coded I picture Time codes are carried on GOP level Graphical User Interface An identifier can be entered injected in an encoder or a receiver IRD This injected ID can be entered in a single or a group of units This allows a BISS E protected transmission to a group of encoders IRDs Internet Protocol The TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol is the basic communication language or protocol of the Internet Intra coded pictures Pictures that are coded individually without references to other pictures F
124. an get set from to data agent in various ways depending on the SNMP version run so its vital for the manager to know its agents capabilities E 2 SNMP Quick Setup Guide 4019394 Rev B Introduction Continued SNMP Trap In case of an error informational condition the SNMP agent i e the D9032 Encoder can autonomously send data information to the SNMP manager s called SNMP traps These may be logged or cause new alarms to be generated OID Object IDentifier An OID is a globally unique number to identify every company every SNMP device and even single values which the SNMP manager can get from or set in the SNMP agent Example The OID number 1 3 6 1 4 1 1482 denotes the company Scientific Atlanta and 1 3 6 1 4 1 1482 20 3 2 10 1 10 1 4 denotes the TS network name in a D9032 Encoder These granted numbers do not change 4019394 Rev B SNMP Quick Setup Guide E 3 SNMP Managers MIB Browser A MIB browser is a simple kind of SNMP manager which can be used to communicate with SNMP agents It typically has a tree structure which the user can browse through to set get values E 4 SNMP Quick Setup Guide 4019394 Rev B SNMP Hints and Common Pitfalls Firewalls An SNMP manager uses by default port 161 get set and port 162 for trap reception on its socket interface Firewalls typically have socket ports below 1024 under observation and can therefore block reception of traps and in some cases refu
125. an set up several audio channels to be part of the same audio program Linear Dolby E lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Audio PID Parameters A figure between 16 to 8190 Description Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other program element 5 Note The DVB tables use the PIDs from 16 to 20 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 21 Output Menu Structure To see the Output menu from the Main menu press the RIGHT arrow key three times and the SELECT key Each parameter is described in the following For instructions on how to select and store settings see About the Front Panel page 4 2 The menu has the following structure Output Output CA Output Bit Rate ASI Mode gt lt Output Format IP Mode CA Mode BISS 1 SW BISS E Clear SW gt lt BISS E ESW BISS E Injected ID 04 130 CA CA Mode Parameters N A BISS 1 SW BISS E Clear SW BISS E ESW BISS E Injected ID Description The meaning of the various modes is as follows Mode Meaning No scrambling Scrambling is off BISS 0 BISS 1 SW You want to scramble the transmission by using a BISS 1 session word BISS E Clear SW You want to scramble the transmission by using a clear de encrypted BISS E session word You cannot see the session word in the display when typing or entering the menu BISS E ESW You want to scramble the transmission by using two BISS E keys the Encrypted Session Word ESW and the Injected ID see bel
126. ansport Stream Rates for the Tributaries Continued DVB VBI 525 Lines Systems In 525 lines system the required rate for DVB VBI solely depends on the enabled number of transparent lines Number of Enabled Required TS Rate Transparent Lines 1 225 4 kbit s 2 450 7 kbit s 3 631 kbit s 4 856 4 kbit s C 12 Transport Stream Rates 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries Continued Proprietary Transparent Lines The D9032 Encoder supports up to 4 transparent lines per field The lines are sent as proprietary data in sub_id 0x02 When enabled the following transport stream rates are required No of Total Required TS Total Required TS Transparent Rate 625 Lines Rate 525 Lines Lines 1 227 kbit s 272 kbit s 2 452 kbit s 542 kbit s 3 678 kbit s 812 kbit s 4 903 kbit s 1083 kbit s 5 1128 kbit s 1353 kbit s 6 1355 kbit s 1623 kbit s 7 1580 kbit s 1895 kbit s 8 1836 kbit s 2165 kbit s 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates C 13 Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries Continued EBU Teletext The required transport stream rate depends on the number of teletext lines Refer to the table below Max Teletext Total Required Lines per Field TS Teletext B PAL 1 38 kbit s 2or3 76 kbit s 4or5 113 kbit s 6 or 7 151 kbit s 8 or 9 188 kbit s 10 or 11 226 kbit s 12 or 13 264 kbit s 14 or 15 301 kbit
127. arent Lines format or the Proprietary Transparent lines For information on the usable lines see Setting Up the VBI Lines in 625 Lines Systems page 5 81 If required enable Line 23 Blanking Line 23 blanking is used to clear the first active line line 23 This is useful when you use an input signal with WSS WSS is placed in the first half of line 23 and is encoded as video data If WSS is not reinserted in the decoder the decoded WSS will be sent to the monitor Some monitors have problems with this decoded WSS signal A solution to this problem is to blank line 23 in the encoder For information on how to set up the Line 23 Blanking see Setting Up the VBI Lines in 625 Lines Systems page 5 81 Click Apply Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the VBI Lines in 625 Lines Systems To Set Up the VBI Lines in 625 Lines Systems Proceed as follows to set up VBI lines in 625 lines Systems 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the VBI tab and the 625 Lines Setup icon from the sub pages summary video Pre Processor Audio var 625 Lines Setu Taz Lines Setup Field 1 Field 2 9525 Lines Setup esl MS e E Teletext 319 Teletext closed Captions 320 Teletext E i321 Teletext x a22 Teletext o 323 Teletext 5 324 Teletext s 12 Teletext 325 Teletext 2 Click on the fields to a
128. assthrough code field is not valid FSCOD not valid Remedy Set the sampling frequency on the Dolby encoder to a legal value Dolby Digital Description Passthrough input is Major B On Passthrough no missing sync Remedy Apply Passthrough signal Dolby Digital Description The incoming bit rate on Minor None On Passthrough rate passthrough is lower than the setting low Remedy Increase the selected bit rate Dolby Digital Description The incoming bit rate on Major B On Passthrough rate passthrough is too high too high Remedy No action needed Dolby Digital Description The requested PCR rate can Minor None On PCR Rate error non be achieved Remedy No action possible Dolby Digital TS Description The encoding rate is too high Major B On rate audiorate compared to the TS rate or the encoding mismatch rate is too low The encoding will restart Remedy Check the settings Change the audio encoding rate or increase the TS rate If a FIFO error occurs recurrently contact your Scientific Atlanta technical support center DPI Cancel Description An external control signal Minor None On triggered without occurred out of sequence A Start associated Start command must be triggered before it can be canceled Remedy Setup of automation system may need to be corrected DPI Message Description The general purpose input Minor None On trigger ignored detected multiple triggers too close du
129. ast IP address In that case the configured MAC address is not used so just leave it as is Parameter Setting Mode UDP MAC 00 ab 10 11 12 13 Not used IP 230 10 20 30 Port Number 5555 5 98 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the PCR Synchronization Requirements PCR synchronization between encoders will only work if e the video sources fed to each encoder are all running the same video clock and the encoders have switched off the internal frame synchronizer or e all encoders are fed with the same video reference signal and the encoders have set the frame synchronizer to use the external video clock as reference Note If you want several encoders to share resources you must consider whether the delay for all encoders should be identical If so consult Reduced Delay Guidelines page 5 29 to see which settings that influence the delay Also notice that the type of input board i e the Clearsight the onboard and the SDI video input module has an influence on the delay If modules or settings influencing the delay are different you can via the GUI manually set the same delay for all encoders participating in PCR synchronization by reducing the maximum delays Important You cannot use IP streaming on the AUX switch and PCR synchronization simultaneously In the PCR synchronization scenario the data from the Aux connector must be sent to a switch or hub which is not connected to t
130. at it may be a good idea to rearrange the order in which the formats are transferred For example some decoders only accept closed captions in packet one The default setting is None Closed captioning is only supported for 525 lines NTSC and 525 lines SDI 3 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 87 Section H Digital Program Insertion DPI Setting Up the DPI Overview Digital Program Insertion DPI makes it possible to insert advertisements into program content in the digital domain The DPI messages supported in D9032 Encoder are in accordance with the SCTE 35 specification To Set Up the DPI Proceed as follows to set up the DPI 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the DPI tab summary video Pre Processor audo ver opi DPI DPI ES O Enable Bandwidth Reservation Bit Rate oF bit s PID 1191 Heartbeat Packet Interval bo sd seconds Splice Information Event Source 0 Event Number Program ID 000o Avail Count 0 Avail in Provider ID oo Cl Enable Provider ID Trigger Information Use DTMF o Pre Eann Start Trigger Open Inputi DTMF foll Delay 6000__ ms Stop Trigger Off M DTMF O I 2 ag 2 Enable the DPI ES The DPI elementary stream describes the DPI 3 Set PID of the DPI This is the transport packet PID of the DPI stream You may type a figure in the range from 81 to 8190 Observe that you may not
131. ates for the Tributaries C 3 Available Rate on the Transmission Media C 16 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates C 1 Introduction General The D9032 Encoder automatically allocates the necessary transport stream rates for the chosen tributary rates With the following tables at hand you may prepare and evaluate a bit rate budget for the D9032 Encoder before actual configuration The transport stream rates for the tributaries are apart from the video and audio rounded up to the nearest kbit s For setting up the bit rate budget for several encoders see Multi Encoder Manager Application Layer User manual order number 4013152 C 2 Transport Stream Rates 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries Supported Tributaries In the D9032 Encoder the following tributaries can be multiplexed together e Video transport stream e Layer II audio transport stream e Dolby Digital audio e Linear Audio Dolby E e DVB VBI VPS VITC WSS transparent lines DVB VBI Teletext e Transparent lines proprietary format EBU Teletext e DPI The SI PSI rate for the DVB VBI stream is 17 1 kbit s The SI PSI rate for the program is 16 517 1 kbit s If you besides the video program have an additional audio only program this also takes up 16 5 kbit s To help you to calculate the total TS rate used by the D9032 Encoder the following sections show the transport stream rates of each tributary Note Some transport
132. ault is 192 kbit s 2 Note that the DVB tables use the PIDs from 16 to 20 4 18 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B Audio Menu Continued Use the following bit rate ranges for the selected audio mode Mode Bit Rate Range Stereo 2 0 96 640 kbit s Dual Mono 1 1 112 640 kbit s Mono Center 1 0 56 640 kbit s Dolby Digital lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Mode Parameters Description Note This menu will only be displayed if you have installed the Dolby Digital option Stereo 2 0 Dual Mono 1 1 Mono 1 0 Use this setting to select the number of channels and the channel format within the encoded bit stream The three available audio encoding modes are listed below The mode definition uses two numbers m n with m indicating the number of front channels and n indicating the number of rear surround channels Mode Channel Format Stereo 2 0 Left Right Dual Mono 1 1 Left Channel 1 Right Channel 2 Mono Center 1 0 Center The default setting is Stereo 2 0 If the mode is set to Dual Mono 1 1 then two completely independent program channels referenced as Mono Channel 1 and Mono Channel 2 are encoded into the bit stream Dual mono mode is primarily intended for professional applications Dual mono cannot be expected to work with consumer Dolby Digital AC 3 decoders Dolby Digital lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Passthrough Parameters Description Enable
133. ceiuvecantonasbtes 5 7 Setting Up the Search Range for the D9032 Encoder Agent cseneeeeeeees 5 9 Assigning the D9032 Encoder Agent as a Unit in ROSA sssssesssssesseseriseeresresesresrese 5 11 Working With the User Interface in ROSA s esssssssssesesisseereriesesesresessesresineesessrsesnesress 5 13 Section B The Webinterface misra con easier toes rate dare E EEEE mie 5 14 Before You Begins reeta ea e r ET eaa A E Aae et 5 14 Logging On to the Web Interface s sssssssessseseesessesessestestntesesresesresssntsrestnnenesreseenenrene 5 15 Creating a Logon Password isir ieii eii a e iari ai a 5 16 Web Interface Summary Screen s sseseesssissiesesesresesesresesterisresesrestenenteseseenentseenenren 5 17 Pap P geSi ee aeaee EAEE EnA EERE EEEE EETA EEA EEA eTR E PENE CEPE E EE 5 18 The Menu Bar and ButtonS se sssseseesessssersesesrisessesessessenteresteresesnesrententnteseseenesrenteneseete 5 19 xxii 4019394 Rev B Contents Continued Context Sensitive Online TH cs seiiss sas torte cei clog haath cvces cose asta Souenctuedle Sw sask ieee Deeey 5 20 Section C TS Rate Budget ccc cccecsecssessssscsecsecseeseseecssecsseseeeeessessecseeeseeseseeceseseeseegs 5 21 Makine a Toate Budget ns isinieins ia ienis elie iar es ieee e aniis 5 21 Section D Setting Up the Video 0 0 ee ccceeccesecseeseeseceecesecsseseeesessessecseeeseeseseceeeseeseeas 5 22 Setting Lp the Video Input tairis a eE aee rE EEE EEEE E Eae 5 22
134. code and the device driver GUI version of the D9032 Encoder the CLEI Common Language Equipment Identifier code and the date the encoder was manufactured The CLEI code is unique for each encoder hardware configuration Important Have the above information readily available if you contact a Scientific Atlanta office for support 2 Type in the System Name This field can be up to 30 characters in length and can consist of any printable character The system name is displayed in the top left corner of the GUI 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 121 Reading the System Information or Managing the System Continued If relevant lock the front panel When the front panel is locked you can only see settings but not change them from the front panel menus If relevant default all settings in the D9032 Encoder Note Use the default settings if you have set up the D9032 Encoder with illegal and incompatible settings to get the encoder back in a functional state If relevant reset boot the D9032 Encoder Note You should reset the D9032 Encoder in the following cases e If there has been a temperature alarm causing the encoder to disable functionality e If you have set or changed the IP address of the D9032 Encoder Click Transfer Settings File To Device if you want to update your D9032 Encoder with new settings You browse to the location of the settings file and click Transfer Important Due to a restriction in
135. cording to the DVB or the ATSC standard The default setting is ATSC mode 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 109 Click Apply Setting Up the Dolby Digital Audio Program To Set Up the Dolby Digital Audio Program Proceed as follows to set up the Dolby Digital Audio Program 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the PSI tab expand the Dolby Digital icon and click one of the channel icons from the sub pages OPSI Ch 1 Audio 1 Transport Stream Program Ref Video v video u PID 8001 Enable PCR amp Gaudio m Layer II Language Swe Language Type Undefined 4 S CDolby Digital Gach 1 Audio 1 Apply ach 2 Audio 2 ich 3 Audio 3 ach 4 Audio 4 S Linear Dolby E vel NIT 2 Select the Program Reference When you select Video the audio in question will be attached to the video When you select one of the other audios you define that audio channel to be the program reference In this manner you can set up several audio channels to have the same program reference The program reference number refers to the program reference number on the main PSI Audio page Note Audio only is encoded by itself without any additional video encoding delay 3 Type the audio PID The legal range is from 16 to 8190 Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other program element 4 If relevant enable the PCR Note An audio only program co
136. ction Note You must set up the IP address the default gateway and the subnet mask to match the network connection This is done through the front panel menu For further information see Front Panel Setup page 1 3 Pin Allocation Ethernet Connector The following table shows the Ethernet connector and the pin allocation MDI interface Connector Pin Pin allocation 1 Tx 2 Tx 3 Rx 4 Not connected 5 Not connected 00 052 6 Rx 7 Not connected 8 Not connected Informative Notes For reliable Ethernet operation to run over a maximum segment length of 100 m the cable has to comply with the EIA TIA Category 5 wire specifications To Connect the Ethernet Interface 1 Connect a crossed RJ 45 cable between the Ethernet connector on the D9032 Encoder and the Ethernet port of your PC Note You need a crossover cable if you want to connect the Ethernet interface of the D9032 Encoder directly to another Ethernet device without using a hub or switch You need to set up the IP address on both the D9032 Encoder via the front panel display and the ROSA driver for D9032 Encoder For information on setting up the IP address via the front panel see Front Panel Setup page 1 3 4019394 Rev B Installation 3 19 Connecting the ASI Outputs and the ASI Monitor Decoder To Connect the ASI Outputs Do as follows to connect to the ASI output 1 Connect the output signals from the D90
137. ctivate the drop down menu of the various lines with VBI data and select the data type Hint You must also enable the VBI resource for the data to be transferred See Selecting VBI Source and Enabling VBI Resources page 5 77 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 81 Setting Up the VBI Lines in 625 Lines Systems Continued The following table shows the location of the possible VBI data and the possible maximum number of selectable lines per field VBI Data Location Line Max No of Selectable Lines Teletext 7 to 22 and 320 to 335 16 per field Transparent Lines DVB 7 to 23 and 319 to 335 2 per field 1 per field if VPS WSS or DVB VBI Teletext is enabled Transparent Lines 6 to 23 and 319 to 335 4 per field Proprietary VPS 16 1 VITC 6 22 and 319 to 335 1 per field ETSI WSS 23 1 AFD WSS 23 1 3 Click Apply 5 82 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the VBI Lines in 525 Lines Systems To Set Up the VBI Lines in 525 Lines Systems Proceed as follows to set up VBI lines in 525 lines Systems Setup icon from the sub pages 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the VBI tab and the 525 Lines Covel 4625 Lines Setup 9525 Lines Setup Teletext closed Captions 525 Lines Setup Field 1 Field 2 Line Type Line 10 10 Hi ITranparent Lines ii 12 VITC 12 Closed Captions ab Empty
138. cture The following filter positions are recommended start values for the different resolutions Resolution Luminance Chrominance 720 704 0 0 640 11 21 544 528 21 32 480 27 37 352 43 39 If your inputs are noisy you may want to increase the setting to lower the cut off frequency and thus to reduce the high frequency noise The D9032 Encoder allows you to set different cut offs for luminance and chrominance If you use too high a setting for luminance the picture will start to loose sharpness whereas you may turn the chrominance filtering very high without significant visual impairment for a lot of material If your material is noisy or has been previously encoded and your encoding rate is low it is recommended that you turn up the chrominance filtering likely to one of the highest three settings For reduced horizontal resolution you may even want to use the highest possible setting Set the advanced quantization matrices to On The D9032 Encoder is able to change the quantization matrices dynamically in order to optimize the encoding The mechanism addresses both noisy and clean sequences and has a positive impact on both PQR values and the subjective visual impression There are no settings as the pre analysis automatically adapts the use of matrices to the incoming video material The matrices are inserted in the Transport Stream according to the MPEG 2 standard and are utiliz
139. d c ninety 90 days for a software Item licensed by us and for parts For Third Party Products we will pass through to the extent permitted the manufacturer s and or licensor s warranties and Purchaser shall look solely to such manufacturer and or licensor for warranty repair For any hardware Item that is returned to us during the Warranty Period and which is repaired or replaced by us the Warranty Period for such repaired or replaced hardware Item shall be the longer of i the remainder of the Warranty Period for the hardware Item or ii ninety 90 days after repair or replacement of such hardware Item by us xviil 4019394 Rev B Warranty and Disclaimer Continued THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT PURCHASER S SOLE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY FOR HARDWARE ITEMS MANUFACTURED BY OR FOR US AND SOFTWARE ITEMS LICENSED BY US IS THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AT OUR OPTION OF THE FAILED ITEM PURCHASER S SOLE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY FOR A THIRD PARTY PRODUCT IS THE MANUFACTURER S WARRANTY FOR SUCH PRODUCT WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TO CUSTOMERS OF PURCHASER AND ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS WE MAKE NO WARRANTY THAT THE OPERATION OF ANY SOFTWARE ITEM WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE IN ADDITION DUE TO THE
140. d to trade off the filtering effect and the sharpness As a starting point you should use the recommended filtering values B 4 Pre processing 4019394 Rev B Delay and Filters Continued The D9032 Encoder allows you to set different cut offs for luminance and chrominance If you use a too high a setting for luminance the picture will start to loose sharpness whereas you may turn the chrominance filtering very high without significant visual impairment for a lot of material If your material is noisy or has been previously encoded and your encoding rate is low we recommend that you turn up the chrominance filtering likely to one of the highest three settings For reduced horizontal resolution you may even want to use the highest possible setting Temporal Filters A temporal filter allows noise reduction by exploiting the time space dependencies between consecutive frames The 2 frame temporal filter in the D9032 Encoder intelligently averages pixel values of two consecutive video frames with pixel to pixel decision accuracy controlled by a dedicated pre analysis You need to enable the pre analysis to make the temporal filters work The multi frame 3D temporal filter in the D9032 Encoder takes in multiple frames for the averaging process Like the 2 frame temporal filter the filtering decisions and weighting mechanisms are carried out adaptively frame by frame and pixel by pixel If you choose Default filtering you will
141. de of the container e Your name e Your complete address e Your telephone number e RMA number e Problem description Note Absence of the RMA number may delay processing of product repair and or result in the equipment being returned unrepaired Include the RMA number in all correspondence 3 Ship the product to the address provided by the customer service representative Note Scientific Atlanta does not accept freight collect Be sure to prepay and insure all shipments 4019394 Rev B Customer Information 7 5 7 6 Customer Information 4019394 Rev B Scientific Atlanta ACISCO COMPANY Appendices Appendix A Technical Specifications Appendix B Pre processing Appendix C Transport Stream Rates Appendix D ISO 639 2 Language Codes Appendix E SNMP Quick Setup Guide Appendix F Equipment and Accessories Appendix G References E z e N lt a DeC Br _ a en a S m e A wo re CS a m A ZZ va a ey Overview Appendix A Technical Specifications Introduction This appendix contains the technical specifications for the Encoder Model D9032 Note The technical specifications are subject to change without prior notice In This Appendix This appendix contains the following topics Topic See Page Section A Video Input and Processing A 2 MPEG 2 Encoder Specifications A 2 Composite Video Input A 3 VBI Specifications in
142. der only lt 1 peak to peak lt 4 peak to peak Differential Phase encoder only lt 1 peak to peak lt 4 peak to peak Luminance Non Linearity lt 2 peak to peak lt 6 peak to peak Chrominance luminance lt 1 lt 2 intermodulation Linear distortion Short time waveform distortion Kq p 0 5 lt 2 Line time waveform distortion amp 0 5 lt amp 1 Field time waveform distortion lt 1 lt 3 in NTSC lt 2 in PAL Chrominance luminance inequality Gain inequality lt 2 lt 4 Delay inequality 10 ns 2 6 ns Steady state characteristics Gain Frequency characteristics codec lt 0 2 db 10 Hz to 5 00 MHz gt 3 dB 6 MHz lt 24 dB 6 75 MHz lt 40 dB 8 to 27 MHz lt 0 65 db 0 5 to 5 0 MHz Group delay response reference at 500 kHz lt 20 ns 10 Hz to 5 5 MHz Chrominance AM PM Noise lt 50 dB lt 50 dB 4019394 Rev B Technical Specifications A 5 VBI Specifications in Composite Video VBI Processing Item Specification Teletext B General Teletext B acc to ITU R BT 653 3 Lines in 625 lines systems 7 to 22 320 to 335 maximum 16 lines per field for DVB Inverted Teletext Applicable for EBU and DVB teletext Output formats According to EN 301 775 V1 1 1 DVB VBI Teletext and or according to EN 300472 V1 2 2 1996 EBU teletext Nomina
143. deypsceragaeedengee 3 18 Connecting the Ethernet Management Interface cee ecsesseseeescsesseeeeeesesesenens 3 19 Connecting the ASI Outputs and the ASI Monitor Decoder eseneeeeees 3 20 Connecting the IP TS OE Ut seston paar eeir iriri iare e n aeeiiaii ats 3 21 Connecting the Aux Output sinssneisienn iaronn aiian i iesi 3 22 Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation OVERVIEW e EEEE E E E I E T A 4 1 AbouttheFront Panel a vas enrestar epearen a arma EEE EEE aE EORR ES O 4 2 Keypad Conventionin ene aa te aai E iE i mui ate tes 4 4 StartUp OcrEeN gh Ged oe cess luc aceasta dice ae e ie e E E E A E aksatass 4 5 Main MOUs 5 5 5 ssssdavseustes isei rn ene Eaa A EEEE E EEE iE ES 4 6 Ao BN ES a ee re ERS ery So ea PC PER TT T TET 4 7 Video Menu iero aree e eE yep cavers tok bo uc te IE E ET A e a TE PEIRE TE NT eae EOS 4 9 Audio Men s a e e ETa EA A aE EA aeS 4 16 CGT MeNe Een ean oth scans E E ces TVAE E STe AEE ER EEEE cans cota ea EE EaR 4 22 System Menu enle ea ar Ea E e AE EE E E E A NEE EEA E E eee ke 4 25 Fock Men gninecnscnenirnur sarne a n n oon Soe ane 4 34 Chapter 5 Setup and Monitoring OVERVIEW is e ER R TEA E E A A E E leyeoo iyeemepoveeseaaras 5 1 Section A Getting started with ROSA cceesceeceseeseeseeeeesseeaeeseeeeeseessecseeseeeneenees 5 6 Installing ROSA and Diy Orsi essi2 sc cnsssseasasthaniacats ascassvastssaacets oibeonsnnatobenndscnsunebiban gone 5 6 Installing the D9032 Encoder Device Driven jaiiositijvieceieessdeiuvesdeinedeteiesss
144. dio Pr cessing enrarir nsee e a E Ero EEE AU a EN EE T EEEE A 14 Section C Data Interfaces pennn i i a l A 16 Section D Transport Stream Output 00aoeeooneenonoeensseenssoesesosseesnesssstensssessesnsssessessssses A 17 Section E Control and Management Interfaces 0 0 0 0 ec cccceecescesecseeseeseeeseeseesseeeeeeees A 19 Section F Power and General Specifications 0 ccc ccccecsccssecesseeeceeecesecssecsceeeeees A 21 BOW Ci assesses eece castes a a sates Sideaes a a stated ted dad Soda A 21 EE e I EESE AEE ica Oe da oli nae sacar ashe Des cia TRG eae ea Se A 22 Pre processing COVER Vie Wonen e chad a ciele e e lacy Hecate ica cece AE E dDe ea a Tesla heeubax dhe B 1 QV ERVICW eescneb desis E sd ee a tae St Ln a as Ween een eee B 2 4019394 Rev B Contents Continued Delay and FIETS aeee rien ia sateen era aA aN een B 4 Appendix C Transport Stream Rates COVERY IS W a Lis harian Ea V EAE teaches micttsbluy sks be adcns DERESE oho a RUAKERE DAREK O TRA RENSE AaS ia C 1 TA EOE OD iog oaeee cutee ts en eu RR E acts i a Set ath ech aaa leg Bac C 2 Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries cccsssssssessssssssesssssoesssenessersessenses C 3 Available Rate on the Transmission Media csscssssssssecssssersssssssssnessssssessensonees C 16 Appendix D ISO 639 2 Language Codes QV CR VIO W sii Tae sty Bie aes ei eas Aad sagen aw taiip ay cues EAEE A D 1 Language Codes Sorted by Alpha 3 Let
145. displays a list of available options and their status The Host ID field uniquely identifies the D9032 Encoder you are working on It consists of 5 leading Os and the serial number of the D9032 Encoder 2 Click the Install button 3 Browse for the license file for the option you want to install and click Open Loading takes approximately 10 seconds The Option is installed in your D9032 Encoder Check that the text in the Installation Status column changes from Not Installed to Installed and the Status column from Disabled to Enabled Important To install a license you must keep the file name license dat All other file names will not work 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 135 Installing and Enabling Software Options Continued To Enable or Disable a Software Option Proceed as follows to enable or disable a software option 1 Onthe Option License sub page click the Status column for the option you want to enable or disable 2 Select Enabled or Disabled from the scroll list The Installation Status field is a read only field 3 Click Apply 5 136 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the IP Networking To Set Up the IP Networking Proceed as follows to get access to the IP Networking 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the System tab and click the IP Networking icon from the sub pages 1a system MIP Network Temperatures IP Setup Table Message
146. e 25 of clock period as determined over a period of one line Interference rejection No bit errors in presence of superimposed interfering signal DC 2 5 V in lt 1 kHz 2 5 Vpp 1 kHz to 5 MHz 100 mV gt 5 MHz 40 mV A 8 Technical Specifications 4019394 Rev B Embedded Data in SDI VBI Processing Item Specification EDH General According to SMPTE RP 165 Alarms Gives an error message if there is a checksum error in the EDH or no EDH on the incoming SDI signal Teletext B General Teletext B acc to ITU R BT 653 3 Lines system 625 lines SDI Lines in 625 lines systems 7 to 22 320 to 335 maximum 16 lines per field Inverted Teletext Applicable for EBU and DVB teletext Output formats According to EN 301 775 V1 1 1 DVB VBI Teletext and or according to EN 300472 V1 2 2 1996 EBU teletext Nominal input data amplitude 0 Black level 15 mV 1 462 mV 40 mV Input data amplitude variation 3 dB 6 dB Clock run in 10 to 16 bits Closed Captioning with v chip support General According to EIA 608 Lines in 525 lines systems Line 21 field 1 and 2 284 Output formats EIA 708 SA Type 4 DVS 157 VII General Acc to SMPTE RP 186 1995 Class 1 1 Lines in 625 lines systems Lines 11 and 324 Lines in 525 lines systems Line 14 field 1 and 2 277 Output for
147. e Contact Closure or Cue Tone Interfaces 3 16 Connecting the Statmux Interface 3 17 Connecting an External Alarm System 3 18 Connecting the Ethernet Management Interface 3 19 Connecting the ASI Outputs and the ASI Monitor Decoder 3 20 Connecting the IP TS Output 3 21 4019394 Rev B Installation 3 1 Topic See Page Connecting the Aux Output 3 22 3 2 Installation 4019394 Rev B Section A Rack Installation General Power Connection As Scientific Atlanta units are designed for 24 hours operation some products do not have a power switch In this case the mains cord and or DC power supply cable serve s as the mains disconnect device WARNING Make sure that at least one end of the power cable s remains easily accessible for unplugging if you need to switch off the unit For example Ensure that the socket outlet is installed near the product 4019394 Rev B Installation 3 3 Installing the D9032 Encoder Rack Mounted Cooling Grounding The D9032 Encoder is a 1U unit with connector access at the rear panel The D9032 Encoder is intended for mounting in a standard 19 rack The D9032 Encoder is cooled by the use of fans The air intake is from the front panel and the air outlet is on the rear CAUTION The inlet air temperature must not exceed 50 C 122 F at any time You must ensure that the unit is properly connected to ground in order to meet safety and EMC requirements
148. e a D9032 Encoder This feature is not available in the D9032 Encoder Note To be able to use the statistical multiplexing feature you must connect the D9032 Encoder to the Statistical Multiplex Controller For further information see Regulus Statistical Multiplex Controller User and Service manual part number 4006277 Rev B e Fixed rate encoding means that the encoding rate does not vary over time This is also known as Constant Bit Rate CBR encoding The statmux mode means that the channel is statistically multiplexed according to the parameters defined on the statistical multiplexing subpage accessed from the Video tab page For further information see Setting Up the Statistical Multiplexing page 5 38 e Stand alone Variable Bit Rate means that the D9032 Encoder provides a variable bit rate output itself and in this mode there is no need for an external statistical multiplex controller On the other hand an external transrater device is required This could for instance be the BMR from BigBand or the Digital Content Manager DCM from Scientific Atlanta 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 35 Setting Up the Video Encoder Rate Continued 3 Set the fixed video bit rate The legal bit rate is from 0 5 to 15 Mbit s for the 4 2 0 Chroma format and from 1 5 to 50 Mbit s for the 4 2 2 Video Chroma format 4 2 0 Chroma 0 5 4 2 2P ML 4 2 2 Chroma 15 Mbit s Mbit s 15 Mbit s 50 Mbit s 03 072
149. e encoder For both filters the filter action is determined pixel by pixel throughout the whole picture Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Pre Processor Parameters Continued In case you do not want the D9032 Encoder to perform temporal filtering you may set the filter to Off This could be the case if you do not want the D9032 Encoder to reduce the noise in the source material or if you only want to use spatial filtering Set the Advanced Adaptive Spatial Noise Reduction to On or Off If you set the filter to On the filtering action is automatically determined pixel by pixel throughout the whole picture Your choice depends on how much noise is visible in the source and on how much you want to filter Also the more bits you want to save in a statmux setup the more filtering you may need to apply The more you push the slider to the right the greater the filtering Note For custom filtering you must choose between temporal and spatial filtering Only one of the two filters are supported You may experiment which of the spatial and temporal filters that works best for your application and sources In most cases the multiframe 3D filter is recommended 10 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 51 3 2 Pulldown and 3 2 Pulldown Inversion Overview When 24 fps film is converted to 30 Hz NTSC video the film frame rate needs to be up converted in order to be displayed on a TV set This
150. e to debounce together in time delay Remedy Reduce the debounce delay setting or increase the time between triggers or provide debounce protection to the general purpose input 6 12 Service and Maintenance 4019394 Rev B Message Description and Remedy Severity Default alarm category Enable DPI PTS delay invalid Description The relative delay setting has made the splice_time PTS value to reference a point in time that has already occurred Remedy Change relative delay parameters Major None On DPI Stop triggered without associated Start Description An external control signal occurred out of sequence A Start command must be triggered before it can be stopped Remedy Setup of automation system may need to be corrected Minor None On DPI Transport packet overflow Description Data were lost when attempting to load a DPI message to the buffer Remedy Increase the DPI bit rate Major None EDH error EDH flag activated in encoder Description The EDH Error Detected Here flag was activated in the encoder for one of the three groups ANC AP FF Remedy Check your SDI source and the equipment that generates EDH Minor None Off EDH input loss Description The EDH signal has disappeared The encoder receives no EDH data Remedy Check your SDI source and the equipment that generates EDH Major None Off Encodin
151. eam is located on its original media This box is checked per default Set the PES Frame Count This figure denotes the number of audio frames per PES packet The legal range is from 1 to 8 The default value is 8 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 67 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Channels To Set Up the Dolby Digital Channels Proceed as follows to set up the Dolby Digital Channels 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Audio tab expand the Dolby Digital icon expand the Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 or Ch 4 icon and click the Channels icon from the sub pages summary video Pre Processor audio va C CYT _ Gaudio Channels 6 Layer II Main amp Dolby Digital C Product Info Exists S GCh 1 Audio 1 Room Type Small Room vv Processing Channels Mixing Level 25 dB CoPassthrough Test Tones Dialog Normalization 27 dB och 2 Audio 2 E9Ch 3 Audio 3 Aux Dual Mono 1 1 Right ch 4 Audio 4 C Product Info Exists gt Linear Dolby E Room Type Small Room v Mixing Level 25 dB Dialog Normalization 27 dB 2 Select whether the Main product information exists This option indicates whether the room type and mixing level parameters exist within the Main Dolby digital bit stream The default is unchecked off Note If you have selected Dual Mono 1 1 encoding the Main Product Info Exists setting ap
152. eck power cable If persistent contact your Scientific Atlanta technical support center for repair Power up self Description The internal power up self Critical A On test failed test failed Remedy When persistent contact your Scientific Atlanta technical support center for further assistance 6 16 Service and Maintenance 4019394 Rev B Message Description and Remedy Severity Default alarm category Enable Regulus connection error Description Error detected on the RS 232 connection to the Regulus Statistical Multiplex Controller Remedy Check the RS 232 connection between the Statistical Multiplex Controller and the encoder Consult the manuals for information on how to interconnect the devices Major B On SDI input loss Description There is no video source on the SDI video input Remedy Examine the video input selection in the GUI and check the video source Major On SDI picture sync loss Description SDI picture sync loss The video signal does not comply with the specifications Remedy Examine the video signal It may be off frequency or the signal is perhaps a composite signal Major On Settings file is rejected Description No settings changed in the device as the settings file contains conflicting settings Remedy Not applicable Information None On Settings updated Description The settings have changed either by a
153. ed The option is present but has been disabled In this case you have to enable the option to make it work Please contact your local Scientific Atlanta sales representative if you want to buy an option 4 32 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B System Menu Continued Option License Pre Analysis Parameters Enabled Disabled Description The status of the license signifies the following Status Explanation Enabled The option is present and enabled Disabled The option is present but has been disabled In this case you have to enable the option to make it work Note This option is always pre installed and enabled at delivery HTTP Parameters Reset Login Description Use this feature if you want the reset the login for the web based user interface Important For the changes to take effect you must reset the D9032 Encoder after you have finished resetting the login Note The reset may take up to 90 seconds Option License DPI Parameters Enabled Disabled Description The status of the license signifies the following Status Explanation Enabled The option is present and enabled Disabled The option is present but has been disabled In this case you have to enable the option to make it work Please contact your local Scientific Atlanta sales representative if you want to buy an option 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 33 Lock Menu
154. ed by the decoders to mirror the encoding process correctly Important Make sure you have enabled pre analysis The D9032 Encoder can not change the quantization matrices adaptively if you disable pre analysis When you turn off pre analysis the D9032 Encoder uses fixed matrices 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 49 Setting Up the Pre Processor Parameters Continued Note Some set top boxes typically older models may not be fully compliant to MPEG 2 and may not be able to accept adaptive matrices in the stream In that case you need to set the adaptive matrices to Off Set the Advanced Adaptive Noise Reduction filter to Default unless you have specific requirements e Default means that the D9032 Encoder dynamically changes the type and level of filtering The Default setting is intended as a good first choice setting It allows a filtering action which is not too aggressive but still provides a visible reduction of noise This should be your choice if you are uncertain about noise within the source material Off suppresses the filtering e Custom enables you to specify a level and combination of filtering If you have specific requirements to the filtering or if you have specific knowledge about the source material you may want to select Custom This allows you to set the filtering to your preferences as explained in the following steps Set the Advanced Adaptive Motion compensated Temporal Filter to 2 Frame o
155. ed for IP outputs Disable UDP Select UDP mode in order to enable the IP TS output Note You have to use the web based user interface or the ROSA interface to set up the MAC and IP addresses of the receiver of the IP streaming packets 4 24 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B System Menu Structure To see the System menu from the Main menu press the RIGHT arrow key four times and the SELECT key Each parameter is described in the following For instructions on how to select and store settings see About the Front Panel page 4 2 The menu has the following structure Bee aes a SaaS set Se passe VBI Profile422 Statmux gt lt Noise Reduction Pre Analysis gt oe 7 7 i Soy aie pain ove 80 att Ate Video mamut gt Status Alarms Parameters N A Description A list of active alarms in the system The most recent ones are displayed first IP Management IP IP Address Parameters lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt Description The IP address of the management interface to the D9032 Encoder Contact you local network administrator to obtain an IP address Use the numeric keys to type the IP address Press the SELECT key to store the entered values Press the Up arrow key to leave the menu When you leave the IP menu by pressing the Up arrow key once more the IP Mask and Gateway parameters are validated against each
156. ed program into a multi program transport stream from a satellite or a network Local Program Single Program Transport Stream H u D9032 Encoder PI ol Video Audio Data Multiple Program Transport Multiple Program Transport Stream Stream with local program and from Satellite or Network all some programs from input k CL aS muii a D96xx Re multiplexer and Transport Stream Processor 2 6 Introduction 4019394 Rev B Application Examples Continued Multichannel Statistical Encoding The Regulus Statistical Multiplex Controller is an add on unit for the D9032 Encoder You may connect the Statistical Multiplex Controller to a number of encoders so that they together may participate in statistical multiplexing The figure below shows how five video programs are statistically multiplexed and inserted into a multi program transport stream fa Controller Regulus Statistical Multiple Program 1 gt D9032 Encoder Program 2 gt E Vv Program 3 gt JO lt gt S33 asi m ee N NI nimy NNN MO MOOO O D9032 Encoder a Continuum DVP D9616 Re multiplexer and Transport Strea
157. een network errors some messages sent from the D9032 Encoder to the ROSA COPERNICUS may be lost In such cases you can view the messages actually stored in the D9032 Encoder by following the procedure below To View the Message Log in the Web GUI Proceed as follows to view the message log 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the System tab and the Message Log icon in the left column Pre Processor audio ver C pe TS Output pst S essage Log dest Number test Number aximum Sequence Number lessage Log 1 No ID Text Generation Time Class Severity Dolby Digital Overload on the 2000 01 05 r A 83 0x006b0002 adie Goi Anel 19 55 48 Quality Cleared Dolby Digital Overload on the 2000 01 05 x p 2 0x006b0002 audio input signal 19 55 43 Quality Micar 81 0x00810000 Composite picture sync loss zoporp Tros Quality Cleared 80 0x00810000 Composite picture sync loss zoooratros Quality Major EA 2000 01 05 7 79 0x00800000 Composite input loss 49 55 27 Quality Cleared 78 0x00030000 System boot completed FOPO TOS Communication Information 4 2000 01 05 77 Ox00710000 SDI picture sync loss 19 55 36 Quality Cleared 76 Ox00730000 Invalid system type detected 2000 03 05 Quality Cleared gt 2000 01 05 z 75 0x00700000 SDI input loss 19 55 36 Quality Major 2000 01 05 2 A 74 Ox00710000 SDI picture sync loss 49 55 36 Quality Major 73 ox00730000 Invalid syste
158. enabled Disabled The option is present but has been disabled In this case you have to enable the option to make it work Note This option is always pre installed and enabled at delivery 6 The audio module has no software part number and will show N A in the software part number field 4 30 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B System Menu Continued Option License Profile422 Parameters Enabled Disabled Description The status of the license signifies the following Status Explanation Enabled The option is present and enabled Disabled The option is present but has been disabled In this case you have to enable the option to make it work Please contact your local Scientific Atlanta sales representative if you want to buy an option Option License Statmux Parameters Enabled Disabled Description The status of the license signifies the following Status Explanation Enabled The option is present and enabled Disabled The option is present but has been disabled In this case you have to enable the option to make it work Please contact your local Scientific Atlanta sales representative if you want to buy an option Option License Noise Reduction Parameters Enabled Disabled Description The status of the license signifies the following Status Explanation Enabled The option is present and enabled Disabled The option is p
159. equipment s technical specifications which may be found on this equipment s data sheet Installation Requirements WARNING Allow only qualified service personnel to install this equipment The installation must conform to all local codes and regulations Equipment Placement WARNING Avoid personal injury and damage to this equipment An unstable mounting surface may cause this equipment to fall To protect against equipment damage or injury to personnel comply with the following e Install this equipment in a restricted access location e Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other equipment including amplifiers that produce heat e Place this equipment close enough to a mains AC outlet to accommodate the length of this equipment s power cord Route all power cords so that people cannot walk on place objects on or lean objects against them This may pinch or damage the power cords Pay particular attention to power cords at plugs outlets and the points where the power cords exit this equipment e Use only with a cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with this equipment e Make sure the mounting surface or rack is stable and can support the size and weight of this equipment e The mounting surface or rack should be appropriately anchored according to manufacturer s specifications Ensure this equipment is securely fastened to t
160. er Note There is a fuse in both phase conductors Pull out the lid 98 017 Remove the blown fuse s Insert a new fuse with the same rating The fuse rating for the D9032 Encoder is 2 AT D CAUTION For continued protection against risk of fire replace only with same type and rating of fuse Reinsert the lid 6 6 Service and Maintenance 4019394 Rev B Replacing the DC Fuse To Replace the DC Fuse To replace a DC fuse do the following 1 Remove the power cable from the D9032 Encoder Pull on the connector to disconnect the cable Never pull on the cable itself 2 Dismount the D9032 Encoder from its rack 3 Unscrew the 8 screws holding the top plate and remove it Use a flat bladed screwdriver for the 4 screws at the front panel Use a PH 1 screwdriver for the 4 screws at the rear Fuse 5 Remove the cover holding the blown fuse 6 Remove the blown fuse 7 Insert a fuse with a 3 15 AT rating CAUTION For continued protection against risk of fire replace only with same type and rating of fuse 8 Mount in reverse order 4019394 Rev B Service and Maintenance 6 7 Section B Status Signaling Front Panel LEDs Overview To help signal the status of operation or the presence of an alarm the D9032 Encoder makes use of front panel LEDs The drawing below shows the LEDs on the front panel of the D9032 Encoder ALARM ye Q SELECT g
161. er is not used The legal range is from 0 to 255 Set up the Avail The Avail parameter is the counter for breaks e g advertisements in the program The counter starts as 1 and you must increment it for each new break period until a new program starts Entering 0 means that the parameter is not used The legal range is from 0 to 255 Set up the Provider ID This is the unique ID of the provider of the program The legal range is from 0 to 4294967295 Enable the Provider ID Enabling this means that the Provider ID is sent as part of the DPI message If relevant check the Use DTMF check box This indicates that you use DTMF tones as start and stop triggers for DPI Don t check the box if you want to use the contact closure inputs to trigger DPI 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 89 Setting Up the DPI Continued 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Select the contact closure Start Trigger or This indicates the input number and the position open high or closed low of the contact closure input to start the generation of the DPI Possible inputs are 1 to 8 Type the DTMF tone Start trigger This indicates the tone s that will initiate the generation of a start DPI package You may enter up to 8 tones Possible values are 0 to 9 a b c d A B C D and Select the contact closure Stop Trigger or This indicates the input number and the position open high or closed low of the contact c
162. ere in this manual 4019394 Rev B XV Important Safety Instructions Continued EMC Otherwise comply with the following good practices e Multi conductor cables should be of single braided shielded type and have conductive connector bodies and backshells with cable clamps that are conductively bonded to the backshell and capable of making 360 connection to the cable shielding Exceptions from this general rule will be clearly stated in the connector description for the excepted connector in question Ethernet cables should be of single shielded or double shielded type Coaxial cables should be of the double braided shielded type Where this equipment is subject to USA FCC and or Industry Canada rules the following statements apply FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device according to Part 15 of FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Industry Canada Industrie
163. errestrial Polarisation Linear Horizontal Modulation QPSK v FEC Inner 3 4 4 Apply Example of Setup for a DVB Satellite Delivery System The following table shows a typical example of the NIT for a DVB satellite delivery system Satellite Delivery System Parameters Frequency 12 266 GHz Symbol rate 27 5 Msymbol s Orbital position 19 2 degrees West East flag Eastern position Polarization Linear horizontal Modulation QPSK FEC inner 3 4 Convolutional code rate 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 119 Setting Up the Terrestrial NIT To Set Up the Terrestrial NIT Proceed as follows to get access to the Terrestrial NIT display 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the PSI tab expand the NIT icon and click the Terrestrial icon from the sub pages a ID psi Terrestrial Transport Stream Frequency 58 600 000 10 Hz video sudio Bandwidth 8 vi MHz Cwal 3 NIT Constellation 64 QAM 4 cable Hierarchy Non Hierarchical vj Satellite Terrestrial Code Rate HP 1 2 4 Code Rate LP 2 3 i Guard Interval 1 32 Transmission Mode 8K v Other Frequencies yes v Apply Example of Setup for a DVB Terrestrial Delivery System The table shows a valid example of the NIT for a DVB terrestrial delivery system Terrestrial Delivery System Parameters Frequency 586 MH
164. ers If you have enabled 3 2 PDI applicable to 525 line systems only the encoder adds one additional frame of delay Horizontal Filters The horizontal filters are low pass filters you may use in addition to the adaptive spatial or temporal filters You use the horizontal filters to improve the visual appearance during reduced resolution and or when there s noise in the picture The section Setting Up the Pre Processor Parameters page 5 47 lists the recommended cut off values for luminance and chrominance for the different horizontal resolutions of the encoder If your source suffers from noise you may want to filter more in order to lower the cut off frequency and thus to reduce the high frequency noise As an example if you have tape material that is not really sharp but still suffers from high frequency tape noise the filters can reduce the high frequency power that does not represent visual information but still loads the encoder Also high detail content being encoded at reduced horizontal resolution may benefit from horizontal low pass filtering This will optimize the look of moving objects with horizontal sharp edges like grating fences trelliswork and lines The more you filter the more suppression you will get of noise and potential aliasing products However as you increase filtering especially above where the cut off is comparable to the encoding resolution you will start to loose sharpness of the picture Hence you nee
165. escription The audio input signal is Minor B On Overload on the overloaded The audio input level is too audio input high and close to the clipping level signal Remedy Increase the clipping level or reduce the input level Linear Dolby E Description Passthrough data corrupted Major A On Passthrough Data missing invalid Remedy Passthrough check passthrough input Linear Dolby E Description Passthrough input is Major A On Passthrough No missing sync Remedy Apply Passthrough signal Linear Dolby E Description The incoming Data Rate on Minor B On Passthrough rate passthrough is lower than the setting low Remedy No action needed Linear Dolby E Description The incoming Data Rate on Major A On Passthrough rate passthrough is too high too high Remedy Increase the selected bit rate Linear Dolby E Description The requested PCR rate can Minor B On PCR rate error not be achieved Remedy No action possible Linear Dolby E Description The encoding rate is too high Major B On TS rate audio compared to the TS rate or the encoding rate mismatch rate is too low The encoding will restart Remedy Check the settings Change the audio encoding rate or increase the TS rate If a FIFO error occurs recurrently contact your Scientific Atlanta technical support center Power supply Description Power supply defective or Major B On failure external power line is broken Remedy Ch
166. esesrssestesrerisessessssetesterieeresresesneneee 5 124 Viewing Messages iiini ernea aaa e er Para AE ER TEERDE EENE EREE ERa LEERS i A 5 126 Viewing the M ssage LOg isinisisi tetp erineda ppi near 5 127 Setting Up the Trap Destinations e se ssesessessesssessiesesesresresessestestntesisresesnestesenreseses 5 128 Removing a Trap Destinaton mannsins ods toch hee oke Eine eei a ns eka ie t 5 130 Reading the Module Information vasiiss urlessowws ceuncsctonavedsdiwescrans sear tnencyonaveseonasgenniecs 5 131 Setting the Date and Time Manually ssssssssssesesssssssessesesrisessesssseeesreseneesesnssesneseese 5 132 Setting the Clock Synchronization sessssssssessseesesesrsstssesresissesessesessestereneesesresesseseeee 5 133 Installing and Enabling Software Options s sssesssessesssresessesresiserresesresesnsntesenreseeee 5 135 Setting Up the IP Networking e es seesessessessssesissesessssrsstnrerineesresesesnesnentnsenrenesesnesnese 5 137 xxiv 4019394 Rev B Contents Continued Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Appendix A Appendix B Service and Maintenance COV OL VICW inci st Soest AEREE EE aes Wea shaden hates Nees 6 1 Section A Replacing Fans and Fuses 0 ccccccescesscssesseesceseeecseeeseeseesececesecseeseeneeeaeeaes 6 2 TEL EO UICE OR is ce tess cating sav aceasta a PS OR eta ee inne edna 6 2 Replacing the Patt iz ovucsiwussepvontsavenyersiydaneneseasgtenceetbeieea ocean denr ins hae anata cava 6
167. esisresessssrsesreseeee 5 103 Setting Up the Transport SECA Miss t vccssssrssesscascatasceaspshuseniah eoeea its EN ESPERE DESE TESIR NERS 5 104 Setting Up the Video Program s ss sessesssssesssresisresesrssrssesrerensesessesesnentereneenesnnsesneseene 5 105 Defining the Audio only ProgramS ssssssssesesissesesrssessesresisesessrsessestereneesesnesesneneee 5 106 Setting Up the Layer II Audio Program s sssesssessssesrsessesrsirsesessssessestereneesisresesneseee 5 107 Selecting the Dolby Digital Audio Descriptor Mode s ssessesssseesesissseeresrsesresee 5 109 Click Apply Setting Up the Dolby Digital Audio Program cee 5 110 Setting Up the Linear Audio Program essseesssessssessssrerirsesessssessesiereeesesresesseseee 5 112 Setting Up the VBI PIDs and the Teletext Descriptor Table s ss ssssesssseseereseee 5 114 Setin Up the NIT rennes eeen aene ATE ee EE EE EAEE EE r E rt 5 117 Setting Lp Ene Cable NII sehrin srn eisini E n rE ENE rE a e EE 5 118 Setting Up the Satellite NUT iincsnccninni nienia iiaa 5 119 Setting Up the Terrestrial NUT 5 4 Gunosairicananieni maaan aay Pe ratie 5 120 Section K Working with the System 00 0 0 cece ccccesssssssecssesseesesseseecesecsecseeeeeeeesaeenee 5 121 Reading the System Information or Managing the System cece 5 121 Reading the Encoder Temperatures iccivisngosdncesudvcieustaveoheteceugate tu dantoussoceiiGoreuban 5 123 Setting Up the Message Parameters s s essesssese
168. et up the Audio Dolby Digital Passthrough 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Audio tab expand the Dolby Digital icon expand the Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 or Ch 4 icon and click the Passthrough icon from the sub pages summary video Pre Processor audio ver omr Ss audio Passthrough Layer II ofa External Delay bo o Z o e ms Dolby Digital S Ch 1 Audio 1 Apply Processing Channels Passthrough Test Tones E9Ch 2 Audio 2 Ch 3 Audio 3 Ch 4 Audio 4 S Linear Dolby E 2 Set the External delay The legal range is from 0 to 2000 ms If you use an external audio encoder which adds to the audio delay type a delay value corresponding to the external audio delay 3 Click Apply 5 70 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Dolby Digital Test Tones To Set Up the Dolby Digital Test Tones Proceed as follows to set up the test tones 1 From the user interface o the D9032 Encoder click the Audio tab expand the Dolby Digital icon expand the Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 or Ch 4 icon and click the Test icon from the sub pages summary video Pre Processor audio ve om or sudio Test Tones layer II Enable Test Tones Dolby Digital OCh 1 Audio 1 Test Tones Main off Processing l r Channels Test Tones Aux 0 erect Tones Aol Ach 2 Audio 2 ach 3 Audio 3 ach 4 Audio 4 S
169. eys to type the IP address Press the SELECT key to store the entered values Press the Up arrow key to leave the menu When you leave the IP menu by pressing the Up arrow key again the IP Mask and Gateway parameters are validated against each other and stored Any inconsistencies will be shown in the display Important For the changes to take effect you must reset the D9032 Encoder after you have finished setting or changing the IP address subnet mask and default gateway The D9032 Encoder will display a reminder Note The reset may take up to 90 seconds Note The IP Address is not affected by the Default command 4 26 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B System Menu Continued IP Aux IP Subnet Mask Parameters Description IP Aux IP Gateway Parameters Description IP TS Out IP IP Address Parameters Description IP TS Out IP Subnet Mask Parameters Description lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt The subnet mask of the Aux interface on the D9032 Encoder Setup similar to IP Aux IP IP Address page 4 26 Note The subnet mask is not affected by the Default command lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt The default gateway of the Aux interface on the D9032 Encoder The D9032 Encoder uses this gateway to route IP traffic across the network Setup similar to IP Aux IP IP Address page 4 26 Note The default gateway
170. f range Remedy Check the cable and the incoming signal Layer II Audio Description It is not possible to Major B On delay error implement the requested audio delay Remedy Decrease the audio data rate or change video settings to decrease end to end delay Check relative and external delay settings Layer II DSP Description The audio delay setup on the Minor None On Delay high error Audio DSP is too high Remedy Decrease the audio delay Layer II DSP Description The audio delay setup on the Major B On Delay low error Audio DSP is too low Remedy Increase the audio delay Layer II Description The encoder failed to lock to Major B On Embedded audio the embedded audio not locked Remedy Check that the audio channels are embedded where required Check the sources of the embedded audio 6 14 Service and Maintenance 4019394 Rev B Message Description and Remedy Severity Default Enable alarm category Layer II Description The audio input signal is Minor B On Overload on the overloaded The audio input level has audio input reached the clipping level signal Remedy Increase the clipping level or reduce the input level Layer II PCR rate Description The requested PCR rate Minor None On error cannot be achieved Remedy No action possible Layer II TS rate Description The encoding rate is too high Major B On audio rate compared to t
171. fects in workmanship and materials and under ordinary use conform in all material respects to its published specifications current at the time the hardware Item was shipped For a software Item licensed by us we warrant that we have the right to grant any software Item license granted and that the software Item as provided shall substantially conform to its published specifications current at the time the software Item was shipped Separately branded hardware and software Items Third Party Products are warranted solely by the applicable manufacturer or licensor as provided below We will repair or replace at our option any Item excluding Third Party Products returned to us by Purchaser at its expense during the Warranty Period which fails to satisfy this Warranty unless the failure was the result of shipping improper installation maintenance or use abnormal conditions of operation attempted modification or repair by the Purchaser use of the Items in combination with other items or an act of God If we elect to replace an Item any duties taxes or expenses related to the importation of the replacement Item shall be at Purchaser s expense The Warranty Period begins on the date the Item is originally delivered and extends for a twelve 12 months for a new hardware Item manufactured by or for us b six 6 months for a remanufactured hardware Item that has been reworked by us and is designated by us with RMF in the part number an
172. field 4 Keep public in the Community String field The Web GUI or ROSA does not evaluate the Community String field It may be used by other systems for security handling Hint After you have created a trap destination you can edit the fields directly by typing in the field in question 5 128 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Trap Destinations Continued 5 If relevant change the Row Status for the SNMP trap The row status indicates whether the receiving unit is active or not in service Note The D9032 Encoder will not begin to send traps to the destination unless the row status is Active Hint Open COPERNICUS Explorer and verify that the trap destination works by right clicking the unit you have just defined as the receiver of the traps and selecting All Messages ROSA displays an informational message from the unit telling you that its settings have been updated 6 Repeat steps two to five for any additional SNMP trap server 7 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 129 Removing a Trap Destination To Remove a Trap Destination Proceed as follows to remove a trap destination 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the System tab and the Trap Destination icon from the sub pages i a G ee a ee A a System Trap Destination Temperatures Message Settings ID IP Address Community String Row Status Message Log 1 10 11 65 9 public Active
173. g processing error Description The internal MPEG processing of the encoder failed The encoding will restart Remedy Check your settings for parameter violations Observe the limitations in the manual If persistent contact your Scientific Atlanta technical support center for further assistance Major On Fan malfunction Description The system has detected a fan malfunction Remedy Replace the fan if it is not working correctly Critical On 4019394 Rev B Service and Maintenance Message Description and Remedy Severity Default Enable alarm category Front panel Description Settings in the device can Warning None On unlocked now be changed via the front panel Remedy Not applicable Invalid system Description The detected system type Major A On type detected does not comply with the system type setting in the encoder Remedy Apply a correct system type 525 or 625 lines or change the Video Input Type in the encoder IP streaming Description Internal buffer for IP Major B On buffer full streaming has been overwritten TS packets have been lost and picture quality is degraded Remedy Lower the ASI output bit rate or check that the video IP network is not overloaded Layer II AES Description The encoder failed to lock to Major B On EBU audio input the audio frame or the audio sample error frequency is out o
174. g 5 41 Setting Up the Statistical Multiplexing Continued 7 Set the maximum video delay Delay Explanation Low Represents a VBV MPEG 2 Video Buffering Verifier delay of 714 8 ms Normal Represents a VBV delay of 1000 0 ms Extended Represents a VBV delay of 1190 6 ms Note The usual restrictions apply for the mixed setup so you must select identical maximum video delays for the encoders that participate in the same statmux pool If the delays are different you risk overflow of the Transport Stream You must also ensure that the software version of the SD encoders is capable of statmuxing with HD encoders Note Some decoders may require that you select normal delay 8 Click Apply 5 42 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Determining the Default Video Rate To Determine the Default Video Rate 1 It is recommended that you initially set the default video rates for all statmux channels to the same value You may change individual channel rates later You may use the following table to calculate the size of the statmux pool You can also use the table to calculate the number of programs you can have if you already know the size of the statmux pool and the type of program material Requirements Default Video Rate per Channel High number of channels 2 to 342 Mbit s Typical video material 3 to 5 Mbit s Top performance 4 to
175. g message will be displayed advising you to reset the encoder 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 137 Setting Up the IP Networking continued 6 Management Traffic can be secured via IPsec IPsec parameters consist of a Destination IP Address and the Pre shared Key which contains a password for the secure connection They can both be set in the Web GUI or on front panel When IPsec is enabled by setting a destination address and a pre shared key for encryption you won t be able to communicate with the device until you have established a secure connection between the encoder and the destination network devices It is possible to enable IPsec in both Linux and Windows for secure connection to devices Note It is necessary to re establish the secure connection to the D9022 Encoder if it is reset rebooted Click Apply Reset the D9032 Encoder This can be done from the System tab page The IP addressing will not take place until the D9032 Encoder is reset Note If you have changed the IP address of the Management port you must reconnect to the D9032 Encoder by entering the new address in the address field of the web interface 5 138 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Chapter 6 Service and Maintenance Overview Introduction This chapter gives information to assist you in replacing the fan and fuses It also describes how the status of the D9032 Encoder is communicated via front panel LEDs and messages
176. ge number You must type the page number as a decimal number Although you type the page number as a decimal number the teletext decoder TV displays a hexadecimal number Example Magazine 2 page 152 is displayed as page 298 where 0x98 corresponds to 152 decimal 7 Click Apply 5 116 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the NIT To Set Up the NIT Proceed as follows to set up the NIT 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the PSI tab and the NIT icon in the left column Select the relevant delivery type summary video Pre Processor audio ver r Cl IPSI NIT Transport Stream Delivery Type video None O Cable H O Satellite O Terrestrial SONIT Apply cable Satellite Terrestrial The delivery types are the e cable delivery system descriptor Setting Up the Cable NIT page 5 118 e satellite delivery system descriptor Setting Up the Satellite NIT page 5 119 and e terrestrial delivery system descriptor and Setting Up the Terrestrial NIT page 5 120 e none The delivery system descriptors are used to transmit the physical parameters for each transport multiplex in the network IRDs interpret the delivery system descriptor in order to tune to Transport Streams quickly Select None if the transmission does not target the end user IRD 2 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 117 Setting Up the Cable NIT To Set Up the Cable NIT P
177. get multi frame 3D temporal filtering where the pre analysis governs the low level filtering decisions You may also choose the multi frame 3D filter for the Custom filtering If so you must decide how much filtering you need If you choose to set up Custom filtering we recommend that your first choice should be the temporal multi frame 3D filter This provides the best noise reduction by the available filters for any kind of noise The multi frame 3D temporal filter is more efficient than the spatial filter and gives less smearing and has a good effect on e g camera VCR and film noise The filter can also have a good effect on removing noise in e g text and graphics in composite sources For the multi frame 3D temporal filter you can decide how much you want to filter As you apply a still stronger temporal filter setting the low level decisions and back off mechanisms of the pre filter are changed to allow more filtering For that reason the more you push the slider to the right the more filtering you get For noisy material you could try to start with one of the upper two filters For the upper settings you ll even get some suppression of composite artifacts and of quantizing noise from previous encoding For noisy material especially when encoding at low rates the perceived quality will be higher If you typically operate at higher rates and have good source material you would likely go for one of the first two settings
178. gn the D9032 Encoder agent as a unit in ROSA 1 From the SNMP Protocol Properties window click the New SNMP Resources tab and select the new resource File Help Scan New Agents New SNMP Resources Poll Resources m New Agents IPAddress___ HostName System Description _ UpTime Contact Fi days Oh 11m 45s 0th 10 11 67 112 Scientific Atlanta Denmark Scientific 10 11 67 122 Linux Copenhagen 2 3 5 1 13 days Oh 48m 53s 57th Scientific 10 11 67 124 PEGASUS 03 02 03 36 days 23h 40m 33s 0th 10 11 67 125 PEGASUS V03 02 03 82 days 16h 43m 34s 0th 10 11 67 184 Scientific Atlanta Denmark 0 days 17h 58m 9s 0th Scientifics 10 11 67 186 Scientific Atlanta Denmark 1 days Oh 8m 55s 0th Scientific 10 11 67 190 D9030 B01 02 09 0 days 0h 13m 14s 0th Scientific 10 11 67 192 Scientific Atlanta Denmark 0 days Oh 8m 16s 0th Scientific 10 11 67 200 Scientific Atlanta Denmark 0 days Oh 2m 3s 0th Scientific gt r Remappable Resources IP Address Glasgow Glasgow 10 11 67 129 Alcor ATM Liverpool Liverpool 10 11 67 121 Alcor ATM London London 10 11 67 120 Alcor ATM Assion New Resource Reload Apply 2 Click New Resource 3 Select D9032 Encoder driver from the Select Driver drop down list Map Resource x Identity Resource Name IP address 10 11 67 190 Host Name r Select Driver D9032_Encoder Me
179. gth of 100 m the cable has to comply with the EIA TIA Category 5 wire specifications To Connect the Ethernet Interface 1 Connect a crossed RJ 45 cable between the IP TS OUT connector on the D9032 Encoder and the Ethernet port of the equipment after the D9032 Encoder Note You need a crossover cable if you want to connect the Ethernet interface of the D9032 Encoder directly to another Ethernet device without using a hub switch You need to set up the IP address on both the D9032 Encoder via the front panel display and the equipment after the D9032 Encoder For information on setting up the IP address via the front panel see Front Panel Setup page 1 3 The equipment after the D9032 Encoder could be an IP router or a switch 4019394 Rev B Installation 3 21 Connecting the Aux Output The Ethernet Interface The RJ 45 interface Aux for 100 BASE T Ethernet is for output of the transport stream encapsulated in IP packets for the backup receiver Alternatively you may use this connector for PCR synchronization Note You must set up the IP address the default gateway and the subnet mask to match the network connection This is done through the front panel menu For further information see Front Panel Setup page 1 3 Pin Allocation Ethernet Connector The table shows the Ethernet connector and the pin allocation MDI interface Connector Pin Pin allocation 1 Tx 2 Tx 3 Rx 4 No
180. guage type This is a language descriptor which besides the audio language above indicates which type of audio you transfer Language Type Meaning Undefined Undefined Used widely for the main program sound Clean Effects Expressly having no language i e the sound track without any speech Hearing Impaired For program speech without music and effects Background noise is reduced so that only one primary sound source is perceived Visually Impaired Used for audio description Audio description is an ancillary component associated with a TV service which delivers a verbal description of the visual scene as an aid to understanding and enjoyment for e g viewers who have visual impairments 7 Click Apply 5 108 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Selecting the Dolby Digital Audio Descriptor Mode To Select the Dolby Digital Audio Descriptor Mode Proceed as follows to select the Dolby Digital Audio Descriptor Mode 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the PSI tab expand the Audio icon and click the Dolby Digital icon from the sub pages Transport Stream Audio Descriptor Mode ATSC w Video a rp z Apply _ amp Dolby Digital i Ch 1 Audio 1 ch 2 Audio 2 ch 3 Audio 3 ach 4 Audio 4 Linear Dolby E VBI NIT 2 Select DVB or ATSC mode This setting determines whether it is signaled in the PMT and PAT that Dolby Digital audio is transmitted ac
181. h quality 14 13 12 Medium quality 11 10 9 Reduced quality 8 7 6 5 Low quality 4 3 2 1 0 5 Click Apply 5 46 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Section E Setting Up the Pre Processor Setting Up the Pre Processor Parameters To Set Up the Pre Processor Parameters Important If the GUI displays greyed out fields or buttons this means that you do have not a license for the option in question or the feature is not available you have set a parameter which excludes another For information on options see Options and Accessories page F 3 Proceed as follows to set up the Pre processor 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Pre Processor tab Pre Processing I Enable Advanced Pre Processing CD e i i Enable Advanced Video Pre Analysis Look Ahead _5 _ r Advanced Quantization Matrices off On off on m 3 2 Pull Down Inversion m Advanced Adaptive Noise Reduction amp off on off Default Custom m Horizontal Luminance Low Pass Filtering r Advanced Adaptive Motion Compensated Temporal Filtering 5 G of App Source with Nois e 6 off 0 69 aif sible Nois ar 2 Frame C A on Less Filtering More Filtering Multiframe 3D m Horizontal Chrominance Low Pass Filtering _ gt _ r Advanced Adaptive Spatial Noise Redu Apparently Sourc Noi off 0 69 off Clean Source Visible Noise with s m 2 gt z Im gt fi n Less Filtering More
182. hannel you want to set up Linear Dolby E lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Control Parameters Enable Disable Description Enable or disable the channel in question Linear Dolby E lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Input Parameters Analog Digital Embedded Description The D9032 Encoder inputs the signal from the Analog Digital input connector in the selected format If you select Embedded the D9032 Encoder extracts the audio embedded in the active SDI video signal of the program The packet and pair is set in the GUI Linear Dolby E lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Bit Depth Parameters 16 20 24 Description The sample rate is 48 kHz The bit depth setting is only applicable for linear mode The bit depth is always 20 bits in Dolby E mode 3 Note The reference output is only present in a D9032 encoder if the additional audio option is installed 4 Note The DVB tables use the PIDs from 16 to 20 4 20 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B Audio Menu Continued Linear Dolby E lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt Mode Parameters Linear Dolby E Description Use this setting to select between Linear and Dolby E mode Linear Dolby E lt ch 1 to ch 4 gt ProgRef Parameters Video Audiol Audio2 Audio3 Audio4 Audio5 Audio6 Audio7 Audio8 amp Description When you select Video the audio in question will be part of the video program When you select one of the audios you define that audio channel to be part of the selected audio program In this way you c
183. he Management port Via this dedicated and isolated local area network the clock master distributes the clock to the other encoders To Set Up the PCR Synchronization Proceed as follows to set up the PCR Synchronization 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the TS Output tab and the PCR Synchronization icon from the sub pages summary Video Pre Provessor audo ver opm Tsou AE a Ts Output PCR Synchonization Caas Enable PCR Synchronization Off v IP Streaming SPCR Synchronization PCR UDP Port Number 777 Synchronization State Not Synchroniz Master IP From this page you can synchronize the program clocks of encoders in a network The GUI automatically displays the synchronization state of the encoder which can be Master Synchronized or Not Synchronized The IP address of the Management port of the Master is automatically displayed 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 99 Setting Up the PCR Synchronization Continued 2 Select On Off or Slave Only You select On if you want the encoder in question to be part of the PCR pool All encoders set to On in the pool will negotiate and one will automatically be granted the state of master The master is the PCR clock master which distributes the clock to the other encoders which will be slaves If the master is disconnected from the network one of the other encoders that are set to On will automatically take over
184. he TS rate or the encoding mismatch rate is too low The encoding will restart Remedy Check the settings Change the audio encoding rate or increase the TS rate If a FIFO error occurs recurrently contact your Scientific Atlanta technical support center Linear Dolby E Description The encoder failed to lock to Major B On AES EBU audio the audio frame or the audio sample input error frequency is out of range Remedy Check the cable and the incoming signal Linear Dolby E Description It is not possible to Major B On Audio delay error implement the requested audio delay Remedy Decrease the audio data rate or change video settings to decrease end to end delay Check relative and external delay settings Linear Dolby E Description The audio delay setup on the Major A On Delay high error Audio DSP is too high Remedy Decrease the audio delay Linear Dolby E Description The audio delay setup on the Minor B On Delay low error Audio DSP is too low Remedy Increase the audio delay Linear Dolby E Description The encoder failed to lock to Major B On Embedded audio the embedded audio not locked Remedy Check that the audio channels are embedded where required Check the sources of the embedded audio 4019394 Rev B Service and Maintenance 6 15 Message Description and Remedy Severity Default Enable alarm category Linear Dolby E D
185. he mounting surface or rack where necessary to protect against damage due to any disturbance and subsequent fall Ventilation This equipment has openings for ventilation to protect it from overheating To ensure equipment reliability and safe operation do not block or cover any of the ventilation openings Install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 4019394 Rev B xi Important Safety Instructions Continued Rack Mounting Safety Precautions Mechanical Loading Make sure that the rack is placed on a stable surface If the rack has stabilizing devices install these stabilizing devices before mounting any equipment in the rack WARNING Avoid personal injury and damage to this equipment Mounting this equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is not caused due to uneven mechanical loading Reduced Airflow When mounting this equipment in the rack do not obstruct the cooling airflow through the rack Be sure to mount the blanking plates to cover unused rack space Additional components such as combiners and net strips should be mounted at the back of the rack so that the free airflow is not restricted CAUTION Installation of this equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of airflow required for safe operation of this equipment is not compromised Elevated Operating Ambient Temperature Only install this equipment in a humidity and temperature cont
186. heck the bit rate of the signal Click Apply 5 74 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Linear Dolby E Processing To Set Up the Linear Dolby E Processing Proceed as follows to set up the Linear Dolby E Processing 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Audio tab expand the Linear Dolby E icon expand the Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 or Ch 4 icon and click the Processing icon from the sub pages summary video Pre Processor audio C ve om i ma procoesing Layer Tl M Copyright dolby Digital 3 Linear Dolby E M Original OCh 1 Audio 1 Processing PES Frame Count 1 Ic Linear Gch 2 audio 2 ch 3 Audio 3 ach 4 Audio 4 2 Check the Copyright check box if you want to signal that the encoded bit stream is protected by copyright The copyright has the same meaning as the copyright bit on CDs and DAT tapes i e that it is illegal to copy the contents if the bit is set This box is checked per default 3 Check the Original check box if you want to signal that the encoded bit stream is located on its original media This box is checked per default 4 Set the PES Frame Count This figure denotes the number of audio frames per PES packet The legal range is from 1 to 8 The default value is 1 5 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 75 Setting Up the Linear Dolby E Linear Parameters To Set Up the Linear Dolby E Linear Parameters P
187. hoose Custom if you want to set up the noise reduction filters according to your own preferences The custom settings are ignored when you choose Default In case you do not want the D9032 Encoder to filter the video signal at all before MPEG encoding you can choose Off The D9032 Encoder still allows horizontal luminance and chrominance low pass filtering and composite decoding 4019394 Rev B Pre processing B 3 Delay and Filters End to end Delay and Pre processing The total end to end delay becomes longer when you have enabled pre processing due to the look ahead delay that is introduced For applications where the delay is an issue you may need to disable the pre processing to keep the end to end delay sufficiently low However the D9032 Encoder is able to provide better picture quality when you enable the pre processing The end to end delay does not change when you enable or disable noise reduction and pre analysis Once you have enabled pre processing the settings of the pre analysis and the noise reduction do not change the end to end delay You may therefore change filtering on the run without delay changes Only when you enable or disable pre processing altogether the end to end delay will change For your convenience the GUI shows the total end to end delay which includes encoding and pre processing delay but excludes any additional delay in external equipment such as implementation delay in decod
188. ilter As opposed to temporal filters a spatial filter operates within a single video field or frame without taking other fields or frames into consideration except for the decision on how much to filter In the D9032 Encoder we offer an adaptive low pass filter with pixel to pixel decision accuracy controlled by a dedicated pre analysis You do not need to enable the pre analysis to make the spatial filter work properly A low pass filter attenuates high frequency picture contents thus reducing picture complexity and noise efficiently In traditional low pass filters the complete video frame is subject to filtering which in turn softens edges and details The low pass filter in the D9032 Encoder does not filter the complete video frame but the filter actions are controlled locally in the picture pixel by pixel by the pre analysis In that way filtering may take place without unnecessary smoothing of edges Still the filter is capable of reducing significant amounts of noise in the picture B 6 Pre processing 4019394 Rev B Appendix C Transport Stream Rates Overview Introduction This appendix presents the required transport stream rates for the various tributaries such as video audio DPI and VBI Also it presents the available transport stream rates on an ASI network In This Appendix This appendix contains the following topics Topic See Page Introduction C 2 Transport Stream R
189. ing error reporting and remote control 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 1 Overview Continued In This Chapter This chapter describes how to set up and monitor the D9032 Encoder using the ROSA management system or the embedded Web interface The sections describe e how to install ROSA e how to work with the ROSA user interface e how to make a bit rate budget and e how to set up the D9032 Encoder using the embedded interface or the ROSA interface This chapter contains the following topics Topic See Page Section A Getting started with ROSA 5 6 Installing ROSA and Drivers 5 6 Installing the D9032 Encoder Device Driver 5 7 Setting Up the Search Range for the D9032 Encoder Agent 5 9 Setting Up the Search Range for the D9032 Encoder Agent 5 9 Working With the User Interface in ROSA 5 13 Section B The Web Interface 5 14 Before You Begin 5 14 Logging On to the Web Interface 5 15 Creating a Logon Password 5 16 Web Interface Summary Screen 5 17 Tab Pages 5 18 The Menu Bar and Buttons 5 19 Context Sensitive Online Help 5 20 Section C TS Rate Budget 5 21 Making a TS Rate Budget 5 21 Section D Setting Up the Video 5 22 Setting Up the Video Input 5 22 Setting Up the Video Encoder 5 24 Setting Up the Video Encoder Delays 5 27 5 2 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Overview Continued
190. ing 4019394 Rev B Reading the Encoder Temperatures To Read the Encoder Temperatures Proceed as follows to read the encoder temperatures 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the System tab and the Temperatures icon from the sub pages Fn system Temperatures Temperatures Temperatures C deg Message Settings Sensor Name Temperature Min Temp Max Temp message Log 1 Equator 1 57 D 85 Trap Destination 2 Equator 3 55 D 85 Modules 3 Equator 2 51 D 85 i CyClock 4 Outlet 29 o 70 0ption License 5 Psu 29 o 70 e Apply Reload Help The GUI automatically displays the temperatures measured by five sensors in the D9032 Encoder The temperatures signify the following Heading Meaning Temperature The measured temperature Min Temp The lower operational limit Max Temp The upper operational limit If you receive temperature alarms while the ambient temperature is within the specifications you must check whether the air flow is blocked 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 123 Setting Up the Message Parameters To Set Up the Message Parameters Proceed as follows to set up the message parameters 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the System tab and the Message Settings icon from the sub pages Message Settings ID Instance Text Enable
191. ings to happen in the incoming video source In that way the allocation of bits to all the D9032 Encoders that participate in statistical multiplexing runs smoothly and closely coupled to the nature of the video contents B 2 Pre processing 4019394 Rev B Overview Continued Noise Reduction The noise reduction option consists of one or more filters that the D9032 Encoder applies before encoding typically in order to reduce noise or artifacts in the material and to reduce its complexity so that the video material can be encoded at a lower rate without visual degradation The optional PreSightPlus filter suite includes e Adaptive spatial low pass filter e Two choices of adaptive temporal filters e Decision on pixel level e Horizontal luminance and chrominance filters The filter suite is particularly suited for statistical multiplexing because a noisy channel can steal bits from all the other channels in the multiplex Some parts of the filters are controlled by dedicated pre analysis You need to enable the pre analysis suite on the D9032 Encoder to make noise reduction work For the noise reduction filter we recommend that you choose Default for automatic filtering according to encoding parameters and video source material The D9032 Encoder automatically adjusts the filter parameters and the actions frame by frame and even pixel by pixel to get the best filtering with as few side effects as possible You may c
192. io Conditional Acces Session Word BISS 1 000000048378 Clear Session Word BISS E eccccccccccs Encrypted Session Word BISS E PEPPRA Injected ID BISS E OLETTI Download MCT Application 2 Select the BISS mode The meaning of the various modes is as follows Mode Meaning BISS 0 Scrambling Off Scrambling is off BISS 1 Session Word You want to scramble the transmission by using a BISS 1 session word BISS E Clear Session Word You want to scramble the transmission by using a clear unencrypted BISS E session word You cannot see the session word in the GUI when typing or reloading BISS E Injected ID and ESW You want to scramble the transmission by using two BISS E keys the Injected ID and the Encrypted Session Word ESW You cannot see the keys when typing or reloading Setup and Monitoring 5 101 Setting Up the Conditional Access Parameters Continued 3 Type in the key s corresponding to the selected mode Important The D9032 Encoder will not accept changes of key values in case either of the following conditions are met e less than 10 seconds have elapsed since last change of a key value e more than 10 changes in key values have been made within the last 5 minutes This means that only one parameter can be changed per Apply All keys must be in hexadecimal notation and in the range from 0 to 9 and A to F The Session Word and Clear Sessi
193. ion 4 1 About the Front Panel Introduction Keypad LCD The D9032 Encoder is operated using controls and indicators on the front panel These include the numeric keypad the Navigation Selection keypad the LCD the ALARM and POWER indicators These are shown in the following illustration LCD Panel Alarm LED Navigation Selection Keypad o GE uD D EN mD O m ED O m ED 04 097 Power LED Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad is used to enter alphanumeric values The MENU key sets the software to the initial menu and the PREV key or the UP arrow key returns to the previous menu The PREV key can also be used to cancel a numeric entry at any point during the entry sequence and the LEFT arrow key allows backspacing through the entry The LCD provides information on the selections available at any menu level current settings for parameters and certain status and alarm indications This is a 2x40 backlit LCD panel The top line may be status data or identifier information It can also display optional functions available for tuning operations The bottom line will show selections or parameter values available using the navigation selection keypad The items are selected by pressing the SELECT center key or DOWN arrow key on the navigation selection keypad Front Panel LEDs For further information about the status signaling of the front panel LEDs see Front Panel LEDs page 6 8 4 2 Front Panel Operatio
194. it is defective In such instances we will be entitled to charge the Purchaser reasonable charges for such diagnostic testing and or repair work 4019394 Rev B xix XX 4019394 Rev B Contents Safety PIOCAUTIONS cs ssdescicnemssceeee vier aa A e alata a EE E ato eal ae v R gles de securite Aisiatchs incr otetarenait a aT eTa monn uibintr tas vi Si herheitsvorkehrungen scorrerie ea eae cota tale arash EE E EA E N vii PRECAMCIONCS CO Sedda a E r E O AT a ent viii Pre au ioni di SiICuUrezZa minn a E E Se Goin eu neu E EA E AN ix Important Safety IMStruCtiOns iia sececseaisesessaiccteseurarasoresiesinesieidranriidecesdheseen es adiaccsidelaeiesiealalansieauaict x Compliant denie renane a n E A AR e e EG a a E E xvii Warranty and DiSChaimen sits cisctscisssdectrsiictinaadianinetdceaedlaeatacwarratezarta sheer dlabantadetcdshiabeialaaecdabaaceislsaccias xviii ADOUE This Manual seanns n a a dnd Dares xxvii Chapter1 Quick Setup Read Me First Connecting the Units ness aeni e e a Seedy onto tease lated dan S 1 1 Fr nt Panel Setup scirent a a a a ee el sta cove heeds anole eE 1 3 Setting up the D9032 Encoders from ROSA or Via the Web Interface 06 1 4 Chapter2 Introduction Over VEW e e acs R E EE ER aap O E E 2 1 Encoder Model DIJI 2ni e a aoe oid aa ee ENEE ES iS 2 2 Applicaton Examples scestssacsthsas cekssiecatsceusdtstoastesan cathe steetalss ne dsanvncdennenssnet alle a aaa anisan 2 6 Vid o LETC isinsi cae
195. ital or Linear Dolby E Description The D9032 Encoder can encode the audio input according to the Layer II or Dolby Digital standards It also accepts a pre encoded Dolby Digital or Dolby E input Layer Il lt ch 1 to ch 8 gt Parameters Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 Ch7 or Ch8 Description Select the channel you want to set up Layer II channels Ch2 Ch4 Ch6 and Ch8 are only used in Single Mono mode and in this case they represent the right channels In Single Mono mode channels Ch1 Ch3 Ch5 and Ch7 represent the left mono channels In Stereo Joint Stereo and Dual Channel mode you only use channels Ch1 Ch3 Ch5 and Ch7 Layer Il lt ch 1 to ch 8 gt Control Parameters Enable Disable Description Enable or disable the channel in question 4 16 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B Audio Menu Continued Layer Il lt ch 1 to ch 8 gt Input Parameters Analog Digital Embedded Description The D9032 Encoder inputs the signal from the Analog Digital input connector in the selected format If you select Embedded the D9032 Encoder extracts the audio embedded in the active SDI video signal of the program The packet and pair is set in the GUI Layer Il lt ch 1 to ch 8 gt Sample Rate Parameters 32000 Hz 44100 Hz 48000 Hz Description The sample rate of the input signal It is not recommended to increase the encoding sample rate above the input sample rate For the lowest audio bit rates use the lowe
196. its affiliates in the U S and certain other countries Regulus PreSightPlus and ClearSight are trademarks of Scientific Atlanta Denmark A S e ROSA and COPERNICUS are trademarks of Scientific Atlanta Europe NV e Dolby and the double D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation All other trademarks shown are trademarks of their respective owners Publication Disclaimer Copyright Scientific Atlanta Inc assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions that may appear in this publication Scientific Atlanta reserves the right to change this publication at any time without notice This document is not to be construed as conferring by implication estoppel or otherwise any license or right under any copyright or patent whether or not the use of any information in this document employs an invention claimed in any existing or later issued patent 2007 Scientific Atlanta Inc All rights reserved Information in this publication is subject to change without notice No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form by photocopy microfilm xerography or any other means or incorporated into any information retrieval system electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express permission of Scientific Atlanta Inc AVC MPEG 4 H 264 Products With respect to each AVC MPEG 4 H 264 product Scientific Atlanta is obligated to provide the following notice THIS PRODUCT
197. k ID 65280 video Chaudio Original Network ID 65280 vel NIT Transport Stream ID 1 Network Name Circle Netwok 2 Type the network ID The range is from 0 to 65535 Type the original network ID Note If the NIT is transmitted on the network on which the TS was originated the network ID and the original network ID have to be identical If required change the TS ID of the transport stream You may type a figure between 1 and 65535 You may type the ID as a decimal figure Type the network name You may type alphanumeric characters Up to 30 characters are allowed The supported character set is ASCII Click Apply 5 104 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Video Program To Set Up the Video Program Proceed as follows to set up the Video Program 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the PSI tab and the Video icon from the sub pages summary Video Pre Provessor audio ver Sr EE I PsI video Transport Stream Ze Program Number 1 video E 6 audio PMT PID 8020 vei NIT video PID s000 Program Name TV Lowland Program Provider Lowland Productions 2 Accept the suggested program number or type a new one You may type a figure in the range from 1 to 65535 Observe that you may not use the same Program number for any other program 3 Accept the suggested PMT PID or type a new one You may
198. kbit s 66 6 70 2 70 5 70 5 70 2 70 5 80 kbit s 86 2 86 4 88 1 86 2 86 4 88 1 96 kbit s 101 8 102 6 99 9 101 8 102 6 105 8 112 kbit s 117 5 118 7 117 5 117 5 118 7 123 4 128 kbit s 133 2 134 9 135 1 137 1 134 9 135 1 160 kbit s 164 5 167 3 170 4 168 4 167 3 170 4 192 kbit s 199 8 199 7 199 8 199 8 199 7 1993 224 kbit s 231 1 232 1 235 235 252 235 256 kbit s 262 4 264 5 264 4 266 3 264 5 270 3 320 kbit s 329 329 3 329 39219 334 7 334 9 384 kbit s 395 6 394 393 6 395 6 399 4 399 5 448 kbit s 462 2 458 8 464 1 462 2 464 2 464 1 512 kbit s 524 8 529 528 8 528 8 529 528 8 576 kbit s 591 4 593 7 593 4 591 4 593 7 593 4 640 kbit s 658 658 5 658 658 658 5 658 a Applies to 188 byte packet mode If 204 byte packet mode is used you must multiply by a factor of 204 188 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates C 7 Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries Continued Linear Audio Linear audio requires the following transport stream rates depending on the selected video frequency and bit depth Required TS Capacity Mbit s 2 Video Bit Depth Bits Frequency Hz 16 20 gt A 25 2 0 2 37 2 79 29 97 1 99 2 39 2 8 a Applies to 188 byte packet mode If 204 byte packet mode is used you must multiply by a factor of 204 188 Dolby E The required transport stream rate for Dolby E audio is 2 37 Mbit s with 25 Hz video frequency and 2 39 Mbit s with 29 97 Hz video frequency The bit depth i
199. l input data amplitude 0 Black level 15 mV 1 462 mV 40 mV Input data amplitude variation 3 dB 6 dB Clock run in 10 to 16 bits Closed Captioning with V chip support General According to EIA 608 Lines in 525 lines systems 21 field 1 and 2 284 Output formats EIA 708 SA Type 4 DVS 157 VPS General VPS acc to IRT Richtlinie 8 R 6 Lines in 625 lines systems 16 Output format According to EN 301 775 V1 1 1 WSS Type of signal According to ETS 300 294 ETSI or Vistek Data Sheet 1649 AFD Lines in 625 lines systems First half of line 23 Output format According to EN 301 775 V1 1 1 VITC General According to ISO13818 2 Lines in 625 lines systems 6 to 22 and 319 to 335 Lines in 525 lines systems 10 to 20 and 273 to 282 A 6 Technical Specifications 4019394 Rev B VBI Specifications in Composite Video Continued DVB Compliant Transparent VBI Item Specification Lines in 625 50 7 to 23 319 to 335 Lines in 525 60 10 to 22 field 1 and 10 to 22 field 2 273 to 284 Number of lines lt 2 VBI lines per field are transferred transparently if no other DVB VBI is present lt 1 VBI line per field is transferred transparently if any other DVB VBI is present Signal type Sampled signal 13 5 MHz Synchronization pulse and burst are regenerated in the output Transferred samples All luminance sample
200. l range 6 dBV to 3 dBV Noise immunity S N gt 20 dB unweighted Maximum input line time jitter 100 ns 4019394 Rev B Technical Specifications A 3 Composite Video Input Continued Frame Synchronizer Item Specification Frame locking To an internal nominal 27 MHz reference or an external reference via the analog REF IN connector Tolerance of the internal reference 10 ppm Audio wandering upon frame skip repeat when frame synchronizer is enabled 1 frame VBI behavior upon frame skip repeat Drop VBI data upon frame skip and don t insert VBI in repeated frame upon frame repeat Ref In Item Specification Number of reference inputs One 75Q internally terminated Type of reference PAL NTSC composite signal Type of connector BNC Return loss gt 30 dB 10 Hz to 5 5 MHz with or without power Nominal input level 0 dBV A 4 Technical Specifications 4019394 Rev B Composite Video Input Continued Composite Video Performance Item Specification Advanced Video Input Module Specification Onboard Composite module Gain Insertion gain 0 2 dB Level stability 0 10 dB 1 hour 0 15 dB 24 hour Noise Quantization Noise unified weighted acc to 567 lt 58 dB RMS weighted relative to 0 7 V lt 55 dB RMS weighted relative to 0 7 V Non linear distortion Differential Gain enco
201. l without having the Dolby Digital option installed 5 62 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Dolby Digital Audio Input Continued 4 Select the Audio Coding Mode of the input signal Use this field to select the number of channels and the channel format within the encoded bit stream The three available audio encoding modes are listed below The mode definition uses two numbers m n with m indicating the number of front channels and n indicating the number of rear surround channels Mode Channel Format Stereo 2 0 Left Right Dual Mono 1 1 Left Channel 1 Right Channel 2 Mono Center 1 0 Center The default setting is Stereo 2 0 If the mode is set to Dual Mono 1 1 then two completely independent program channels referenced as Mono Channel 1 and Mono Channel 2 are encoded into the bit stream Dual mono mode is primarily intended for professional applications Dual mono cannot be expected to work with consumer Dolby Digital AC 3 decoders Dual Mono mode is recommended if simultaneous output of unrelated independent audio signals is required Dual Mono mode gives the greatest degree of audio separation but requires more complex coding and consequently higher operating bit rates Select in the Input Type field whether your audio input is analog digital or embedded The D9032 Encoder inputs the signal from the Analog Digital input connector in the selected format
202. l ws ia e coun oe eea aaae ureekasrne enema mone ee oa 2 8 A digand Data Interfaces eqs said aipsiishes nies Biiic Reese ten iol aint Gueniug Cae aia Oe Tes 2 9 Transport Streami Outputs noantri i reS sa Esae hese E o a eoi 2 11 Control and Management Interfaces es esssssseesesiseesesrssietestesesesresrssessestesenrereseesesness 2 12 Chapter3 Installation OVENI EW mn o E A a E eNe ae E eE O EE eta 3 1 Section A Rack Installation 0 0 0 0 ccc ccc ccescccsscecssscessscesssessssecessecesssecsssesssscsseseseeeeeees 3 3 CONC allicte wees ends sala seated Mae ae i ee ie ae Ae en Se ed 3 3 Installing the D9032 Encoder pesnici tiiis a e er a 3 4 Connection of Scientific Atlanta Equipment to DC Power Sources ou eee 3 5 Section B Connector Panelini a a a a ia 3 9 OV OL A ANEI A A E EE ERE ERTE TEET N EE AR EAE ET AETA 3 9 4019394 Rev B xxi Contents Continued Section C Connecting the Input Output Signals 2 0 0 0 cece eccesseseceeeseeseeeeceeceseeneees 3 11 Connecting the Video and Reference Signal Inputs 0 0 0 eee ee cesseeeeeeeseneeees 3 11 Connecting the Audio 906161 spent Merete yore arenes cota ecen acre oer err aan ee eon Serer ene ee 3 12 Connecting to the Contact Closure or Cue Tone Interfaces ccccseeeeeseeeeees 3 16 Connecting the Statmux Interface iyia svaiicenseieentetsassincerangees Geyaneneleeoet lore sviene 3 17 Connecting an External Alarm System iiss sescavyorsesy sensor stapieaneesdesvedenseveist
203. letext B Teletext B e VITC e VITC e VPS e VPS e Closed e VII e VITC e VITC Captions e Closed e AFD WSS e AFD WSS Captions ETSI WSS ETSI WSS EDH e VII e EDH a The Closed Captions feature supports the transmission of Content Advisory Data CA from the incoming video signal to the outgoing transport stream Reference Input The D9032 Encoder provides a reference input for internal frame synchronization of the video input to an external studio reference 2 4 Introduction 4019394 Rev B Encoder Model D9032 Continued Pre Processing The pre processing includes e PreSightPlus pre analysis with look ahead for improved statistical multiplexing and normal fixed rate encoding The PreSightPlus pre analysis option includes adaptive quantization matrices which has a positive impact on both POR values and the subjective visual impression The pre analysis includes a feature to dynamically change MPEG 2 quantization matrices and the possibility to enable 3 2 pulldown inversion for 525 lines material e PreSightPlus noise reduction option adaptive motion compensated temporal filter and adaptive low pass spatial filter e Dynamic variable GOP forced I to P and P to I frames e Horizontal luminance and chrominance low pass filters The PreSightPlus video noise reduction removes noise and details that stress the encoder at low bit rates It is possible to adjust the filter manually during ope
204. lified service personnel only Electric shock can cause personal injury or even death Avoid direct contact with dangerous voltages at all times The protective ground connection is essential to safe operation and must be verified before connecting the power supply Know the following safety warnings and guidelines Dangerous Voltages Only qualified service personnel are allowed to perform equipment installation or replacement Only qualified service personnel are allowed to remove chassis covers and access any of the components inside the chassis e Grounding Do not violate the protective grounding by using an extension cable power cable or autotransformer without a protective ground conductor Take care to maintain the protective grounding of this equipment during service or repair and to re establish the protective grounding before putting this equipment back into operation 7 4019394 Rev B Important Safety Instructions Continued Installation Site When selecting the installation site comply with the following Protective Ground The protective ground lead of the building s electrical installation should comply with national and local requirements Environmental Condition The installation site should be dry clean and ventilated Do not use this equipment where it could be at risk of contact with water Ensure that this equipment is operated in an environment that meets the requirements as stated in this
205. losure input to stop the generation of the DPI Possible inputs are 1 to 8 and Off Type the DTMF tone Stop Trigger This indicates the tone s that will initiate the generation of a stop DPI package You may enter up to 8 tones Possible values are 0 to 9 a b c d A B C D and Set the Pre roll Delay for the Start Trigger This feature allows splicers to delay requests to the ad server in order to accommodate play out equipment latency in the system Possible values are in the range of 0 to 60000 ms The default value is 5000 ms Set the Pre roll Delay for the Stop Trigger This sets the time delay required prior to the Stop trigger initiating due to equipment latency Possible values are in the range of 0 to 60000 ms The default value is 0 ms Click Apply Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Section Setting Up the TS Output Setting Up the TS Output Parameters To Set Up the TS Output Parameters Proceed as follows to set up the TS Output 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the TS Output tab and the Transport Stream icon from the sub pages ts Output TS Output Cassi Output Bit Rate 10 000 000 bit s IP Streaming PCR Synchronization Output Format 188 204 RS On 204 RS Off Disable Output when Backup is Required vas M Apply 2 Type the output bit rate in bit s The legal range is from 1 to 64 Mbit s This bit rate must not be smaller
206. low Charge Batteries Discharge Primary Secondary DC Powered Bus Bus Distribution Distribution Equipment e e e o m o J iN t ANA t ING t Equipment T S srounding Main conductor Bonding Secondary Charger Battery Battery Jumper power board 7 Bank Bank i Primary Rectifier No1 No2 i Powerboard i Equipment grounding i conductors o 0 e e 6 Main Bonding Jumper Grounding Aw di Electrode E ieee a Conductor ectrode 4019394 Rev B Installation 3 7 Connection of Scientific Atlanta Equipment to DC Power Sources Continued To Connect DC Power Check the wire size power source and DC fuse as described above before connecting to DC power Connect to DC power as follows 1 Connect the D9032 Encoder to the DC source through a distribution module or a bus bar being part of the rack 2 Make sure that the power cable is connected to protective ground If you use a floating DC power source the positive terminal must be connected to chassis and local ground to prevent building up of dangerous voltages The DC power supply input is floating with respect to chassis ground on the D9032 Encoder DC Connector Pin Allocation The following drawing shows the pin allocation for the DC connector J
207. lus Statistical Multiplex Controller User and Service manual part number 4006277 Rev B 5 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 37 Setting Up the Statistical Multiplexing Before You Begin To be able to use the statistical multiplexing feature you need to connect the D9032 Encoder to the Statistical Multiplex Controller Note You need a statmux license for each D9032 Encoder that runs in statmux mode To set up several D9032 Encoders you use the Multi Encoder Manager Application Layer For further information you may use Multi Encoder Manager Application Layer User manual part number 4004150 To Set Up the Statistical Multiplexing Proceed as follows to set up the Statistical Multiplexing 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Video tab expand the Encoder Rate icon and click the Statistical Multiplexing icon from the sub pages video Pre Processor Audio MC ver QC ppi I TS Output psi 7 video r Statistical Multiplexing Encoder Mode eee ai are Address 255 255 255 255 astatistical Multipl 1p C RS 232 Stand Alone Variak Controller Port Management z Management r Pools IP Controlled RS 232 Controlled poo 1 Pool amp C Pool B Maximum Video Rate 6 000 000 bit s Default Video Rate 2 000 000 bit s Minimum Video Rate 800 000 bit s r Priority 0 15 rMaximum Video Delay
208. m Processor Program 4 gt EEA lt gt 5 ASI D9032 Encoder Program 5 gt Enh lt gt 533 ASI D9032 Encoder 04 126 ROSA I 03 4019394 Rev B Introduction 2 7 Video Interfaces Composite Video Input The composite video input interface accepts a 625 line PAL B D G H I K M and N or a 525 lines NTSC M formatted input signal SDI Video Input The SDI input interface accepts a 270 Mbit s SDI formatted video input D 1 The input signal is converted into the same internal component format as for the composite input option The SDI module extracts embedded audio for further processing by an audio encoder module VBI and Related Signals Encoding AFD The D9032 Encoder supports teletext B DVB VBI Teletext Transparent Lines VPS WSS VII and Closed Captioning depending on whether you have the SDI and or composite input modules installed The video encoding includes e Multiple resolutions e High quality also at very low bit rates The D9032 Encoder optionally supports the Active Format Descriptor AFD which makes it possible to signal to the set top box or integrated receiver how the coded video image is best displayed when the display device does not match the coded image Amongst others it is possible to signal the 14 9 aspect ratio The AFD feature requires that you have installed the VBI option Auto concatenation The D9032 Encoder optionally supports auto concatenation of previously encoded pict
209. m name is set up from the GUI see Setting Up the Video Program page 5 105 The IP address of the D9032 Encoder The IP address is set up from the System menu see IP Management IP IP Address page 4 25 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 5 Main Menu Structure Operation of the Encoder Model D9032 begins at the Main menu From the startup screen press the MENU or SELECT key to view the Main menu Main Menu PSI Video Audio Output System Lock 04 052 Menu Selection Select the desired function by moving the cursor left or right by pressing the Left or Right arrow keys Once a selection is made by pressing the SELECT or Down arrow key the LCD presents the second menu level for the selected function Succeeding levels for each function are described in the following pages 4 6 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B PSI Menu Structure To see the PSI Menu press the Menu key and then the SELECT key Each parameter is described in the following For instructions on how to select and store settings see About the Front Panel page 4 2 The menu has the following structure Video Programs ProgNo Video Program Prog No PMT PID PID PSI Video Programs Audio Programs PSI lt Teletext PID VBI PID Transparent PID Audio Programs AP1 AP2 AP3 AP4 AP5 AP6 APT AP8 AP1 AP8 Prog No PMT PID PID Name 04 062 Parameters A figure between 1 and 65535 Description Program number of the video
210. m type detected 2000 01 05 Quality Major 5 3 2000 01 05 3 72 Oxooso0000 Composite input loss 19 55 23 Quality Major Dolby Digital Overload on the 2000 01 04 5 71 0x006b0002 PARIE OAT 23 26 25 Quality Cleared Ralhy Dinital Qvuerlnad an the annnfniina R bd m JE The Web GUI displays a table of the latest 64 messages stored in the D9032 Encoder system 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 127 Setting Up the Trap Destinations Important If you have a firewall between the D9032 Encoder and the COPERNICUS Trap server you may need to change the protection settings to allow the SNMP traps from the D9032 Encoder UDP packets to arrive to the COPERNICUS Trap server To enable the D9032 Encoder Alarm Message mechanism in ROSA the web browser you must add a trap destination IP address to which the D9032 Encoder will start sending its SNMP traps To Set Up the Trap Destination Proceed as follows to set up the trap destination 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the System tab and the Trap Destination icon from the sub pages asystem Trap Destination Temperatures Message Settings Cimessage Log E a 10 11 65 9 public Active v Trap Destination Modules clock 0ption License IP Network D Paduress e Community String Row Status 2 Click the Add Row button 3 Type the IP address of the ROSA COPERNICUS server Trap server to receive the SNMP traps in the IP Address
211. mat Aspect ratio or AFD VPS General Acc to IRT Richtlinie 8 R 6 Output format According to EN 301 775 V1 1 1 Technical Specifications A 9 Embedded Data in SDI Continued WSS General Acc to ETS 300 294 ETSI or Vistek Data Sheet 1649 AFD Lines in 625 lines systems First half of line 23 Output format According to EN 301 775 V1 1 1 VITC General According to ISO13818 2 Lines in 625 lines systems 6 to 22 and 319 to 335 Lines in 525 lines systems 10 to 20 and 273 to 282 DVB Compliant Transparent VBI Item Specification Lines in 625 50 7 23 319 335 Lines in 525 60 10 22 field 1 and 10 22 field 2 273 to 284 Number of lines lt 2 VBI lines per field are transferred transparently if no other DVB VBI is present in that field lt 1 VBI line per field is transferred trans parently if any other DVB VBI is present in that field Transferred samples All luminance samples Chrominance samples are not transferred Output format According to EN 301 775 V1 1 1 Proprietary Transparent VBI Item Specification Lines in 625 50 6 23 319 335 Lines in 525 60 10 22 field 1 and 10 22 field 2 273 to 284 Number of lines lt 4 per field Transferred samples All luminance samples Chrominance samples are not transferred Output format Proprietary A 10 Technical Specifications 4019394 Rev B E
212. mbedded Data in SDI Continued Embedded Audio Item Specification Location of audio The encoder accepts audio transmitted in any ancillary data space Formatting According to SMPTE 272M Audio sampling frequency 48 kHz locked to the video According to SMPTE 272M Resolution 20 bits Number of channels For each of the stereo audio encoders you can select one of the 8 stereo channels available in an SDI signal 4019394 Rev B Technical Specifications A 11 Section B Audio Input and Processing Audio Input General Item Specification Inputs Analog Digital AES EBU or AES 3id and embedded AES EBU is not supported for channels 1 and 2 Connectors Digital Audio In Ch 1 2 Analog Audio In Ch 1 2 Ana Dig Audio In Ch 3 4 option 2 BNC connectors Top row of terminal block connector Bottom row of terminal block connector Basic audio channels 2 stereo stereo channels 1 and 2 or 4 mono Optional audio channels 2 stereo stereo channels 3 and 4 or 4 mono Analog Audio Input Channels 1 2 3 and 4 Terminal Block Connector Item Specification Input impedance gt 20 kQ or 600 Q balanced selectable Input clipping level 6 to 24 dBu selectable 500 mdBu increments Return loss gt 30 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz 600 Q impedance CMRR gt 50 dB 1 kHz AES EBU Digital Audio Input Chan
213. mportant The Teletext Descriptor settings apply to both the DVB VBI teletext and the EBU formatted teletext e Enable the relevant loop the teletext descriptor Index For each program containing teletext you can enable up to 16 different loops in the teletext descriptor Each loop describes the language the type of teletext situated on specific magazines and pages in these magazines Type the language of the teletext The supported languages are according to ISO 639 2 If you have an additional language within the same teletext transport stream you have to add an additional loop with related settings Refer to Appendix D for the standard codes for the representation of names of languages according to ISO 639 2 Select the type of teletext page The following types of teletext pages exist Title Explanation Initial page The first teletext page Subtitle Teletext subtitle page Subtitle H Teletext subtitles for hearing impaired people Schedule For program schedule Additional For various information e Type the magazine number You may type magazines numbered in the range from 0 to 7 On a teletext decoder in a television set magazine 1 is seen as page 100 magazine 2 as page 200 and so on Magazine 0 denotes teletext on pages 800 and above 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 115 Setting Up the VBI PIDs and the Teletext Descriptor Table Continued Type the descriptor pa
214. munication Parameters _ r Community Strings Timeout 500d ms Read Community public Retry Count fi Write Community private Scan and Poll Profile Type Information OID 1 3 6 1 21 1 1 IV Enable Automatic Mapping m Connected to Copernicus NIC IP Address fio 1 65 6 r Connection Type Connection Type Direct Access 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 9 Setting Up the Search Range for the D9032 Encoder Agent continued ie 10 11 Make sure that Read Community is set to public and Write Community is set to private If not type public in the Read Community field and private in the Write Community field These are the only settings that will work Set the Time out period to for example to 5000 ms Note If you set the Time out too low you may risk losing contact with the units Check the Enable Automatic Mapping box If you check this box you need not follow the procedure described in Assigning the D9032 Encoder Agent as a Unit in ROSA page 5 11 The unit is automatically mapped to a D9032 Encoder This is particularly helpful if you are setting up many encoders Click OK twice Click Apply Result ROSA will now search for D9032 Encoder units at the given IP address 5 10 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Assigning the D9032 Encoder Agent as a Unit in ROSA To Assign the D9032 Encoder Agent as a Unit in ROSA Do as follows to assi
215. n Kashmiri kas Kazakh kaz Khmer khm Kikuyu ki Kinyarwanda kin Kirghiz kir Komi kom Korean kor Kuanyama kj Kurdish kur Lao lao Latin lat Latvian lav D 4 ISO 639 2 Language Codes 4019394 Rev B Language Code Code Limburgan Limburgish Lingala lin Lithuanian lit Luxembourgish b Macedonian mac mkd Malagasy mlg Malay may msa Malayalam mal Maltese mlt Manx glv Maori mao mri Marathi mar Marshallese mah Moldavian mol Mongolian mon Nauru nau Navaho nv Ndebele nr Ndebele nd Ndonga ndo Nepali nep Northern se Norwegian nn Norwegian nb Norwegian nor Nyanja Chewa Occitan 1500 oci Oriya ori Oromo orm 4019394 Rev B ISO 639 2 Language Codes D 5 Language Code Code Ossetian os Pali pli Panjabi pan Persian per fas Polish pol Portuguese por Pushto pus Quechua que Raeto Romance roh Romanian rum ron Rundi run Russian rus Samoan smo Sango sag Sanskrit san Sardinian srd Serbian scc srp Shona sna Sichuan ii Sindhi snd Sinhalese sin Slovak slo slk Slovenian slv Somali som Sotho st Spanish es Sundanese sun Swahili swa Swati SSW D 6 ISO 639 2 Language Codes 4019394 Rev B
216. n 4019394 Rev B About the Front Panel Continued Navigation Selection Keypad The navigation keys LEFT RIGHT UP and DOWN and the SELECT key on this keypad are the primary controllers Each navigation key performs various functions depending on the current state of the menu system i e sometimes the left navigation key is used to backspace over an entry and or in some cases to move to a different menu item Once the cursor is over the desired function pressing the DOWN arrow key moves to a different menu or changes a setting Pressing the SELECT key stores any entered values 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 3 Keypad Convention Overview Throughout this manual there are references to parts of a keypad on the front of the encoder This is the Navigation Selection keypad see diagram at right which changes its function depending on the current state of the menu For clarity the following table shows which A sD w parts of this integral interface are being referenced by which term When you see It means this LEFT Arrow key Press the key on the left side of the Navigation Selection Keypad RIGHT Arrow key Press the key on the right side of the D Navigation Selection Keypad UP Arrow key Press the key on the top of the Navigation Selection Keypad AN DOWN Arrow key Press the key on the bottom of the Navigation Selection Keypad w SELECT ke
217. n Sicherheits und Ausfiihrungsnormen Beachten Sie alle in diesem Handbuch enthaltenen Sicherheitshinweise sowie die am Ger t angebrachten Warnzeichen Sollten rtliche Umst nde den sicheren Betrieb dieses Ger tes beeintr chtigen schalten Sie es ab und sichern es gegen weitere Benutzung Vermeiden Sie Verletzungen sowie Besch digung des Ger tes Wenn Sie zu einem der folgenden Warnzeichen gelangen nicht weiterarbeiten bis Sie seine Bedeutung voll verstanden haben Dieses Symbol erscheint auf dem Ger t und oder in der ihm beiliegenden Literatur Es bedeutet wichtige zu beachtende Betriebs oder Wartungsanweisungen Wenn dieses Zeichen am Ger t angebracht ist warnt es vor einer spannungsf hrenden Stelle Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet auf dem Ger t die Anschlufstelle der Sicherheitserde eo gt Wenn dieses Zeichen am Ger t angebracht ist warnt es vor heifsen Stellen die zu Verbrennungen f hren k nnen Netzspannung Geh use Kabel Sicherungen Wichtig Dieses Ger t ist ein Produkt der Schutzklasse I Es mu geerdet werden Das Ger t ist an einer Steckdose anzuschlie en Diese muf sich leicht zug nglich in unmittelbarer N he des Ger tes befinden Die Netzversorgung muf den auf der R ckwand des Ger tes angegebenen Werten entsprechen Falls sich kein Hauptschalter am Ger t befindet dient das Netzkabel diesem Zweck Das Innere des Ger tes ist vor Feuchtigkeit zu sch tzen Das Geh
218. n based Fan lifetime gt 35000 hours at 50 C ambient temperature EMC EN 55022 and EN 55 024 EN 61000 3 2 and EN 61000 3 3 and FCC 47 CFR part 15 subpart B class A and AS NZS CISPR 22 Safety According to IEC 60950 EN 60950 UL60950 CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 Certifications CB Yes CE marked Yes UL and cUL Yes C Tick marked Yes 4019394 Rev B Technical Specifications A 23 A 24 Technical Specifications 4019394 Rev B Appendix B Pre processing Overview Introduction This appendix gives background information about pre processing and the various pre processing filters used in the D9032 Encoder In This Appendix This appendix contains the following topics Topic See Page Overview B 2 Delay and Filters B 4 4019394 Rev B Pre processing B 1 Overview Introduction Pre analysis The D9032 Encoder features optional PreSightPlus pre analysis and PreSightPlus noise reduction suite These two may be used independently of each other or in conjunction The filtering and analysis together with the encoding control offer an integrated solution for efficient MPEG 2 video encoding both for fixed rate statistical multiplexing and for stand alone VBR For the D9032 Encoder you have purchased specific restrictions may apply to the use of pre processing This means that you may only enable the pre analysis and or the noise reduction if this is included in the
219. n is causal that is only based on preceding pictures which can be I pictures or P pictures PSI Program Specific Information Normative data necessary for the demultiplexing of TSs and the regeneration of programs QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QAM is a method of combining two amplitude modulated AM signals into a single channel thereby doubling the effective bandwidth QPSK Quaternary Phase Shift Keying A common form of phase modulation that transmits two bits per Hertz Thus a 6 MHz channel supports 12 Mbit s RS Reed Solomon Coding FEC algorithm optimized to correct errors in the transmission caused by transient noise burst errors S PDIF Sony Philips Digital Interface is a standard audio transfer file format It allows the transfer of audio from one file to another without the conversion to and from an analog format which could degrade the signal quality SDI Serial Digital Interface 270 Mbit s digital video format SDT Service Description Table SINAD SIgnal to Noise ratio And Distortion SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an internet standard protocol developed to manage nodes such as servers workstations routers switches and hubs on an IP network SPI Synchronous Parallel Interface SW Session Word The session word is the key that is used in the TS 4019394 Rev B Glossary 3 Glossary Continued Teletext THD TIA TS TTL UDP V
220. ncoder driver software supplied with the ROSA COPERNICUS management system supports the necessary functions for backup using the DHB task product For further information see DHB Task ROSA Digital Headend Backup Task User Manual 6985066 Also the ROSA Element Manager is capable of backing up D9032 Encoders For further information see ROSA Element Manager User s Guide part number 64005743 4019394 Rev B Introduction 2 13 2 14 Introduction 4019394 Rev B Overview Chapter 3 Installation Introduction This chapter describes how to install the Encoder Model D9032 Before installing the D9032 Encoder read all safety precautions and guidelines thoroughly Qualified Personnel Only appropriately qualified and trained personnel should attempt to install operate or maintain the D9032 Encoder WARNING Allow only qualified personnel to install this product Otherwise personal injury or equipment damage may occur In This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic See Page Section A Rack Installation 3 3 General 3 3 Installing the D9032 Encoder 3 4 Connection of Scientific Atlanta Equipment to DC Power Sources 3 5 Section B Connector Panel 3 9 Overview 3 9 Section C Connecting the Input Output Signals 3 11 Connecting the Video and Reference Signal Inputs 3 11 Connecting the Audio Inputs 3 12 Connecting to th
221. nd SI information will still be encoded If you have defined an audio only program it will continue to be encoded 3 Set the picture width to 720 pixels unless you have specific requirements The width determines the number of horizontal pixels in the coded picture inde pendently of the input type and format Changing the width can decrease the resolution of the source material and in this way lower the amount of data to be encoded The settings are 720 704 640 544 528 480 352 e 720 is the normal setting e You select 704 pixels if your incoming signal has a lower number of active horizontal pixels in the picture This is often sufficient for PAL and NTSC signals If you observe a slight ringing on the decoder output use 720 pixels instead 5 24 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Video Encoder Continued e For mainstream broadcasting applications slightly reduced resolutions like 640 544 or 528 pixels will often suffice e If your bit rate is very low consider using 480 or even 352 pixels horizontal resolution to optimize the picture quality of a low bit rate signal 4 Select the chroma format Typically you select the 4 2 0 chroma for distribution purposes and the 4 2 2 chroma for contribution purposes If you have problems with the video delay see Reduced Delay Guidelines page 5 29 Note Depending on installed options you may not be able to select 4 2 2 chroma format 5 Select the 4 2
222. ndiciones indicadas Encontrar este s mbolo en el impreso que acompa a a este producto Este s mbolo indica instrucciones importantes de funcionamiento o mantenimiento Es posible que este s mbolo est pegado al producto Este s mbolo indica un terminal vivo la flecha apunta hacia el aparato terminal Podr a encontrar este s mbolo pegado al producto Este s mbolo indica un terminal de protecci n de tierra gt S S Podr a encontrar este s mbolo pegado al producto Este s mbolo indica calor excesivo o peligroso Importante Este es un producto de Clase I Tiene que estar conectado a tierra Este producto se conecta a un enchufe El enchufe necesita estar cerca del producto y ser f cilmente accesible Conecte este producto nicamente a la fuente de suministro el ctrico indicada en el panel posterior del producto Si el producto no tiene interruptor para la linea principal utilice el cord n toma de corriente para este prop sito No permita que la humedad penetre en este producto No abra la cubierta del producto a menos que se indique lo contrario No introduzca objetos a trav s de las aberturas de la cubierta del producto Siempre desconectar todos los cables el ctricos antes de revisar o reparar el producto Tire siempre del enchufe o del conector para desconectar un cable Nunca tire del cable mismo No camine ni aplique presi n sobre los cables o enchufes Cu ndo AC hab a suministrado
223. nector Relay Function Normally Common Normally name closed pin pin open pin A A Alarm 6 2 1 HI B B Alarm 8 C C Alarm 5 gt i 1 Connect the cable from the external alarm system to the alarm connector Example Alarm Relays The following figure shows an example of how the alarm relays work Vv oe 6 Normally Closed Inactive 2 Common e 1Normally Open Active For example for an A alarm under normal operational conditions no alarm pin 6 is closed that is connected to pin 2 and pin 1 is open However should an alarm condition occur pin 6 is open and pin 1 is closed that is connected to pin 2 This means that the A alarm is active and the A alarm LED lights on the front panel Note The A alarm relay is always activated when the power is off or the D9032 Encoder is booting whereas the other alarm relays maintain their status For example if a B alarm relay is inactive when the power is switched off it stays inactive However if it is active when the power is switched off it stays active For information about the maximum relay load see Alarm Interface page A 19 Installation 4019394 Rev B Connecting the Ethernet Management Interface The Ethernet Interface The RJ 45 interface for 10 100 BASE T Ethernet is intended for management via the ROSA system Note If you experience problems with the 10 BASE T Ethernet try changing to a 100 BASE T conne
224. nels 3 and 4 Bottom Row of Terminal Block Connector Item Specification Encoding According to AES3 1992 Input impedance 110Q balanced Return loss 2 21 dB 0 1 to 6 0 MHz Input level 2 to 7 Vpp nominal min 500 mV A 12 Technical Specifications 4019394 Rev B Audio Input Continued AES 3id Digital Audio Input Channels 1 and 2 in BNC and 3 and 4 in Terminal Block Item Specification Encoding According to SMPTE 276M Input impedance 75Q single ended Return loss 2 15 dB 0 1 to 6 0 MHz Input level 0 5 to 2 Vpp nominal AES 3id Reference Output Channels 3 and 4 in Terminal Block Connector Item Specification Output impedance 75Q 4019394 Rev B Technical Specifications A 13 Audio Processing Audio Performance Item Specification Insertion gain 0 5 dB Pass band frequency response 0 25 dB rel 1 kHz 32 kHz sample rate 20 to 14 500 Hz 44 1 and 48 kHz sample rate 20 to 20 000 Hz Crosstalk lt 80 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz Gain difference between channels 0 5 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz Phase difference between channels lt 3 20 Hz to 20 kHz Layer Il Encoding Item Specification Encoding According to MPEG 1 Layer II Program modes Single mono dual channel joint stereo stereo Audio data bit rate 32 48 56 64 80
225. ng is ignored if you have checked Auto Also when you click Reload this setting is not updated if you have selected Auto Note The manual delay setting is not relevant if you have selected Statistical Multiplexing 4 Click Apply 5 28 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Reduced Delay Guidelines Settings Influencing the Delay The delay from encoder to decoder is influenced by the following settings e Video chroma format 4 2 0 or 4 2 2 Line System 625 or 525 lines only to a limited extent however Video bit rate Number of consecutive B pictures in the GOP sequence Pre processing Encoding mode fixed rate or statmux 3 2 PDI See also Delay Bit Rate and Consecutive B pictures page 5 31 Reducing the Delay in Fixed Rate Encoding Follow the below guidelines if the end to end delay is a critical parameter 1 Change the video chroma format from 4 2 2 to 4 2 0 if your bit rate is low typically about 15 Mbit s Note All the changes below will make the video encoding restart so you should not attempt to change the delay while the encoder is on air Check the resulting delay by pressing Reload from the Delays sub pages Increase the video bit rate if possible For further information see Delay Bit Rate and Consecutive B pictures page 5 29 Check the resulting delay by pressing Reload from the Delays sub pages Disable pre processing unless the encoding rate is low Note If you disable the pre
226. nge Stereo 2 0 96 640 kbit s Dual Mono 1 1 112 640 kbit s Mono Center 1 0 56 640 kbit s For passthrough of Dolby Digital we recommend that you set the maximum data rate to that of the external Dolby Encoder If the data rate of the Dolby Encoder is lower than the setting in the D9032 Encoder the audio will be passed through and only the actual bits in the data stream will be used Note The external Dolby Encoder must be locked to the clock of the D9032 Encoder This can be achieved by connecting the Digital Output of the audio connector to the external encoder Note The D9032 Encoder will only be able to provide an external AES EBU reference signal if the optional audio board is installed Hint In a statmux application you may want to use the maximum data rate setting to secure that a too high and wrong Dolby Encoder setting doesn t disturb the video If the input bit rate is higher than the setting the audio data is lost 13 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 65 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Processing To Set Up the Dolby Digital Processing Proceed as follows to set up the Audio Dolby Digital Processing 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Audio tab expand the Dolby Digital icon expand the Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 or Ch 4 icon and click the Processing icon from the sub pages Select the Dynamic Range Compression summary Video Pre Processor audio vear
227. nical support center Clock Description The device failed to fetch the Warning None On synchronization clock from the time server failed Remedy Check the IP address for the clock server and the IP routing Also check that the time server uses the RFC 867 Day Time Protocol Composite input Description There is no video source on Major A On loss the composite video input Remedy Examine the video input selection in the GUI and check the video source Composite Description The composite video signal Major B On picture sync loss does not comply with the specifications Remedy Check the input signal frequency offset jitter etc Dolby Digital Description The encoder failed to lock to Major B On AES EBU audio the audio frame or the audio sample input error frequency is out of range Remedy Check the cable and the incoming signal 6 10 Service and Maintenance 4019394 Rev B Message Description and Remedy Severity Default Enable alarm category Dolby Digital Description It is not possible to Major B On Audio delay implement the requested audio delay error Remedy Decrease the audio data rate or change video settings to decrease end to end delay Check relative and external delay settings Dolby Digital Description The audio delay setup on the Minor None On DSP Delay high Audio DSP is too high error Remedy Decrease the audio delay
228. nsisting of one or more audio tributaries must have at least one PCR PID enabled If the audio is attached to the Video it does not need a PCR PID 6 Note that the DVB tables use the PIDs from 16 to 20 5 110 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Dolby Digital Audio Program Continued 5 Type the audio language You must type in three letters The supported languages are according to ISO 639 2 The audio language is signalled in a PSI table and used by satellite receivers Refer to Appendix D for the standard codes for the representation of names of languages according to ISO 639 2 6 Select the audio language type This is a language descriptor which besides the audio language above indicates which type of audio you transfer Language Type Meaning Undefined Undefined Used widely for the main program sound Clean Effects Expressly having no language i e the sound track without any speech Hearing Impaired For program speech without music and effects Background noise is reduced so that only one primary sound source is perceived Visually Impaired Used for audio description Audio description is an ancillary component associated with a TV service which delivers a verbal description of the visual scene as an aid to understanding and enjoyment for e g viewers who have visual impairments 7 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 111 Setting Up
229. nt this equipment has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped xiv 4019394 Rev B Important Safety Instructions Continued Wristwatch and Jewelry For personal safety and to avoid damage of this equipment during service and repair do not wear electrically conducting objects such as a wristwatch or jewelry Lightning Do not work on this equipment or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning Labels Do not remove any warning labels Replace damaged or illegible warning labels with new ones Covers Do not open the cover of this equipment and attempt service unless instructed to do so in the instructions Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel only Moisture Do not allow moisture to enter this equipment Cleaning Use a damp cloth for cleaning Safety Checks After service assemble this equipment and perform safety checks to ensure it is safe to use before putting it back into operation Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge ESD results from the static electricity buildup on the human body and other objects This static discharge can degrade components and cause failures Take the following precautions against electrostatic discharge Use an anti static bench mat and a wrist strap or ankle strap designed to safely ground ESD potentials through a resistive element Keep components in their anti static packaging until installed Avoid to
230. ntroller is powered down 3 Use higher default video rates for any channels with full resolution and lower default video rates for any channels with reduced resolution 4 Do as follows if you have to use low default video rates What is considered low default video rates depends on your operational requirements but is likely but not necessarily below 2 5 to 3 Mbit s for full resolution This may be applicable in the applications where bandwidth is a very limited resource and you need to distribute a high number of channels e Use pre processing both pre analysis adaptive quantization matrices and noise reduction to ease the encoding Ensure that the sources are clean with low noise and few artifacts In general the more noise and artefacts the higher the default video rates you need e Consider reducing the horizontal resolution particularly when a source provides soft pictures Note You may change the default video rate on the run without interruption of the service This can be used to make more room for a new service or to utilize more of the available capacity when a program is discontinued Observe the lowest recommended default video rate for different GOP lengths as specified in the table Lowest Recommended Default Video Rate in Statmux Mode Depending on the video material the actual encoding rate during statmuxing may be lower than the lowest recommended default video rate For normal statmux operation you
231. ogy page x Required Knowledge To use this documentation the user should have a basic knowledge of the technology used in relation to this product Service personnel should have additional skills and be familiar with cabling electronic circuitry and wiring practices This manual is intended for operators who are responsible for the configuration remote operation and maintenance of the D9032 Encoder The operator is required to have a basic knowledge of the ROSA management system but is not necessarily familiar with tasks task relationships task commands or other drivers 4019394 Rev B xxvii About This Manual Continued Related Documentation Further helpful information is available in the following documents manual Title Part No ROSA 3 0 Client User Manual 6984888 ROSA 3 0 Single User User Manual 6984882 ROSA Element Manager Installation and Operation Guide 4006813 ROSA Element Manager User s Guide 4005743 COPERNICUS MKIII Element Manager User manual 6985110 COPERNICUS MKIII Element Manager User Manual 6985110 COPERNICUS MKIV User s Guide 4005590 Digital Headend Backup Task Driver for ROSA 3 0 User s Guide 6985066 Digital Content Manager DCM Model D9900 System Guide 4011745 Digital Content Manager DCM Model D9900 Configuration 4011746 Guide Electronic manual accessible via embedded user interface COPERNICUS MKIV Sy
232. on Word must to be 12 characters long The ESW must to be 16 characters long and the Injected ID must to be 14 characters long Note You cannot edit individual characters in the input fields If you have to change a key you must type the whole key and click Apply 4 Click Apply Management Center Tool MCT If you click the Download MCT Application button a small program enables you to calculate the following keys Input Result I ID and session word for ESW for encoder encoder I ID and ESW for encoder Session Word Injected ID for decoder ESW or decoder 5 102 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Section J Setting Up the PSI Enabling Disabling the PSI SI Information To Enable or Disable the PSI SI Information Proceed as follows to enable or disable the PSI SI information 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the PSI tab PSI PSI Transport Stream MeEnable PSI SI Video w Gaudio Apply 2 To enable the PSI SI information check the enable PSI SI information check box 3 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 103 Setting Up the Transport Stream To Set Up the Transport Stream Proceed as follows to set up the Transport Stream 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the PSI tab and the Transport Stream icon from the sub pages A E Transport Stream Transport Stream Networ
233. on the complexity of the picture and the picture resolution The lowest recommended minimum rate varies depending on the horizontal resolution and the delay mode 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 11 Video Menu Continued Horizontal Lowest Minimum Resolution Rate Mbit s Extended Normal Low Delay Delay Delay 720 1 11 1 30 1 49 640 0 91 1 10 1 40 544 0 86 1 00 1 31 480 0 76 0 86 1 20 352 0 65 0 76 0 99 Video Bit Rates Statmux Bit Rates Default Parameters Steps Description 500 000 to 15 000 000 1 bit s The default video rate is the channel s contribution to the statmux pool when the D9032 Encoder participates in statistical multiplexing with the Statistical Multiplex Controller During statistical multiplex operation each D9032 Encoder that participates in statistical multiplexing will be granted capacity from the statmux pool The sum of the default video rates for the active statmux channels equals the size of the statmux bit rate pool The total rate of the statmux channels will not go beyond the statmux pool size but may go lower depending on the max quality limit The default video rate determines the encoding rate at which the encoder starts after power up Also it determines the rate the encoder settles to during communication errors between the Statistical Multiplex Controller and the D9032 Encoder or when the Statistical Multiplex Controller
234. onnector Function Connector Number and Type STATMUX Connection to the Statistical 9 pin sub D female Multiplex Controller SDI IN SDI input BNC CUE TONE Cue tones for DPI triggering Terminal block CONTACT Contact closure for DPI triggering CLOSURE ANA DIG AUDIO Analog and digital audio input for Terminal block IN3 amp 4 channels 3 and 4 Important All cabling must be shielded and grounded at both ends except for Power Alarm and Cue Tone contact closures 3 10 Installation 4019394 Rev B Section C Connecting the Input Output Signals Connecting the Video and Reference Signal Inputs Connectors for the Video and Reference Signal Inputs Both the SDI The composite video input and reference input connectors are of the BNC type and are internally terminated The following video and reference input signals are supported e 270 Mbit s digital 525 and 625 lines SDI or e Analog composite PAL B D G H I and K and NTSC M e Composite reference input To Connect to the Video Input Do as follows to connect to the video input 1 Connect the video input signal to the SDI In or Composite In connector Use a 75 ohm double braided coax cable To Connect the Reference Input Do as follows to connect to the reference input 1 Connect the reference input signal to the REF IN connector Use a 75 ohm double braided coax cable 4019394 Rev B Installation 3 11 Connecting the Audio Inputs Connecto
235. onnector or cable 4019394 Rev B Installation 3 5 Connection of Scientific Atlanta Equipment to DC Power Sources Continued 48 to 60 V DC Power Source Some Scientific Atlanta products can be equipped with a DC power supply which accommodates both 48 V DC and 60 V DC Nominal power supply systems Normal Service Voltage Range not exceeding 36 V DC to 72 V DC For the allowable nominal voltage refer to the Ratings Identification label on your product In this case the device is provided with a dedicated MATE N LOK type connector or an AMP type III connector A mating connector is provided in the accessory set of the unit For this category of equipment the safety considerations for handling dangerous voltages are applicable WARNING Use the same level of safety precautions for this equipment and power source as for the AC power source For units powered by a 60 V DC Nominal power source observe the following safety warnings and guidelines e Use a listed DC rated Branch Circuit protection in accordance with the wire size and with a maximum of 15 A current The circuit protection must be placed in the hot wire in order to protect the rack wiring and the power connector of the D9032 Encoder We recommend a slow blow type of fuse in order to pass the in rush current during power up e The 60 V DC power source must be electrically isolated from the Mains ACc source in accordance with the standard of the c
236. opyright The copyright has the same meaning as the copyright bit on CDs and DAT tapes i e telling that it is illegal to copy the contents if the bit is set This box is checked per default 4 Check the Original check box if you want to signal that the encoded bit stream is located on its original media This box is checked per default 5 Click Apply 5 58 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Layer Il Processing To Set Up the Layer Il Processing Proceed as follows to set up the Layer II Processing 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Audio tab expand the Layer II icon expand the Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 or Ch 4 icon and click the Processing icon from the sub pages Summary Video pre processor audio var om audio Processing amp QLayer I PES Frame Count es lt ch 1 2 Audio 1 Processing Each 1 Left all Mc Ch 2 Right Sing _ Test Tones _ e E Ch 3 4 Audio 2 tH Ch 5 6 Audio 3 8 E9Ch 7 8 Audio 4 Dolby Digital inear Dolby 2 Set the PES Frame Count This figure denotes the number of audio frames per PES packet The legal range is from 1 to 8 The default value is 8 3 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 59 Setting Up the Layer Il Test Tones To Set Up the Layer Il Test Tones Tones icon Proceed as follows to set up the Layer II Test Tones 1 From the Layer II sub pages
237. or 2 Description The GOP length and the number of B pictures influences the picture quality and delay For further information see Setting Up the Video Encoder page 5 24 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 9 Video Menu Continued The following table shows example settings and their meaning GOP Length B Pictures Meaning 0 I only 1 IB 0 IPPP 12 2 IBBPBBPBBPBB Chroma Parameters 4 2 0 4 2 2 Description You typically use 4 2 0 in distribution applications 4 2 2 is sometimes used in contribution applications Note You can only select the 4 2 2 video chroma format if you have bought installed and enabled this option Video Rate Mode Parameters Fixed Bit Rate Statmux Variable Bit Rate Description Fixed bit rate encoding simply means that your video channel is encoded at a fixed rate For further information see Video Bit Rates Fixed Bit Rate page 4 11 For the statmux mode you must set up parameters controlling bit rates quality and the priority You have to state these three parameters for each statmux channel For further information Setting Up the Statistical Multiplexing page 5 38 You need a Statistical Multiplex Controller to implement statistical multiplexing Variable means Stand alone Variable Bit Rate which implies that the D9032 Encoder provides a variable bit rate output itself and in this mode there is no need for an external statistical multiplex controlle
238. or embedded input You can assign any of the encoded audio channels to the video program or to independent audio only programs To Enable or Disable the Audio Channels Proceed as follows to enable or disable the audio channels 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Audio tab and click the Audio icon from the sub pages The GUI displays the available stereo audio channels and the possible channel formats A highlighted channel icon indicates that the channel in question is enabled summary video Pre Provessor audio ver I opr TS output audio Audio ayer II Enable Audio Dolby Digital Encoder Linear Dolby E Layer II Dolby Digital Linear Dolby E 2 If relevant enable the audio channel s Click the channel in question to enable it If you click an enabled channel it will be disabled Note If you enable Dolby Digital without having installed the Dolby Digital option and if you have set Passthrough of Dolby Digital to On the Dolby Digital Passthrough channel will be enabled 3 Click Apply Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Layer Il Audio Input To Set Up the Layer II Audio Input Proceed as follows to set up the Layer II Audio Input 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Audio tab expand the Layer II icon and click the Ch 1 2 Ch 3 4 Ch 5 6 or Ch 7 8 icon from the sub pages Gaudio Layer II 5 Cch 1 2 Audio 1 Proce
239. or jurisdiction where this product is installed e The correct fuse type and rating are indicated on this product Factory service e Refer service only to service personnel who are authorized by the factory 4019394 Rev B v Regles de securite Prot gez vous des risques d lectrocution et prot gez votre syst me contre les endommagements ventuels Ce produit respecte les standards internationaux de s curit et de conception Veuillez observer toutes les proc dures de s curit qui apparaissent dans ce guide ainsi que les symboles de s curit qui figurent sur le produit Si du fait des circonstances ce produit cesse de fonctionner normalement cessez de l utiliser et emp chez en l utilisation future Evitez le risque de blessures et de dommages aux produits Ne proc dez aucune t che tant que vous n aurez pas enti rement assimil les conditions indiqu es par un symbole Ce symbole figure dans la documentation accompagnant ce produit Il indique d importantes instructions de fonctionnement ou d entretien Ce symbole peut tre attach a ce produit Il indique une borne sous tension la direction indique la borne Ce symbole peut tre attach ce produit Il indique une borne de terre de protection gt S gt Ce symbole peut tre attach a ce produit Il indique une temp rature excessive ou dangereuse Alimentation Enceinte Cables Fusibles Important Ce produit f
240. or that reason an I picture can be decoded separately Light Emitting Diode Longitudinal Time Code The time code that is recorded ona special address track on videotape Media Dependant Interface Management Information Base Maximum Transmission Unit The greatest amount of data or packet size that can be transferred in one physical frame on a network This packet also contains the header and trailer information Network Information Table Provides information about the physical network National Television Systems Committee The American TV transmission standard which uses an interlaced 525 line 30 frames per second picture Phase Alternating Line European TV transmission standard Glossary 2 4019394 Rev B Glossary Continued found in several variants Uses an interlaced 625 line 25 frames per second picture except PAL M only in Brazil which uses an interlaced 525 line 30 frames per second picture PCM Pulse Code Modulation A process in which a signal is sampled and each sample is quantized independently of other samples and converted by encoding to a digital signal PCR Program Clock Recovery PMT Program Map Table Identifies and indicates the locations of the streams that make up each service and the location of the Program Clock Reference fields for a service P picture Predictively coded pictures Pictures which have been coded based on a motion compensated prediction The motion compensatio
241. ote Proceed to steps 3 and 4 below if you have previously created a logon 3 Type the user name if you have created a logon Note The default user name and password are both sa as shipped with the encoder They are used by the encoder if you have not created a logon When the default user name and password are used you are not prompted to log on to the encoder onnect to 10 11 66 182 User name sa v Password eel Remember my password Note If you have forgotten your user name and password you can reset them from the front panel user interface 4 Type the password if you have previously created a logon 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 15 Creating a Logon Password To Create a Logon Password Proceed as follows to create a logon password Log on to the D9032 Encoder GUI Click the Logon button Type a user name and a password F http 10 11 66 182Avmb doc Change E O X Change Password User Name User Password eeccccece Confirm Password eoccccces Ok Close ok E Done Internet The user name and password can be a maximum of 32 ASCII characters Important The password and user name will be remembered for the whole of the web session Close the web browser if you want to prevent others from getting access to the settings of the D9032 Encoder Note If you forget your user name and password you can reset them from the fron
242. other and stored Any inconsistencies will be shown in the display 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 25 System Menu Continued Important For the changes to take effect you must reset the D9032 Encoder after you have finished setting or changing the IP address subnet mask and default gateway The D9032 Encoder will display a reminder Note The reset may take up to 90 seconds Note The IP Address is not affected by the Default command IP Management Subnet Mask Parameters Description IP Management Gateway Parameters Description IP Aux IP IP Address Parameters Description lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt The subnet mask of the management interface to the D9032 Encoder Setup similar to IP Management IP IP Address page 4 25 above Note The subnet mask is not affected by the Default command lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt The default gateway of the management interface to D9032 Encoder The D9032 Encoder uses this gateway to route IP traffic across the network Setup similar to IP Management IP IP Address page 4 25 above Note The default gateway setting is not affected by the Default command Note The default gateway 0 0 0 0 means that no gateway is used lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt lt 0 to 255 gt The IP address of the Aux interface on the D9032 Encoder Use the numeric k
243. ountry where you are installing the product e The wire size of the cable used to connect a product to the DC distribution module or bus bar must have the appropriate wire size to avoid overloading We recommend a minimum of 1 5 mm or AWG16 for 15 A fusing e Always wire the protective earth terminal of the DC power supply connector or cable 3 6 Installation 4019394 Rev B Connection of Scientific Atlanta Equipment to DC Power Sources Continued Connection to Centralized DC Power Systems WARNING Only units designed and rated for connection to 48 to 60 V DC Nominal power sources are suitable for connection to Centralized DC Power Systems A centralized DC power distribution system typically 48 V DC is a power system consisting of open batteries charger rectifier circuits and primary and secondary distribution equipment intended to provide power to equipment loads Two types of systems exist Source earthed DC power systems in which the connection to the earthing electrode is located at the source and separate earthed and protective earth conductors are provided throughout the system DC power system earthed at the equipment location in which the connection to the earthing electrode is located in the area where the load equipment is to be installed Scientific Atlanta equipment is designed for connection to Source earthed DC power systems A typical power distribution arrangement is shown be
244. ow You cannot see the keys when typing or entering the menu BISS E Injected You want to scramble the transmission by using ID two BISS E keys the Injected ID and the Encrypted Session Word ESW You cannot see the keys when typing or reloading 4 22 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B Output Menu Continued Restrictions on Entering of Key Values CA BISS 1 SW Parameters Description CA BISS E Clear SW Parameters Description CA BISS E ESW Parameters Description CA BISS E Injected ID The D9032 Encoder will not accept changes of key values in case either of the following conditions are met s less than 10 seconds have elapsed since last change of a key value more than 10 changes in key values have been made within the last 5 minutes This means that only one parameter can be changed per Apply 0 to 9 and A to F The BISS 1 session word must be in hexadecimal notation and 12 characters long You toggle between the letters by using the Down arrow key 0 to 9 and A to F The BISS E clear session word must be in hexadecimal notation and 12 characters long You toggle between the letters by using the Down arrow key 0 to 9 and A to F The BISS E encrypted session word must be in hexadecimal notation and 16 characters long You toggle between the letters by using the Down arrow key The BISS E encrypted session word is used together with BISS E Injected ID desc
245. pecifications Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other program element N A A figure between 16 and 8190 The PID of the proprietary transparent lines Observe that you may not use the same PID for any other program element 4 8 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B Video Menu Structure To see the Video menu from the Main menu press the RIGHT arrow key and the SELECT key Each parameter is described in the following For instructions on how to select and store settings see About the Front Panel page 4 2 The menu has the following structure Video Video Video Input GOP Chroma Video Rate Mode gt lt Video Bit Rates Picture Width gt lt 3 2 Pulldown Inversion Frame Sync GOP Video Bit Rates GOP Length B Pictures Fixed Bit Rate Statmux Bit Rates gt Video Bit Rates lt Variable Bit Rates Statmux Bit Rates Variable Bit Rates Minimum Default Maximum Minimum Maximum 03 080 Input Parameters PAL NTSC SDI525 SDI625 SDI AUTO PAL M PAL N Description Select the video input format of the source to encode Note If you select SDI Auto the encoder automatically selects the line type detected in the SDI signal GOP GOP Length Parameters A figure in the range from 1 to 32 Description The GOP length and the number of B pictures influences the picture quality and delay For further information see Setting Up the Video Encoder page 5 24 GOP B Pictures Parameters 0 1
246. plies to the left channel 3 Select the Room Type This option indicates the type of mixing room used for the final audio mixing session This is used only if the Main Product Info Exists is On see above Possible options are Small Room Large Room and Not Indicated The default is Small Room 5 68 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Dolby Digital Channels Continued Set the Mixing Level This option indicates the acoustic sound pressure level of the dialog level during the final audio mixing session of the Main encoded Dolby digital bit stream Possible options are in the range of 0 to 31 If you have selected Dual Mono encoding the Main mixing level setting applies to the left channel The default is 25 Note In Dual Mono 1 1 mode this setting applies to the Main channel left Set the Dialog Normalization Use this field to select how far measured in dB the average dialog level is below digital 100 for Stereo 2 0 streams Mono 1 0 streams or the main channel of Dual Mono 1 1 streams The default is 27 The range is from 1 to 31 dB Note In Dual Mono 1 1 mode this setting applies to the Main channel left In Dual Mono 1 1 repeat steps 2 to 5 for the Aux channel Note These settings apply to the right channel Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 69 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Passthrough To Set Up the Dolby Digital Passthrough Proceed as follows to s
247. ply systems are considered e 48 V DC Nominal Voltage systems with absolute maximum values below 60 V DC SELV e 48 to 60 V DC Nominal Voltage systems with absolute maximum values below 75 V DC NON SELV For the allowable nominal voltage refer to the Ratings Identification label on your product 48 V DC Power Source For equipment designed to be powered by a 48 V DC power source and having a Normal Service Voltage Range not exceeding 38 to 58 V DC the following safety warnings and guidelines apply e Independent units and chassis must be connected to the 48 V DC power source via the mating field wiring connector Furthermore the following applies Use a listed DC rated Branch Circuit protection in accordance with the wire size and with a maximum of 15 A current The circuit protection must be placed in the hot wire The 48 V DC power source must comply with the safety extra low voltage SELV requirements in the UL 60950 CSA C22 2 No 60950 EN 60950 and IEC 60950 standards The 48 V DC power source must be electrically isolated from the AC source in accordance with the standard of the country where you are installing the product The wire size of the cable used to connect a product to the DC distribution module or bus bar must have the appropriate wire size to avoid overloading We recommend a minimum of 1 5 mm or AWG16 for 15 A fusing Always wire the protective earth terminal of the DC power supply c
248. porting Component Driver 3 0 8 3 0 12 Scientific Atlanta OK SNMP Protocol Protocol Driver 3 0 31 3 0 12 Scientific Atlanta OK Instal Help Check that the SNMP Protocol driver is present If not install it by clicking the Install button and pointing to your device driver folder on your hard disk Click the Install button and install the D9032 Encoder driver Install the driver by selecting the D9032_Encoder rsd file and clicking the Open button 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 7 Installing the D9032 Encoder Device Driver Continued 6 Click OK and verify that the D9032 Encoder device driver is installed 7 Close the Installed Drivers window Note If you have previously installed a D9032 driver and are now installing a new one you will be asked to reboot the COPERNICUS 8 If you are asked to reboot after installing the D9032 driver do as follows Step Action 1 Select Manage gt Reboot server on the Server menu 2 Reconnect the COPERNICUS click OK Right click the COPERNICUS icon select Connect and Click the Resource Drivers button from the tool bar Verify that the D9032 Encoder device driver is installed 9 Close the Installed Drivers window 2 Installed Drivers By ATM Service Manager EVAxIS Driver 1D9030_Encoder E 09032_Encoder 1D9034_Encoder E D9050_Encoder 109054 Encoder FOP Protocol EI MEM II oh Reporting YT SNMP Protocol
249. processing the picture quality may be degraded and the encoder cannot perform 3 2 PDI Check the resulting delay by pressing Reload from the Delays sub pages Reduce the number of B pictures in the GOP sequence Check the resulting delay by pressing Reload from the Delays sub pages Reduce the delay time From the Delays sub pages you click Manual type the wanted delay in the Encoding Delay field and click Apply Note When you reduce the delay the picture quality may be degraded The acceptable reduction depends on the actual setup Use a sufficiently long GOP Check the resulting delay by pressing the Reload from the Delays sub pages 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 29 Reduced Delay Guidelines Continued Guide Line The following table shows our recommended minimum bit rates for various reduced delays The recommendation assumes MP ML a GOP without B pictures and 704 or 720 pixels in the picture You may reduce the bit rate by approximately a factor of two using the 352 pixels setting Delay ms Bit rate Mbit s 150 gt 10 200 28 250 26 300 25 5 30 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Delay Bit Rate and Consecutive B pictures Important The following curves display an end to end delay for fixed rate encoding i e from the video input connector on the encoder to the video output connector on the decoder e For information on delay for statmux operation refer
250. r Multiframe 3D Note For custom filtering you must choose between temporal and spatial filtering Only one of the two filters are supported at the same time It is recommended that you turn off the spatial filter and use the temporal filter unless you are specifically required to use the spatial filter Your first choice would be the temporal multiframe 3D filter for any kind of noise This provides the best noise reduction of the filters offered It is more efficient than the spatial filter and gives less smearing This filter has a good effect on e g camera VCR and film noise The filter can have a good effect on removing noise in e g text and graphics in composite sources The multiframe 3D temporal filter lets you decide how much you want to filter The more you push the slider to the right the greater the filtering For noisy material you should start with one of the upper two filters For the upper settings you ll experience some suppression of composite artifacts and quantizing noise from previous encoding If you typically operate at higher rates and have good source material you would likely choose one of the first two settings The settings in the middle provide a good compromise of filtering and detail preservation You may want to experiment with the 2 Frame temporal filter when you only want limited noise filtering This filter is designed to have very little impact on the content though it still eases the burden of th
251. r On the other hand an external transrater device is required such as the BMR from BigBand the CherryPicker from Terayon or the Transis RateCompressor or the Digital Content Manager DCM from Scientific Atlanta 4 10 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B Video Menu Continued Video Bit Rates Fixed Bit Rate Parameters Steps Description 500 000 to 15 000 000 for 4 2 0 chroma format and 1 500 000 to 50 000 000 for 4 2 2 chroma format 1 bit s The fixed video bit rate The below figure illustrates the connection between bit rate chroma and profile 4 2 0 Chroma 4 2 2 Chroma 05 15 15 50 Mbit s Mbit s Mbit s Mbit s A Note Observe the minimum bit rates for the various GOP lengths For further information see Setting Up the Video Encoder page 5 24 For the relationship between bit rate profile number of B pictures and codec delay see Setting Up the Video Encoder page 5 24 The video bit rate must always be lower than the transport stream TS bit rate For further information see Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries page C 3 Video Bit Rates Statmux Bit Rates Minimum N A Parameters Steps Description 500 000 to 15 000 000 1 bit s The instantaneous rate during statmux operation will not go below the stated minimum rate The instantaneous rate may be higher than the stated minimum rate if so determined by the rate algorithm Note The minimum statmux rate depends
252. r is set up to run in statmux mode the Used Payload readout is based on the Default Video Rate For information on how to make your own bit rate budget see Making a TS Rate Budget page 5 21 Select On Off or Null Packets Under normal operation you should verify that the output is set to On The output may have been set to Off by the ROSA Element manager For further information refer to the ROSA Element Manager User s Guide part number 64005743 Null Packets implies that null packets will be transmitted in the transport stream at the given bit rate Select the ASI mode Packet unless you have specific requirements Select between the 2 DVB transmission modes for ASI In Packet mode you send a whole MPEG packet together 188 204 bytes with stuffing in between packets In Burst mode you send 1 byte at a time with stuffing in between Some non Scientific Atlanta decoders specifically require Packet or Burst mode 4 Click Apply Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the IP Streaming Parameters To Set Up the IP Streaming Parameters Proceed as follows to set up the IP streaming parameters 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the TS Output tab and the IP Streaming icon from the sub pages CHD EED i TS Output IP Streaming Gast Mode Disable SIP Streaming me PCR Synchronization Enable Backup Main Backup mac 00 50 4b 00 11 22 MAC IP 0 0
253. rate Rs 188 204 code rate n where Rs is the symbol rate in MBaud or Msymbols sec the 188 204 refers to the outer Reed Solomon coding in the modulator n 2 for QPSK 3 for 8PSK and 4 for 16QAM and the code rate is the rate of the inner coding 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 and 7 8 The transport stream rate of the D9032 Encoder shall be set up to equal the rate calculated by the formula above Remember to disable the RS in the D9032 Encoder The maximum transport stream rate is determined by the ASI interface or the satellite modulator whichever is lowest Note that satellite modulators often have a minimum transport stream rate that is much higher than the minimum transport stream rate of the D9032 Encoder Note 10 Mbaud gives the following transport stream rate with 8PSK modulation with 7 8 code rate 10 Mbaud 188 204 7 8 3 24 9 Mbit s Transport Stream Rates 4019394 Rev B Appendix D ISO 639 2 Language Codes Overview Introduction This appendix lists the Standard Codes for the Representation of Names of Languages according to ISO 639 2 In This Appendix This appendix contains the following topics Topic See Page Language Codes Sorted by Alpha 3 Letter Code ISO 639 2 D 2 4019394 Rev B ISO 639 2 Language Codes D 1 Language Codes Sorted by Alpha 3 Letter Code ISO 639 2 ISO 639 2
254. ration without service interruption or to set the filter to adjust automatically to the encoding complexity of the video contents The PreSightPlus video noise reduction and pre analysis features are options that may be ordered with the D9032 Encoder or added later Sub sampling The D9032 Encoder supports subsambling Sub sampling decreases the resolution of the source material in order to lower the amount of data to be encoded Transport Stream The encoded data carrying the video and audio signals is internally multiplexed into the MPEG 2 and DVB compliant transport stream when the D9032 Encoder is used in a stand alone or ROSA controlled application The three ASI outputs always carry the transport stream TS 4019394 Rev B Introduction 2 5 Application Examples Single Channel Encoding for Distribution The D9032 Encoder can be used for single channel encoding in distribution applications i e for local program encoding or other applications where only a few channels are needed VIDEO P EES E ASI AUDIO D9032 Encoder Local Regional Encoding Often a locally generated program needs to be added to the distribution network This is where the D9032 Encoder comes in A local program is encoded in the D9032 Encoder The output from the D9032 Encoder is a single program transport stream With for example the Continuum DVP D9600 Re multiplexer and Transport Stream Processor you can insert the locally generat
255. rces be sure to disconnect all power sources before working on this equipment If this equipment does not have a main power switch the power cord connector serves as the disconnect device Always pull on the plug or the connector to disconnect a cable Never pull on the cable itself e Unplug this equipment when unused for long periods of time Connection to 48 V DC 60 V DC Power Sources If this equipment is DC powered refer to the specific installation instructions in this manual or in companion manuals in this series for information on connecting this equipment to nominal 48 V DC 60 V DC power sources Circuit Overload Know the effects of circuit overloading before connecting this equipment to the power supply CAUTION Consider the connection of this equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring Refer to the information on the equipment rating label when addressing this concern General Servicing Precautions WARNING Avoid electric shock Opening or removing this equipment s cover may expose you to dangerous voltages Be aware of the following general precautions and guidelines e Servicing Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when this equipment has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into this equipme
256. re You Begin Overview When you have connected a PC and the D9032 Encoder to an ethernet network you can set up and control the unit from the Internet Explorer browser Minimum Requirements Make sure that your computer meets the following requirements before accessing the Web interface from your computer Item Requirements Processor Pentium II processor or higher Operating system e Windows 98 or Me e Windows NT 4 0 e Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3a e Windows XP Web browser Internet Explorer version 6 or greater Display resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Mouse keyboard Required Ethernet connection Required Adding the D9032 Encoder to the Ethernet Proceed as follows to set add the D9032 Encoder to the Ethernet 1 Connect the D9032 Encoder to the Ethernet For further information see Connecting the Units page 1 1 2 Set up the IP address of the D9032 Encoder via the front panel or via the GUI For further information see Front Panel Setup 2 Although the following sections are applicable to the web interface the setup procedures under ROSA are similar to those described in the following section 5 14 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Logging On to the Web Interface To Log on to the Web Interface Proceed as follows to log on to the Web Interface 1 Open MS Internet Explorer 2 Type the IP address of the D9032 Encoder to set up in the Address bar and press Enter N
257. resent but has been disabled In this case you have to enable the option to make it work Please contact your local Scientific Atlanta sales representative if you want to buy an option 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 31 System Menu Continued Option License Auto Concatenation Parameters Enabled Disabled Description The status of the license signifies the following Status Explanation Enabled The option is present and enabled Disabled The option is present but has been disabled In this case you have to enable the option to make it work Please contact your local Scientific Atlanta sales representative if you want to buy an option Option License Dolby Digital Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 or Channel 4 Parameters Enabled Disabled Description You need an option license for the two Dolby Digital channels The status of the license signifies the following Status Explanation Enabled The option is present and enabled Disabled The option is present but has been disabled In this case you have to enable the option to make it work Please contact your local Scientific Atlanta sales representative if you want to buy an option Option License Adv Video Input SDI Parameters Enabled Disabled Description The status of the license signifies the following Status Explanation Enabled The option is present and enabled Disabl
258. ress and fax number e Any service contract details e Purchase order number of repair disposition authority if available Result The customer service representative issues the RMA number and provides the shipping address Note If you cannot provide a purchase order number e A proforma invoice listing all costs incurred will be sent to you at the completion of product repair e Customer service must receive a purchase order number within 15 days after you receive the proforma invoice e Products can accrue costs through damage or misuse or if no problem is found Products incurring costs will not be returned to you without a valid purchase order number 7 4 Customer Information 4019394 Rev B Returning Products Continued 3 Proceed to Packing and Shipping the Product Packing and Shipping the Product Follow these instructions to pack the product and ship it to Scientific Atlanta 1 Are the product s original container and packing material available e If yes pack the product in the container using the packing material If no pack the product in a sturdy corrugated box and cushion it with packing material Important e You are responsible for delivering the returned product to Scientific Atlanta safely and undamaged Shipments damaged due to improper packaging may be refused and returned to you at your expense Do not return any power cords or accessories 2 Write the following information on the outsi
259. ribed below Parameters 0 to 9 and A to F Description The BISS E clear injected ID must be in hexadecimal notation and 14 characters long You toggle between the letters by using the Down arrow key Output Bit Rate Parameters 1 000 000 to 64 000 000 Steps 1 bit s Description The ASI output bit rate transport stream rate For information about how much the various tributaries video audio VBI etc take up of in the transport stream see Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries page C 3 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 23 Output Menu Continued ASI Mode Parameters Description Output Format IP Mode Parameters Description Parameters Description Packet Burst Select between the 2 DVB transmission modes for ASI In Packet mode you send a whole MPEG packet together 188 204 bytes and have stuffing in between packets In Burst mode you send 1 byte at a time with stuffing in between Some non Scientific Atlanta decoders specifically require Packet or Burst mode 188 204 RS Off 204 RS On 188 means that the Reed Solomon Error Correction algorithm is not applied on the TS output 204 RS OFF The setting means that the Reed Solomon algorithm is not applied on the output The 16 bytes overhead are 0 bytes which may later be used for Reed Solomon error correction 204 RS ON means that the Reed Solomon algorithm is applied for ASI outputs The Reed Solomon algorithm is not appli
260. riority setting at the standard setting unless you want to prioritize your statmux channels differently Set the target video quality This parameter sets the maximum quality for the video channel It is used to free capacity for opportunistic IP data when your video quality requirements are met The joint rate control algorithm ensures that the encoders do not spend more bits on the video than required The standard setting for all channels is 15 Best If you leave the target video quality for all channels at 15 the Statistical Multiplex Controller will attempt to use all of the statmux pool Hint Keep the target video quality setting at 15 if you do not want to insert IP data If you want to make room for IP data you may experiment to reduce the quality limit to find the level that is appropriate for your service The following settings are recommended for the various applications Application Max Quality Limit Best possible quality 15 High quality 14 13 12 Medium quality 11 10 9 Reduced quality 8 7 6 5 Low quality 4 3 2 1 0 Note The smaller the statmux pool the less frequently you will reach the target quality limit How often depends on the video material You may go back to step 3 and change the default video rate if you want to As a rule of thumb the more important IP data is compared to the video the lower the target video quality should be 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitorin
261. rnal frame synchronizer is enabled We recommend that you set the delay to 1 second to hide temporary short input losses The legal settings are in the range from 0 to 10 Check the Copyright check box if you want to signal that the encoded bit stream is protected by copyright This box is unchecked per default Check the Original check box if you want to signal that the encoded bit stream is an original This box is unchecked per default Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 23 Setting Up the Video Encoder To Set Up the Video Encoder Important If the GUI displays greyed out fields or buttons this means that you do not have the license for the option in question For information on options see Options and Accessories page E 3 Proceed as follows to set up the Video Encoder 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Video tab and the Encoder icon from the sub pages video Encoder Encoder MJ Enable Encoder Delays A GaAspect Ratio Picture Width 704 pixels Encoder Rate Video Chroma Format 4 2 0 O 4 2 2 Auto Concatenation No xj GOP Sequence GOP Length 15 Number of B Pictures 2 Generate Display Sequence No a Extension Header Generate Composite Display No g Parameters Apply 2 Enable the video encoder Disabling the video encoder means that the video program will not be encoded Audio standalone PSI a
262. roceed as follows to get access to the Cable NIT display 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the PSI tab expand the NIT icon and click the Cable icon from the sub pages summary video Pre Provessor audio ver PE Psi Cable Transport Stream Frequency 7 700 000 100 Hz video i Fi CaAudio Symbol Rate 68 50 100 S s Covel Modulation 64 v QAM CONIT FEC Inner 5 6 ihe cable z Satellite FEC Outer RS 204 288 v GTerrestrial Apply Example of Setup for a DVB Cable Delivery System The following table shows a valid example of the NIT for a DVB cable delivery system Cable Delivery System Parameters Frequency 770 MHz Symbol rate 6 875 Msymbol s Modulation 64 QAM FEC inner 5 6 Convolutional code rate FEC outer RS 204 188 5 118 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Satellite NIT To Set Up the Satellite NIT Proceed as follows to get access to the Satellite NIT display 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the PSI tab expand the NIT icon and click the Satellite icon from the sub pages NS re ee T A A ee PSI Satellite Transport Stream Frequency 126 600 10 kHz video sudio Symbol Rate 275 000 100 S s vel amp GNIT Orbital Position 182 0 1 cable OSatellite East West Flag East v CiT
263. roceed as follows to set up the Linear Dolby E linear parameters 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Audio tab expand the Linear Dolby E icon expand the Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 or Ch 4 icon and click the Linear icon from the sub pages Gaudio Linear Layer II CO Enable Sample Rate Converter Dolby Digital 5 OLinear Dolby E Bit Depth 20 v G9Ch 1 Audio 1 GaProcessing Linear E9Ch 2 Audio 2 Ch 3 Audio 3 Ch 4 Audio 4 2 If relevant enable the sample rate converter Enable the sample rate converter if your source is not synchronized to the D9032 Encoder 3 Set the bit depth The sample rate is 48 kHz You may select between 16 20 and 24 bits Note The bit depth setting is only applicable for linear mode The bit depth is always 20 bits in the Dolby E mode 4 Click Apply 5 76 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Section G Setting Up the VBI Selecting VBI Source and Enabling VBI Resources Overview From the VBI tab page you select the VBI data that you want to transfer from the incoming video signal to the outgoing transport stream Note Besides selecting the VBI data you must also enable the lines in which the VBI data reside for the data to be transferred For further information see Setting Up the VBI Lines in 625 Lines Systems page 5 81 and Setting Up the VBI Lines in 525 Lines Systems page 5 83 Different VBI PIDs The following different V
264. rol Front Panel Control The following drawing shows the front panel with its different sections LCD Panel Alarm LED Navigation Selection Keypad o oo GE D OO OE ED OO CE D D Oo ez D Power LED 04 097 Numeric Keypad Ethernet The main control interface for the D9032 Encoder is the 10 100 BaseT Ethernet interface You can set up and control the D9032 Encoder via the Ethernet connection using SNMP and a management system for example the ROSA control and management system From ROSA you can update the D9032 Encoder software using FTP File Transfer Protocol A MIB file is included in the delivery from Scientific Atlanta for the D9032 Encoder to support 3rd party SNMP managers 2 12 Introduction 4019394 Rev B Control and Management Interfaces Continued Alarm Relay Interface During operation the condition of the D9032 Encoder can be monitored by three relay contact outputs accessible from the Alarm connector on the rear panel of the D9032 Encoder Furthermore the alarm status is signalled by Alarm LEDs on the front of the D9032 Encoder and by messages sent via the management system Contact Closure and Cue Tone Interfaces The contact closure and cue tone interfaces are used for Digital Program Insertion DPI DPI allows for the insertion of advertisements into program content in the digital domain The supported DPI messages are in accordance with the SCTE 35 specification Redundancy The D9032 E
265. rolled environment that meets the requirements given in this equipment s technical specifications D CAUTION If installed in a closed or multi unit rack assembly the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient temperature Therefore install this equipment in an environment compatible with the manufacturer s maximum rated ambient temperature Handling Precautions When moving a cart that contains this equipment check for any of the following possible hazards WARNING Avoid personal injury and damage to this equipment Move any equipment and cart combination with care Quick stops excessive force and uneven surfaces may cause this equipment and cart to overturn e Use caution when moving this equipment cart combination to avoid injury from tip over If the cart does not move easily this condition may indicate obstructions or cables that may need to be disconnected before moving this equipment to another location e Avoid quick stops and starts when moving the cart e Check for uneven floor surfaces such as cracks or cables and cords xii 4019394 Rev B Important Safety Instructions Continued Grounding This section provides instructions for verifying that the equipment is properly grounded Safety Plugs USA Only Depending on the type and application of this equipment Safety Class I or Safety Class II Scientific Atlanta supplies a mains cord with either a
266. rs for the Audio Input The basic configuration of the D9032 Encoder supports 2 stereo channels Optionally it supports 2 additional stereo channels Digital audio for channels 1 and 2 is input at the BNC connector called Digital Audio In The following drawing shows the two BNC connectors DIGITAL AUDIO IN The connector label Analog Audio In 1 amp 2 denotes that analog audio for channels 1 and 2 is input at the top row of pins on the terminal block connector The connector label Ana Dig Audio In3 amp 4 denotes that analog or digital audio for channels 3 and 4 is input at the bottom row of pins on the terminal block connector 3 12 Installation 4019394 Rev B Connecting the Audio Inputs Continued The pinout for the analog part of the terminal block connector is as follows Channel Numbering m Oo CGO NFO A Af o NIe ie N m A 4019394 Rev B Installation 3 13 Connecting the Audio Inputs Continued The pinout for the digital part of the terminal block connector is as follows Channel AES EBU Numbering AES 3id Pin Number Type Signal Shield Type Signal Signal Ground Shield Ground Shield Shield 3 14 Installation 4019394 Rev B Connecting the Audio Inputs Continued To Connect the Audio Inputs Do as follows to connect the audio inputs 1 For digital channels 1 and 2 connect the audio input to the Digital
267. rs supporting this format The D9032 Encoder supports simultaneous transfer of three different output formats for closed captions Format Description None Closed captions and CA data are not transferred EIA 708 Format according to EIA 708 B Digital Television DTV Closed Captioning December 1999 SA Type 4 This is a Scientific Atlanta proprietary format and is used by PowerVu decoders DVS 157 Formerly known as the Motorola GI format 5 86 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Output Formats for Closed Captions Continued To Set Up the Output Formats for Closed Captions Proceed as follows to set up the output formats for Closed Captions 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the VBI tab and the Closed Captions icon from the sub pages summary video Pre Processor Audio ver I per TS Output I Covel Closed Captions 625 Lines Setup Packet 1 9525 Lines Setup ONone EIA 708 teletext Closed Captions OSA Type 4 Obvs 157 Packet 2 ONone OEIA 708 SA Type 4 Obvs 157 Packet 3 O None O EIA 708 OSA Type 4 DvS 157 Apply 2 Select the desired output format of the closed captions for the packet s to be generated Note If you have a mixed bouquet of decoders accepting different formats for closed captions you can simultaneously transfer up to three formats in packet number order in the outgoing transport stream Hint If your decoder doesn t accept the selected form
268. s 16 339 kbit s The set up in the GUI defines the number of lines per field The total number of lines per video frame is twice the number of lines per field C 14 Transport Stream Rates 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries Continued DPI For each DPI channel a maximum of 1 DPI transport stream packet can be sent per frame period This gives the following maximum bit rates for different frame rates and packet modes Frame Rate 188 Bytes Mode 204 Bytes Mode 25 Hz 37 60 kbit s 40 80 kbit s 29 97 Hz 45 07 kbit s 48 91 kbit s 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates C 15 Available Rate on the Transmission Media ASI The rate of the ASI output is set up by the user to match the transmission media or any other device to follow the D9032 Encoder The maximum available transport stream rate is limited by the hardware The maximum transport stream rate of the D9032 Encoder is 64 Mbit s output Note When you select Reed Solomon RS forward error correction FEC or the 204 byte format without RS the payload transport stream rate is reduced to 188 204 of the specified transport stream rate Satellite Interfaces A satellite modulator may be connected to the ASI output of the D9032 Encoder The available transport stream rate on the satellite link depends on the modulation the symbol rate Baud rate and the code rate according to the following formula Transport stream
269. s Chrominance samples are not transferred Quality The transparent lines must have a signal quality identical to ordinary video Dynamic range 50 to 750 mV relative to clamp Output format According to EN 301 775 V1 1 1 Proprietary Transparent VBI Item Specification Lines in 625 50 6 23 319 335 Lines in 525 60 10 to 22 field 1 and 10 to 22 field 2 273 to 284 Number of lines lt 4 per field Signal type Sampled signal 13 5 MHz Synchronization pulse and burst are regenerated in the output Transferred samples All luminance samples Chrominance samples are not transferred Quality The transparent lines must have a signal quality identical to ordinary video Dynamic range 50 to 750 mV relative to clamp Output format Proprietary Technical Specifications A 7 SDI Input System Item Specification Video Formats Signal form Y CR CB Sampling structure 4 2 2 Line numbers field rates 525 29 97 Hz 625 25 Hz Bit rate 270 Mbit s 10 ppm Video data word size 8 bit and 10 bit Input Characteristics Item Specification Number of inputs 1 Connector BNC connector Nominal input level 800 mV gt p nominal Bandwidth 10 Hz to 5 75 MHz 0 2 dB 625 25 Impedance 75 Q unbalanced Return loss 2 15 dB in the range 5 to 270 MHz Minimum jitter acceptanc
270. s 17s 2 in one field and 3 in the other 1 3 Mbit s 2 0s 1 5 78 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Selecting VBI Source and Enabling VBI Resources Continued To Select VBI Source and Enable VBI Resources Proceed as follows to select VBI source and enable VBI resources 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the VBI tab and the VBI icon from the sub pages LL SSSS _ vel VBI VBI opt 0625 Lines Setup VBI Source 9525 Lines Setup O Disable OSDI Teletext O Composite auto Closed Captions Enable EBU Teletext DVB Enable DVB VBI Teletext Enable WSS Enable VPS Enable Transparent Lines Proprietary C Enable Transparent Lines C Enable Line 23 Blanking Important Depending on your hardware configuration and enabled video input various features are selectable Module Options Available Features Adv Video Input high All For Teletext you may control whether there is quality composite EBU teletext or DVB VBI teletext in each individual and or SDI line None basic composite Closed Captions encoder ClearSight and or SDI All except VITC You may control whether there is DVB VBI teletext in each individual line 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 79 Selecting VBI Source and Enabling VBI Resources Continued Select the VBI source The source may be SDI Composite Auto or Disable Auto mean
271. s 20 bits The figures apply to 188 byte packet mode If 204 byte packet mode is used you must multiply by a factor of 204 188 C 8 Transport Stream Rates 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries Continued DVB VBI 625 Lines Systems The required rate for DVB VBI depends on the combination of VPS and WSS lines and the number of transparent lines and teletext lines The following table shows the required rate for each combination in kbit s 0 Transparent 1 Transparent 2 Transparent 3 Transparent Line Line Lines Lines W N W N iv e KN W A E eo ea k ea ea yn gt gt wn gt gt wn gt gt wn gt gt Qa H ko am a ko a H T Pu H gt S gt S gt o S gt S w N lj e N ig N amp N ga e g e e g Se W IZ ee a oe ee 2 lZ 2 e 2 e a 2 Je IF a e 5 z 5 Ez 5 2 5 Z H m zZ H m Z H m Z H m 0 Teletext 0 37 6 37 6 188 188 225 6 376 376 376 526 4 526 4 564 line 1 Teletext 37 6 37 6 37 6 188 225 6 225 6 376 376 376 526 4 564 564 Line 2 Teletext 37 6 37 6 75 2 225 6 225 6 225 6 376 376 413 6 564 564 564 Lines 3 Teletext 37 6 75 2 75 2 225 6 225 6 225 6 376 413 6 413 6 564 564 601 6 Lines 4 Teletext 75 2 75 2 75 2 225 6 225 6 263 2 413 6 413 6 413 6 564 564 601 6 Lines 5 Teletext 75 2
272. s 4 2 2 Chroma SDI 525 Lines 2500 4 2500 4 2000 2000 1500 1500 ms ms 1000 1000 e 2B pictures m 1B pictures 0 B pictures 5 32 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Video Encoder Aspect Ratio To Set Up the Video Encoder Aspect Ratio Proceed as follows to set up the Video Encoder Aspect Ratio 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Video tab expand the Encoder icon and click the Aspect Ratio icon from the sub pages summary video Pre Processor Audio C vea C omr a Fe Gvideo Aspect Ratio I Cee ae Video Aspect Ratio Auto aspect Ratio AFD Source VII Giencoder Rate Active Format Descriptor Off Signaled AFD Mode Obve Proprietary Apply 2 Set the video aspect ratio You select Auto to let the encoder automatically select the aspect ratio extracted from the incoming VII in the SDI input or WSS from the Composite SDI module Select 16 9 for wide screen format Select 4 3 for standard television format 3 Select the AFD Source AFD Source Description VII VII from the SDI signal WSS WSS from the sampled WSS in the SDI input or WSS from the Composite module VII or Else WSS VII from the SDI signal as first priority and sampled WSS in the SDI input or WSS from the Composite input as second priority Important
273. s that the VBI is taken from the active video source With the VBI source feature you may for example take VBI from the composite input and video from the SDI input or vice versa To do this the two signals must be field locked within 5 lines Important Closed captions are set up separately on the Closed captions sub page and extracted from the active NTSC or 525 lines SDI video input signal Note If the source is SDI the VII will always be enabled If required enable the EBU Teletext Teletext in the video input will be sampled and transferred to the outgoing data stream as a separate stream i e with its own PID marked to contain Teletext If required enable DVB VBI Teletext Note DVB VBI Teletext and EBU Teletext can be transferred simultaneously For information on the usable lines see Setting Up the VBI Lines in 625 Lines Systems page 5 81 If required enable the WSS The Wide Screen Signaling WSS is used for signalling the intended aspect ratio to receivers For information on how to set up the WSS see Setting Up the VBI Lines in 625 Lines Systems page 5 81 If required enable the VPS The Video Program System VPS is used for accurate video recording as the recording is not started until a specific program identifier code is found in the incoming video signal For information on how to set up the VPS see Setting Up the VBI Lines in 625 Lines Systems page 5 81 If required enable the DVB Transp
274. s this means that you do not have a license for the option in question For information on options see Options and Accessories page E 3 Proceed as follows to set up the Dolby Digital audio 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Audio tab expand the Dolby Digital icon and click the Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 or Ch 4 icon from the sub pages summary video Pre Processor audio ve l pbr F Gaudio a Ch 1 Audio 1 Layer Ir M Enable Dolby Digital Dolby Digital 6 ch 1 Audio 1 Passthrough of Dolby Digital Off v Processing channels Mode Stereo 2 0 Passthrough Input Type Analog Test Tones ch 2 Audio 2 Sample Rate 48 v kHz Ch 3 Audio 3 s ch 4 Audio 4 Analog Impedance High v Ohm S Linear Dolby E Digital Impedance 75 x Ohm Analog Clipping Level 15000 mdBu Relative Delay 0 ms Embedded Packet Pair Packet 1 Pair 1 Data Rate 192 kbit s Apply Reload Help Note The D9032 Encoder displays an error message if you try to set up an audio channel without having installed the option 2 Enable Dolby Digital Encoding 3 If relevant enable Passthrough of Dolby Digital Note Passthrough of Dolby Digital requires that the Dolby Digital Encoding is enabled in the GUI For Passthrough of Dolby Digital you must set the Input Type to Digital or Embedded Note Note It s possible to enable passthrough of Dolby Digita
275. s utilizing the bandwidth for stereo contents Note Do Not use Joint stereo audio coding if you want to transfer matrixed sound i e stereo surround sound Use Stereo instead If you use Joint stereo part of the phase information which is essential for re creating the surround channel information disappears If you select VPS Auto the actual encoding mode is deducted from VPS in the active video signal according to the following table VPS Input VPS Auto None Dual Stereo Stereo Dual Dual Mono Mono Select in the Input Type field whether your audio input is analog digital or embedded The D9032 Encoder inputs the signal from the Analog Digital input connector in the selected format If you select Embedded the D9032 Encoder extracts the audio embedded in the active SDI video signal of the program Select the sample rate of the signal Set the sampling rate to 32 44 1 or 48 kHz Note It is not recommended to increase the encoding sample rate above the input sample rate Note For the lowest audio bit rates use the lowest sample rate for improved quality Select the analog input impedance Set the input impedance to 600 Ohms if 600 Ohm termination is required in your system Set the encoder s input impedance to High if the source may not be loaded Select the digital input impedance Use 110 Ohms if the audio interface is an AES EBU interface Use 75 Ohms if the audio interface is an AES 3id in
276. se to get set commands depending on the setup of the firewall Please make sure that the SNMP ports are released by the firewall SNMP Request Time out Depending on the load of the network the SNMP manager is connected to time outs may occur if the SNMP time out value is too small You may need to increase request time out to ensure reliable operation 4019394 Rev B SNMP Quick Setup Guide E 5 E 6 SNMP Quick Setup Guide 4019394 Rev B Appendix F Equipment and Accessories Overview Introduction This appendix contains names and part numbers of equipment and accessories for the D9032 Encoder In This Appendix This appendix contains the following topics Topic See Page Accessory Kit for the D9032 Encoder F 2 Options and Accessories F 3 4019394 Rev B Equipment and Accessories F 1 Accessory Kit for the D9032 Encoder Accessory Kit The accessory kit for the D9032 Encoder is included in the delivery It has the part number 4008916 and contains the following items Part number Description 4019394 Rev B Encoder Model D9032 User and Service Manual 196788 4 spring cage plugs for terminal block connectors F 2 Equipment and Accessories 4019394 Rev B Options and Accessories Basic Configurations The following basic configurations are available Part number Description 4013873x 00 D9032 Encoder PAL NTSC dual pass 4 2 0 SD encoder
277. should leave the setting at the maximum 15 Mbit s 3 Set the Minimum Video Rate The legal range is from 0 76 to 15 Mbit s The instantaneous rate during operation will not go below the stated minimum rate The instantaneous rate may be higher than the stated minimum rate if so determined by the rate algorithm The lowest possible minimum rate depends on the complexity of the picture and the horizontal picture resolution 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 45 Setting Up the Stand Alone Variable Bit Rate Continued Note The lowest possible minimum rate varies depending on the horizontal resolution Horizontal Resolution Lowest Minimum Rate Mbit s 720 704 1 30 640 1 10 544 528 1 00 480 0 86 352 0 76 4 Set the Target Video Quality This parameter sets the maximum quality for the video channel It is used to free capacity for opportunistic IP data when your video quality requirements are met The joint rate control algorithm ensures that the encoder does not spend more bits on the video than required The default setting for all channels is 8 Hint Set the target quality setting to 15 if you do not want to insert IP data You may then experiment to reduce the quality limit to find the level that is appropriate for your service The following settings are recommended for various applications Application Max Quality Limit Best possible quality 15 Hig
278. ssing ach 1 Left All Mc ch 2 Right Sing Test Tones Coch 3 4 Audio 2 och 5 6 Audio 3 Ch 7 8 Audio 4 dolby Digital amp Linear Dolby E Audio Ch 1 2 Audio 1 Enable Ch 1 Mode Input Type Sample Rate Analog Impedance Digital Impedance Analog Clipping Level Relative Delay Embedded Packet Pair Bit Rate 2 If relevant enable the audio channel s C Enable Ch 2 Stereo Analog 48 High 75 15000 0 Packet 1 Pair 1 h 192 b kbit s Apply J i Reload J Help Normally Audio Channel 1 is enabled and part of the video program Note Audio channel 2 is only applicable when the encoding mode is Single Mono Note Enable the audio after you have changed all audio settings if you don t want to transmit the audio while the changes take place 3 Set the encoding mode You may select between Stereo Joint Stereo Dual Channel and Single Mono and VPS Auto Setup and Monitoring Setting Up the Layer II Audio Input Continued If channel separation is your first priority you should select Dual Channel In some cases you use Stereo or Joint Stereo instead as these two modes may optimize the sound quality Stereo channels may borrow bits from each other thus utilizing the available bandwidth Joint stereo encodes high frequencies with insignificant stereo contents as mono thu
279. sssssssesissesteresresesrestenenreseseesesreseeneseene 5 55 Setting Up the Layer II Channel Information asic ocsscsancuectntorsnsdeentanivencsetestrcntesestareserss 5 58 Setting Up the Layer II Processing s sssseesssiesereseessssesissteterieresesresrsntntentnsenereseenesrese 5 59 Setting Up the Layer II Test Tones ssssssssesssssssssesessesessesteseseresresessenteseneenessesesnesnese 5 60 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Audio Input s ssssssssesssessesesresssessssestereesesesnesrssesesren 5 62 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Processing sii ccstssesstss nasties bnazabnn cbesosvaschsaatavetaernnvan Gs 5 66 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Channels sachin ccs vduvnteuuleauiecdahndimncdn animes 5 68 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Passthrough essssesssessissesesressseseseseeresresesnesrsnenresese 5 70 Setting Up the Dolby Digital Test Tones sssssssssesssistestesesessssresesesresesesnesrsseesesees 5 71 Setting Up the Linear Dolby E Audio Input ss ssssssssssesessssesesressssesresisesesresesnesnese 5 73 Setting Up the Linear Dolby E Processing se seesssssssesesessesesrsstsesresinsesesreseeneseess 5 75 Setting Up the Linear Dolby E Linear Parameters e esesssessessesesresiereressesessesses 5 76 Section G Setting Up the VBI rirnan nerien iee e aiei nees irnata e baeent 5 77 Selecting VBI Source and Enabling VBI Resources sssssseesssrseesereesesessesrseereseee 5 77 Setting Up the VBI Lines in 625 Lines
280. st sample rate for better quality Layer Il lt ch 1 to ch 8 gt Bit Rate Parameters 32 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 or 384 kbit s Description The bit rate must be lt 192 kbit s if you set the Layer II mode to Mono If you use Joint stereo it is recommended that you use bit rates up to 128 or 192 kbit s Joint Stereo with a bit rate of 256 or 384 kbit s reduces sound quality compared to stereo Layer Il lt ch 1 to ch 8 gt Mode Parameters Stereo Joint Stereo Dual Channel Single Mono Description Do not use Joint stereo audio coding if you want to transfer matrixed sound i e Stereo Surround sound Use Stereo instead If you use Joint stereo part of the phase information essential for re creating the surround channel information disappears Note If you select the Single Mono mode you get the setup which has been enabled in the ROSA GUI Layer Il lt ch 1 to ch 8 gt ProgRef Parameters Video Audiol Audio2 Audio3 Audio4 Audio5 Audio6 Audio7 Audio8 Description When you select Video the audio in question will be part of the video program When you select one of the audios you define that audio channel to be part of the selected audio program In this manner you can set up several audio channels to be part of the same audio program 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 17 Audio Menu Continued Layer Il lt ch 1 to ch 8 gt Audio PID Parameters A figure between 16
281. stem G4 User s Guide 4010960 Multi Encoder Manager Application Layer User manual 4013152 Regulus Statistical Multiplex Controller User and Service 4006277 Product Versions This user manual complies with the following software versions e D9032 Encoder embedded software version 2 10 e ROSA management system version 3 0 build 8 or greater e SNMP protocol driver version 3 0 20 e D9032 Encoder device driver version 3 0 4 xxviii 4019394 Rev B Chapter 1 Quick Setup Read Me First Connecting the Units Electrical Connection AC Power Proceed as follows to connect the units S Out Cue Contact Analog Audio Ref In ASI Monitor Management Le A In i Closure n 14 2 AA rm COMPOSITE FIN OUTI ASIOUT2 ASIMONITOR ALARI oni ET ET N pees aki DIGITAL AUDIO IN p MANAGEMENT r AUX 1 ouT 5G6G7G8G 2 Statmux Composite Input ASI Output 1 2 Alarm Ir TS Out Digital ain Audio In 04 032 Connect the video input signal to the SDI IN and or COMPOSITE IN connector For further information see Connecting the Video and Reference Signal Inputs page 3 11 If relevant connect the reference input signal to the REF IN connector For further information see To Connect the Reference Input page 3 11 Connect the audio input signals for channels 1 and 2 to the DIGITAL AUDIO IN 2 BNC connectors or Analog Audio IN 1 amp 2 Use a high quality shielded balanced audio cable for the analog inputs or
282. stream rates depend on the video frame rate 625 lines and 25 Hz vs 525 lines and 29 97 Hz systems while others don t 4019394 Rev B Transport Stream Rates C 3 Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries Continued Video The required MPEG 2 transport stream rate in the D9032 Encoder primarily depends on the video coding rate to some extent on the frame rate but only slightly on the GOP The following table shows the required transport stream rates for a selection of video rates The transport stream rate figures are truncated to two decimals The variation of the required transport stream rate for different GOPs is within truncation accuracy so you need not take the GOP or line system into consideration The table applies to both fixed encoding rate and to the maximum instantaneous encoding rate during statistical multiplexing For statistical multiplexing the outgoing TS rate of the D9032 Encoder must have room for the maximum encoding rate that may occur Use the default video rate when you want to make the TS Rate budget For further information see Making a TS Rate Budget page 5 21 If you have a limitation of the allowed TS rate for statistical multiplexing you may need to set the maximum encoding rate Refer to Setting Up the Statistical Multiplexing page 5 38 Rate TS Rates Mbit s Mbit s 1 5 1 59 2 2 11 2 5 2 62 3 3 13 3 5 3 65 4 4 16 4 5 4 67 5 5 18 5 5 5 70
283. t ENER LED Function The function of the LEDs is described in the table below LED Signal Explanation Remedy POWER Green The D9032 Encoder is N A correctly powered Off There is no power present Check the AC DC line supply ALARM Red An A alarm is active See the explanation remedy in Messages page 6 9 Off No A alarm is active N A 6 8 Service and Maintenance 4019394 Rev B Messages General The status of the D9032 Encoder and its immediate surroundings is reported to ROSA in the form of messages and alarms In ROSA you can enable or disable messages and attach an alarm category to each message Before You Start Messages from the D9032 Encoder are shown in the COPERNICUS Explorer For information on how to view messages see Viewing the Message Log page 5 127 You define and set up the status of the messages from the Message Settings page in the D9032 Encoder GUI For further information on how to set up messages see Setting Up the Message Parameters page 5 124 D9032 Encoder Message List The following shows an alphabetical list of the available messages their default status and an explanation to the messages Message Description and Remedy Severity Default Enable alarm category A general Description A general hardware error Critical A On hardware error has occurred has occurred Remedy When persistent contact your Scientific
284. t connected 5 Not connected 00 052 6 Rx 7 Not connected 8 Not connected Informative Notes To Connect the Ethernet Interface For reliable Ethernet operation to run over a maximum segment length of 100 m the cable has to comply with the EIA TIA Category 5 wire specifications 1 Connect a crossed RJ 45 cable between the Aux connector on the D9032 Encoder and the Ethernet port of the equipment following the D9032 Encoder i e a backup receiver Note A crossover cable is required to connect the Ethernet interface of the D9032 Encoder directly to another Ethernet device without using a hub switch You need to set up the IP address on both the D9032 Encoder via the front panel display and the equipment following the D9032 Encoder For information on setting up the IP address via the front panel see Front Panel Setup page 1 3 The equipment following the D9032 Encoder could be an IP router or a switch 3 22 Installation Overview Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Introduction This chapter describes how to set up the D9032 Encoder using the front panel keys and display In This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic See Page About the Front Panel 4 2 Keypad Convention 4 4 Startup Screen 4 5 Main Menu 4 6 PSI Menu 4 7 Video Menu 4 9 Audio Menu 4 16 Output Menu 4 22 System Menu 4 25 Lock Menu 4 34 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operat
285. t layer protocol to choose is up to the capabilities of the managed devices and the requirements of reliability provided by the transport protocol layer The D9032 Encoder uses the UDP protocol SNMP Versions There are 3 SNMP versions which are commonly used 1 SNMPv1 with limited security 2 SNMPv2c with simple authentication scheme using community strings 3 SNMPv3 with more elaborate authentication schemes and data encryption support The D9032 Encoder uses the SNMPv2c as this is widely supported and does not have the security flaws of the SNMPv1 version SNMP Terminology SNMP defines the managing system as an SNMP manager and the remote devices as SNMP agents The D9032 Encoder is an SNMP agent Management Information Bases Management Information bases MIBs are textual descriptions of the structure and types of data expected to be exchanged between a SNMP manager and its agents It is usually up to the agent manufacturer to provide the MIB The MIB tells the SNMP manager which data can be exchanged and how the data is formatted A MIB file is available from Scientific Atlanta for the D9032 Encoder to support 34 party SNMP managers When first released a MIB can not be changed in the sense that is not allowed to remove descriptions already defined in the MIB It is possible to add new structures and data and or extend existing ones You may find further reference information on MIB files in RFC 1213 An SNMP manager c
286. t panel menu of the D9032 Encoder Type the new password once more Click OK Reset the D9032 Encoder You reset the D9032 Encoder by pressing the Reset button from the System tab page Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Web Interface Summary Screen To get an Overview of the Main D9032 Encoder Settings Proceed as follows to get an overview of the main D9032 Encoder settings 1 Log on to the Web Interface Atlanta Logon o hp CE Atema summary Cit tian n a in nn ean 15 2 704 SDI 625 5 000 000 Dolby Digital 4 Stereo 2 0 Analog Dolby Digital Stereo 2 0 Analog Dolby Digital Stereo 20 l Analog Dolby Digital Stereo 270 Analog 8007 Pre Processor Pre Analysis a Noise Reduction Auto The summary display shows the main Video Pre processor Audio VBI and DPI settings of the D9032 Encoder some features of which are not available in the D9032 Encoder Note Audio programs in the Prog column have a V or an A outside the number to signify that the audio is attached to the video respectively an audio only program 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 17 Tab Pages Tab Pages The GUI of the D9032 Encoder has a number of tab pages Summary video Pre Processor audo ver M omr TS Output The function for the tab pages is as follows e Summary From this page you can get an overview picture of the most important settings in the D9032 Encoder e
287. te Minimum Parameters Steps Description 760 000 to 15 000 000 1 bit s The legal range is from 0 76 to 15 Mbit s The instantaneous rate during operation will not go below the stated minimum rate The instantaneous rate may be higher than the stated minimum rate if so determined by the rate algorithm The lowest possible minimum rate depends on the complexity of the picture and the picture resolution Video Bit Rates Variable Bit Rate Maximum Parameters 1 500 000 to 15 000 000 Steps 1 bit s Description This setting is used to avoid that the rate for a channel exceeds a specified value The legal range is from 1 5 to 15 Mbit s If you do not need rate limitation you should leave the setting at the maximum 15 Mbit s 4019394 Rev B Front Panel Operation 4 13 Video Menu Continued Picture Width Parameters Description 3 2 Pulldown Inversion Parameters Description 720 704 640 544 528 480 352 Set the picture width to 720 pixels unless you have specific requirements The width determines the number of horizontal pixels in the coded picture independently of the input type and format Changing the width can decrease the resolution of the source material and in this way lower the amount of data to be encoded 720 is the normal setting You should select 704 pixels if your incoming signal has a lower number of active horizontal pixels in the picture This is often sufficient for PAL and
288. tective ground Note The equipotential bonding terminal provided on some equipment is not designed to function as a protective ground connection e Class II Mains Powered Equipment Provided with a 2 terminal AC inlet that may be connected by a 2 terminal power cord to the mains supply outlet No connection to the protective ground is required as this class of equipment is provided with double or reinforced and or supplementary insulation in addition to the basic insulation provided in Class I equipment Note Class II equipment which is subject to EN 50083 1 is provided with a chassis mounted equipotential bonding terminal See the section titled Equipotential Bonding for connection instructions Equipotential Bonding If this equipment is equipped with an external chassis terminal marked with the IEC 60417 5020 chassis icon pe the installer should refer to CENELEC standard EN 50083 1 or IEC standard IEC 60728 11 for correct equipotential bonding connection instructions 4019394 Rev B xiii Important Safety Instructions Continued AC Power Important If this equipment is a Class I equipment it must be grounded e If this equipment plugs into an outlet the outlet must be near this equipment and must be easily accessible Connect this equipment only to the power sources that are identified on the equipment rating label normally located close to the power inlet connector s If this equipment has two power sou
289. ter Code ISO 639 2 ccecseessseeeeseesees D 2 Appendix E SNMP Quick Setup Guide OyervieW aniser aa NEE EE SEU ESES spe sas Sas DEENA ou nai ies Solves ved louse SA EENE hina E 1 PERO CHO Tos sos fas a ees an ees i a a i ara a t em Tasaa teat baba ea rn E 2 pet hs alot E21 921 cn meet Mee pi Pcp CR ye nen re WR Ee eV Non ey a ee oa E 4 SNMP Hints and Common Pitfalls sisccisiecuassisinainevedsvetiacetiinivinmn Degeeme heise verawiees E 5 Appendix F Equipment and Accessories OV CR VACW esis Eea E O EAE ONERE AEE ri E En SEa EN T F 1 Accessory Kit for the D9032 Encoder wasiwyicecianmaniminineoa ns manned F 2 Options atid Accessofies nnion nin i a n a a A a F 3 Appendix G References Applicable Docu ences saya tsctea ss cigs sean rst en an R a E a Eas G 1 CECE a aaa EAE A E en aeanaeaten agen Glossary 1 Ideki a a a Ein Index 1 xxvi 4019394 Rev B About This Manual Objective Audience This manual describes how to install use and maintain the Encoder Model D9032 Note The manual describes all available options for the D9032 Encoder Your D9032 Encoder may only have some of the features described in this manual The audience of this manual includes users operators and service personnel who are responsible for the installation operation and service of the D9032 Encoder For further information about the definition of operator and service personnel see also the section about Service Personnel and Users and Operators in Terminol
290. terface Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Layer II Audio Input Continued 8 Set the analog clipping level The legal range is from 6000 to 24000 mdBu You typically set the clipping level 6 dB above your maximum program level So for a maximum level of 9 dBu set the clipping to 15000 mdBu If your maximum level is 15 dBu set the clipping level to 21000 mdBu The resolution is 500 mdBu Note You will only get unity gain if you set the clipping level to the same value for the encoder as the maximum output level in the decoder 9 Set the relative delay The legal range is from 1000 to 1000 ms Use this field if you want to adjust the encoding audio delay to synchronize audio with video in a program which has both Example If you use external video equipment which adds to the video delay you type a positive relative audio delay value corresponding to the external video delay Note You cannot set a negative relative audio delay greater than the end to end delay determined by the video encoder For information about the video delay see Setting Up the Video Encoder Delays page 5 27 10 For embedded audio select the embedded packet pair The SDI video input can contain up to 8 stereo audio channels each represented by a packet 1 to 4 and pair 1 or 2 You can transfer up to 4 of these channels 11 Set the bit rate of the signal The legal bit rates for Layer II encoding are 32 48 56 64 80 96 112 12
291. the lowest lines in field two Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Teletext Continued Hint In certain situations you may want to limit the number of teletext lines You may have a tight bit rate budget and an input which occasionally has addi tional teletext lines By limiting the number of teletext lines to be transferred you can prevent any additional teletext lines from damaging your output Note Available Rate on the Transmission Media page C 16 shows the payload in the TS for different maximum numbers of teletext lines 4 Click Apply 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 85 Setting Up the Output Formats for Closed Captions Overview The D9032 Encoder is capable of transferring closed captions and Content Advisory CA data from the incoming video signal to the outgoing transport stream CA data carries program rating information and enables a TV set to block displaying of a television program depending upon its rating The rating system is also known as Content Advisory TV Parental Guidelines In the decoder this is known as v chip support Format Description None Closed captions and CA data are not transferred EIA 708 ATSC Format according to CEA 708 B Digital Television DTV Closed Captioning December 1999 EIA 708 SA Proprietary This is the EIA 708 format with proprietary Scientific Atlanta header information To be used with decode
292. the role as master Note At least one encoder in the pool must be set to On otherwise there will be no master Perhaps you don t consider the backup encoder a reliable clock reference in all situations In such situations you set it to Slave Only In another scenario you may consider one encoder as particularly trustworthy This may be because this encoder is directly cabled to the video reference clock or it is closest to the switch or hub You then set this encoder to Master by selecting On and the others to Slave Only Type the PCR UDP Port Number All encoders with the same port number participate in the same PCR pool if they are set to On or Slave Only as described above The legal range is from 1 to 65535 5 Click Apply 5 100 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Conditional Access Parameters To Set Up the Conditional Access Parameters Note BISS related settings are not stored in the exported settings file Hence they cannot be cloned from one device to another e g in backup scenarios Proceed as follows to set up the conditional access parameters 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the TS Output tab and the Conditional Access icon from the sub pages Summary Video Pre Processor audio vel om lo TS Output Conditional Access as IP Streaming BISS Mode BISS 0 Scrambling Off v PCR Synchronizat
293. ting in ROSA 5 9 IP streaming multicasting 5 97 setting up 5 93 Index 2 4019394 Rev B Index Continued L Layer II audio channel information 5 58 setting up 5 33 5 55 test tones 5 60 layer II encoding front panel setup 4 17 overview 2 9 specifications A 14 A 15 LEDs 6 8 license to software 5 7 linear audio front panel setup 4 20 Linear Dolby E linear parameters 5 76 processing 5 59 5 73 5 75 M macro connector 3 16 messages explanation 6 9 viewing 5 126 N noise reduction 2 5 5 50 enabling 5 50 installing option 5 135 specifications A 2 NTSC input 3 17 O online help 5 20 P PAL input 3 17 picture size 5 24 pin allocation alarm connector 3 18 contact control 3 16 ethernet connector 3 19 3 21 3 22 statmux connector 3 17 power viii xiv connecting DC 3 8 specifications A 21 pre analysis enabling 5 48 installing option 5 135 specifications A 2 PreSightPlus noise reduction 2 5 setting up 5 47 specifications A 2 sub sampling 2 5 product support 7 2 7 3 PSI setting up 5 104 PSI information enabling or disabling 5 103 R rate ASI bit rate A 17 Dolby Digital 4 18 front panel setup audio 4 17 front panel setup video 4 10 guidelines 5 29 lowest in statmux mode 5 43 recommended in fixed rate encoding 5 36 SDI input rate A 8 setting up video 5 35 specifications audio A 14 A 15 statmux 5 38 5 45 A 16 TS bit rate
294. to the Maximum Video Delay on page Setting Up the Statistical Multiplexing page 5 38 Note the following e The curves are valid for SDI interfaces If you use composite input on the encoder you must add one field delay 20 ms for PAL and approximately 17 ms for NTSC The delay is almost independent of whether SDI or composite output is used on the decoder Delay for MP ML Fixed Rate Encoding The following illustration shows the relation between the delay bit rate and number of consecutive B pictures in 4 2 0 chroma mode when the encoding delay is set to Auto 2 0 Chroma SDi 625 Lines 4 2 0 Chroma SDI 525 Lines 2400 2500 2200 2000 1800 2000 1600 1400 1500 1200 1000 800 600 500 400 200 oS Lt o 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 0 2 4 6 8 E 12 a 16 Mbit s Mbit s ms e 2 B pictures a 1 B picture 0 B picture Note The D9032 Encoder automatically limits the encoding delay for fixed rate encoding to 2 seconds excluding the pre processing delay and delay in external equipment for low bit rates 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 31 Delay Bit Rate and Consecutive B pictures Continued Delays in 4 2 2 Chroma Mode The following illustration shows the relation between the delay bit rate and number of consecutive B pictures in 4 2 2 chroma mode when the encoding delay is set to Auto 4 2 2 Chroma SDI 625 Line
295. tor for the Statmux Input The Statmux input is not applicable to the D9032 Encoder The D9032 Encoder has one bidirectional RS 232 data channel for connection to the Regulus Statistical Multiplex Controller The following table shows the female Statmux connector and the pin allocation for the RS 232 input Connector Pin number RS 232 Connector Pin allocation Signal 1 Aee O 9 O OND TF WN FR Not connected RxD output TxD input DTR input GND DSR output RTS input CTS output Not connected RS 232 E data channel at a bit rate of 38 400 baud Connector type 9 pin sub D female To Connect the Statmux Interface Do as follows to connect to the Statmux interface 1 Connect the one to one RS 232 cable to the Statmux Interface connector Note Use a shielded cable 2 Connect the other end of the RS 232 cable to the Regulus Statistical Multiplex Controller The D9032 Encoder automatically sets up the RS 232 communication parameters when choosing statistical multiplexing Installation 3 17 Connecting an External Alarm System Connector for an External Alarm System The D9032 Encoder is equipped with a connector for alarm relay outputs for remote alarm signaling The Alarm output connector is a 9 pin Sub D female connector The following drawing shows the connector and the pin allocation table for the Alarm output connector Con
296. treaming packets 8 If relevant repeat steps 4 to 6 for the backup receiver 9 Type the TTL Time To Live TTL is a value in an Internet Protocol IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet has been in the network too long and should be discarded You specify the number of hops The legal range is from 0 to 255 The default value is 128 10 Set the number of TS Packets to 7 unless you have specific requirements Use a lower value if data is passed through transmission equipment where the MTU is lower than 1470 bytes The legal range is from 1 to 7 The default value is 7 The following table shows the maximum MTU sizes for the various TS packets at 188 byte and 204 byte output format respectively For further information on output formats see Setting Up the ASI Output Parameters page 5 92 No of TS Maximum MTU Size Bytes In UDP Mode oes 188 Bytes Mode 204 Bytes Mode 1 230 246 2 418 450 3 606 654 4 794 858 5 982 1062 6 1170 1266 7 1358 1470 5 94 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the IP Streaming Parameters Continued Use the following table to find the IP overhead for the various number of TS packets per IP packet in 188 byte and 204 byte mode respectively No of TS IP Overhead in pone 188 Bytes Mode 204 Bytes Mode 1 22 4 20 6 2 11 2 10 3 3 7 5 6 9 4 5 6 5 2 5 4 5 4 2 6 3 8 3 5 7 3 2 3 0
297. tribution Scenario IP multicasting is a concept where the transmitter here the D9032 Encoder can transmit one IP packet that will be received by many receivers here the Explorer 2000 set top boxes on several subnets Multicasting is only a matter of transmitting the IP packets with a special dedicated IP address called the multicast IP address and MAC address For multicasting to work properly it is only a matter of configuring the receivers set top boxes with that same multicast IP address and having set up the IP network with proper routing IP multicast addresses class D must for practical use be in the range from 224 0 1 0 to 239 255 255 255 A typical multicast IP address could for example be 230 10 20 30 MAC 00 50 4b 60 00 bf IP 150 158 230 2 zo D9032 Encoder IP Backbone See IP 150 158 230 5 IP 120 158 230 12 a Listens to Multicast address ee Set top box IP 198 158 230 30 230 10 20 30 Port Number 5555 Listens to Multicast address 06 098 230 10 20 30 Port Number 5555 Set top box Listens to Multicast address 230 10 20 30 Port Number 5555 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 97 Streaming Video to Many Set top Boxes Multicasting Continued Setup in the D9032 Encoder ROSA Web Interface Given an IP multicast address it also determines the MAC address absolutely The encoder automatically uses the correct multicast MAC address when configuring it with a multic
298. ts for the online help file is displayed when you click the Help button The Apply Reload and Context sensitive Help Buttons The GUI of the D9032 Encoder has the following general buttons Displays the Context Sensitive Online Help Reloads All Settings into the Entire GUI in Applies All Settings in the GUI to the Encoder Note Apply all values including the new ones are validated against each other Incompatible settings result in an error message telling you why the values couldn t be set 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 19 Context Sensitive Online Help Online Help Features Setting Up the NIT Microsoft Internet Explorer The GUI of the D9032 Encoder has context sensitive online help Just press the help button in the GUI and the help belonging to the current window will display Throughout the help system there are hypertext links to related topics From the help window you can e use the table of contents to navigate in the help system e use the index to find specific topics access the Scientific Atlanta web site contact Scientific Atlanta support by e mail Table of Contents Backwards Forwards Index File Edit View Favorites Tools Help en aoe es ay Scientific Atlanta CEK A CISCO COMPANY Setting Up the NIT Hyperlink To Set Up the NIT Proceed as follows to set up the NIT 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the 2 Select the relevant delivery type
299. u have to install the ROSA management system and the SNMP protocol driver on your PC See the ROSA manual for information on how to install ROSA Important You need a license to install the device driver If you need to install the ROSA Single user this also requires a license You can get a license file by contacting Field Services at one of the Scientific Atlanta support centers For further information see Product Support page 7 2 To Install the D9032 Encoder Device Driver Do 1 2 3 4 as follows to install the D9032 Encoder device driver Insert a CD ROM with the D9032 Encoder device driver in your CD ROM drive Start the ROSA management system Right click the COPERNICUS icon select Connect and click OK Click the Resource Drivers button from the tool bar 9 gt Name Driver Type Driver Version Required Core Company Status a ATM Service Manager Task Driver 3 0 1 3 0 12 Scientific Atlanta OK EI AXIS Driver Device Driver 3 0 37 3 20 3 0 15 Scientific Atlanta OK 1039030_Encoder Device Driver 3 0 7 1 0 1 3 0 15 Scientific Atlanta OK 1039032_Encoder Device Driver 3 04 3 0 15 Scientific Atlanta OK 109034_Encoder Device Driver 3 0 3 3 0 15 Scientific Atlanta OK H109050_Encoder Device Driver 3 0 1 3 0 15 Scientific Atlanta OK 109054 Encoder Device Driver 3 0 0 3 0 15 Scientific Atlanta OK Y IIOP Protocol Protocol Driver 3 0 23 Scientific Atlanta OK EI MEM II Device Driver 3 0 9 3 0 10 Scientific Atlanta OK oh Re
300. uching electronic components when installing a module Fuse Replacement Lithium Battery To replace a fuse comply with the following Disconnect the power before changing fuses Identify and clear the condition that caused the original fuse failure Always use a fuse of the correct type and rating The correct type and rating are indicated on this equipment For equipment with a lithium battery observe the following rules Do not dispose of used batteries through the regular garbage collection system but follow the local regulations The batteries may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment Replace batteries with the same or equivalent type recommended by Scientific Atlanta Insert batteries correctly There may be a risk of explosion if the batteries are incorrectly inserted When disposing of this equipment remove the batteries and dispose of them separately in accordance with local regulations Do not recharge the batteries or expose them to temperatures above 100 C 212 F Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulatory Requirements This equipment meets applicable electromagnetic compatibility EMC regulatory requirements EMC performance is dependent upon the use of correctly shielded cables of good quality for all external connections except the power source when installing this equipment Ensure compliance with cable connector specifications and associated installation instructions where given elsewh
301. ue Tone Interfaces Contact Closure and Cue Tone Connector The D9032 Encoder has a contact closure and a cue tone interface which can be used to trigger digital program insertion DPI The contact closure interface has 8 inputs The cue tone interface has two inputs Pin Allocation The connector labeled CUE TONE CONTACT CLOSURE is a 24 pin terminal block connector The following table shows the connector and the pin allocation Connector Drawing Pin Description Pin Description Number Number ancl aan 1 1 Cue Tone In 13 NC CUE CON CLO 2 Cue Tone In 14 NC 1 12 EEKE 008 0008 3 Ground 15 NC m m D 1 Di 13 24 5 Contact 1 17 Contact 5 e e0e e008 008 6 Ground 18 Ground 7 Contact 2 19 Contact 6 8 Ground 20 Ground 9 Contact 3 21 Contact 7 10 Ground 22 Ground 11 Contact 4 23 Contact 8 12 Ground 24 Ground Note Contact open not connected internal pull up Contact closed connected to ground To Connect to the Contact Closure Interface Connect the external contact closure equipment to the contact closure interface External contact closure equipment could be a Monroe DTMF decoder To Connect to the Cue Tone Interface Connect the external cue tone equipment to the cue tone interface External cue tone equipment could be a PowerVu D9850 Program Receiver 3 16 Installation 4019394 Rev B Connecting the Statmux Interface Connec
302. ure is above 45 degrees Celsius Temperature Description The temperature is Warning B On approaching low approaching the lower limit for safe limit operation Remedy Raise the ambient temperature to more than 0 zero degrees Celsius Temperature Description The temperature is outside Critical A On outside safe the safe limits The unit will be shut limits down Remedy Check that the Fan malfunction message is enabled and not active Check that the ambient temperature is within 0 45 degrees Celsius The option Description An option license file is Information None On import stringis invalid invalid Remedy Check the Host ID and the ordered options in the option license file 6 18 Service and Maintenance 4019394 Rev B Message Description and Remedy Severity Default alarm category Enable TS rate Video rate mismatch Description The encoding rate is too high compared to the TS rate or the encoding rate is too low The encoding will restart Remedy Check the settings Change the encoding rate or increase the TS rate Ina statmux set up the TS rate of an encoder must have room for the maximum instantaneous encoding rate If a FIFO error occurs recurrently contact your Scientific Atlanta technical support center Major B On VII error Description The encoder has detected an error in the VII signal Remedy Check your SDI source and the equipment that generates VI
303. ure material Auto concatenation makes it possible to align I frames of encoded pictures with I frames of previously encoded input material By detecting the position of I frames in the incoming video and making proper adjustments to the GOP the I frames of the encoded material can be aligned to the input The GOP adjustments are performed seamlessly This feature decreases the degradation of video quality usually seen when two or more encoders are cascaded concatenated 1 In 625 lines mode with VII 2 8 Introduction 4019394 Rev B Audio and Data Interfaces Audio Input Four audio stereo channels can be input at the D9032 Encoder Each of the audio inputs accept analog digital AES EBU or AES 3id input Audio channels 1 and 2 i e on board audio are only able to support S PDIF and not AES EBU You can assign the encoded audio channels in multiples of two to the video program or to independent audio only programs Digital Audio Interface The audio input interface accepts a digital input formatted as an AES EBU encoded signal Left and right channel samples are extracted from the input and synchronized to the video signal Analog Audio Interface The audio input interface features balanced left and right analog inputs For each analog audio input you can set the input impedance and the clipping level Embedded Audio The audio input interface can be configured to accept an input of embedded audio from the SDI video inp
304. use ist nicht zu ffnen Niemals einen Gegenstand durch die Geh use ffnungen einf hren Vor jeglicher Wartung des Ger tes sind alle Kabel zu entfernen Hierzu grunds tzlich am Stecker oder Verbindungsst ck und niemals am Kabel selber ziehen Nicht auf die Kabel oder Stecker treten oder diese einer Zugbelastung aussetzen Wenn mit AC Speisung versehen der D9032 Encoder hat zweipolige bzw Neutralleiter Sicherung im Netzteil Immer den korrekten Sicherungstyp mit dem richtigen Nennwert benutzen der im Land oder innerhalb der zust ndigen Gerichtsbarkeit genehmigt ist wo dieses Produkt installiert wird Angaben zum korrekten Sicherungstyp und Nennwert befinden sich auf diesem Produkt Hersteller Wartung Wartungsarbeiten sind nur durch vom Hersteller autorisierte Techniker vorzunehmen 4019394 Rev B vii Precauciones de seguridad Power Cubierta Cables Fusibles jProt jase contra la electrocuci6n y proteja su sistema contra los da os Este producto cumple con los criterios internacionales de seguridad y disefio Observe todas los procedimientos de seguridad que aparecen en esta guia y los simbolos de seguridad adheridos a este producto Si las circunstancias impiden la operaci n segura de este producto suspenda la operaci n y asegure este producto para que no siga funcionando jEvite lastimarse y evite dafiar el producto No avance mas alla de cualquier simbolo hasta comprender completamente las co
305. ut interface Audio Encoding Formats The supported audio encoding formats are MPEG 1 layer II Dolby Digital linear audio and passthrough of Dolby Digital Layer Il Encoding The audio inputs may be encoded in the following ways e a stereo program e a joint stereo program two independent mono programs e Dual channel You can set the sampling frequency for the digitizing process to one of the following values e 32 kHz 44 1 kHz e 48 kHz For audio attached to the video the D9032 Encoder locks the audio sampling frequency to the video For AES EBU digital input signals the D9032 Encoder automatically adapts the incoming rate by using sample rate conversion 4019394 Rev B Introduction 2 9 Audio and Data Interfaces Continued Dolby Digital Encoding The audio inputs may be encoded in the following ways e Dual Mono 1 1 e Stereo 2 0 e Mono 1 0 You can set the sampling frequency for the digitizing process to one of the following values e 32 kHz e 44 1 kHz e 48 kHz The D9032 Encoder locks the audio sampling frequency to the video For AES EBU digital input signals the D9032 Encoder automatically adapts the incoming rate by using sample rate conversion Dolby Digital Passthrough The D9032 Encoder supports passthrough of up to four pre encoded Dolby Digital stereo channels Linear Audio and Dolby E Passthrough The D9032 Encoder supports passthrough of up to 8 pre encoded Dolby E channels The D9032 Encoder
306. wer to the D9032 Encoder remove the power cord and dismount the D9032 Encoder from the rack Pull on the connector to disconnect the cable Never pull on the cable itself 2 Unscrew the 8 screws holding the top plate Use a PH 1 screwdriver 4019394 Rev B Service and Maintenance 6 3 Replacing the Fan Continued 3 Unscrew and remove the nuts and washers two in front of the fan unit and one at each side Use an internal hex 5 mm screwdriver F i i Loi 4 Unplug the fan connector at the main board 6 4 Service and Maintenance 4019394 Rev B Replacing the Fan Continued 5 Unplug the front panel connector from the main board PEIER J j 7 p peers A Sey Sh e Er 5 a 6 Pull out the cable throug h the opening in the fan unit oF of a ad j fe i P a ji 4 f 7 Replace the fan 8 Mount in reverse order Note Make sure that the cable with the front panel connector goes through the opening in the fan unit and not below it 9 Dispose of the old fan Do not dispose of the old fan through the household garbage collection system but follow your local regulations 4019394 Rev B Service and Maintenance 6 5 Replacing an AC Fuse in the Power Supply To Replace an AC Fuse To replace an AC fuse do the following 1 2 3 Turn off the power to the D9032 Encoder Remove the power cord from the D9032 Encoder Open the lid holding the fuses Use a flat bladed screwdriv
307. will typically not use short GOPs If you for some reason use short GOPs observe that the lowest recommended default video rate depends on the GOP length 5 44 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Stand Alone Variable Bit Rate Before You Begin You can use the stand alone variable bit rate feature in a setup where you want to save bandwidth without using statistical multiplexing and a Statistical Multiplex Controller In such a setup a multiplexer such as the PowerVu Model D9140 Advanced Multiplexer or the Digital Content Manager DCM typically makes sure that the bit rate budget is not violated To Set Up the Stand alone Variable Bit Rate Proceed as follows to set up the Stand alone Variable Bit Rate 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Video tab expand the Encoder Rate icon and click the Stand alone Variable Bit Rate icon from the sub pages summary video Pre Processor Audio C ver IC oer Ts Output Wideo Stand Alone Variable Bit Rate Encoder Encoder Rate statistical Multiplex minimum Video Rate 1 500 000 bit s Stand Alone Varic Maximum Video Rate 6 000 000 bit s Target Video Quality 0 15 U ee Apply Reload Help 2 Set the Maximum Video Rate This setting is used to avoid that the rate for a channel exceeds a specified value The legal range is from 1 5 to 15 Mbit s If you do not need rate limitation you
308. ximum video rate limit setting to choose your maximum picture quality limit 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 39 Setting Up the Statistical Multiplexing Continued 3 Set the default video rate The legal range is from 0 5 to 15 Mbit s The default video rate is the channel s contribution to the statmux pool when the D9032 Encoder participates in statistical multiplexing with the Statistical Multiplex Controller During statistical multiplex operation each D9032 Encoder that participates in statistical multiplexing will be granted capacity from the statmux pool The sum of the default video rates for the active statmux channels equals the size of the statmux bit rate pool The total rate of the statmux channels will not go beyond the statmux pool size but may go lower depending on the target video quality The default video rate determines the encoding rate at which the encoder starts after power up Also it determines the rate the encoder settles to during communication errors between the Statistical Multiplex Controller and the D9032 Encoder or when the Statistical Multiplex Controller is disconnected The default video rate is also used to set up the TS rate budget For information on how much the other tributaries require of the available capacity see Transport Stream Rates for the Tributaries page C 3 For further information on setting up the default video rates see Determining the Default Video Rate page 5 43 4 If
309. y Digital Linear Dolby E Bit Depth 20 v Ch 1 Audio 1 Processing Linear E9Ch 2 Audio 2 Ch 3 Audio 3 H Ch 4 Audio 4 2 If relevant enable the audio channel Note Enable the audio after you have changed all audio settings if you don t want to transmit the audio while the changes take place 3 Set the encoding mode You may select between Linear and Dolby E Note You can transfer Dolby Digital Dolby E and uncompressed PCM data in the linear channel This may be useful if you are transferring different types of data Note however that only by transferring Dolby E data in the Dolby E mode you will be able to receive Dolby E alarms 4 Select in the Input Type field whether your audio input is analog digital or embedded The D9032 Encoder inputs the signal from the Analog Digital input connector in the selected format If you select Embedded the D9032 Encoder extracts the audio embedded in the active SDI video signal of the program 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 73 Setting Up the Linear Dolby E Audio Input Continued 10 11 12 Note Analog is only applicable to Linear audio where PCM samples are transparently transmitted Select the analog input impedance Set the input impedance to 600 Ohms if 600 Ohm termination is required in your system Set the encoder s input impedance to High if the source may not be loaded Select the digital input impedance Use
310. y Encoding In passthrough mode set the delay of the external passthrough encoder from the Dolby Digital passthrough page The legal range is from 1000 to 1000 ms Use this field if you want to adjust the encoding audio delay to synchronize audio with video in a program which has both Example If you use external video equipment which adds to the video delay you type a positive relative audio delay value corresponding to the external video delay The resolution is 1 millisecond Note You cannot set a negative relative audio delay greater than the end to end delay determined by the video encoder For information about the video delay see Setting Up the Video Encoder Delays page 5 27 For embedded audio select the embedded packet pair The SDI video input can contain up to 8 stereo audio channels each represented by a packet 1 to 4 and pair 1 or 2 You can transfer up to 4 of these channels 5 64 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Setting Up the Dolby Digital Audio Input Continued 12 Set the Data Rate of the signal Use this field to select the digital audio transmission rate Settings for the compressed bit rate are available from 56 to 640 kbit s Increasing the number in this field increases the audio bandwidth at the encoder improving the quality of the audio transmitted by the encoder The default is 192 Kbit s Use the following bit rate ranges for the selected audio mode Mode Data Rate Ra
311. y Press the key in the center of the Navigation Selection Keypad ED PREV key Press the key on the lower left of the numeric keypad S E gt D GD MENU key Press the key on the right of D gt D Fe the numeric keypad Alphanumeric Pressing the numeric keys 0 9 once D amp gt Entry will enter the respective digit into a data entry field i G gt gt GD G gt F1 F 2 F3 F4 Not Implemented a Numeric keypad keys are uniform MENU and PREV have been enlarged here for effect 4 4 Front Panel Operation 4019394 Rev B Startup Screen Structure On power up and initialization an identifying startup screen displays the system name the video program number the program name and the IP address of the unit The startup screen contains the following parameters System Name Description ProgNo Description ProgName Description IP Addr Description D9032 ProgNo ProgName IP Add The system name as set up from the software GUI The system name is centered on the top line of the Startup screen and is not displayed on sub pages It is used for uniquely identifying the D9032 Encoder The system name is also displayed in the top right corner of all software GUI pages see Reading the System Information or Managing the System page 5 121 The video program number The program number is set up from the PSI menu see Video Programs ProgNo page 4 7 The video program name The progra
312. y Support Warranty and post warranty support services are available to help customers return Scientific Atlanta products for service or repair For complete product watranty information see the Warranty at the front of the manual Customer Responsibility When returning equipment the customer is solely responsible for equipment packaging and transportation costs to the factory At the customer s request Scientific Atlanta will make reasonable efforts to provide warranty service at the customer s premises provided that the customer pays current field service rates plus direct travel and accommodation expenses In Case of Repair If your product requires repair perform following steps 7 2 Customer Information 4019394 Rev B Product Support Continued 1 Notify Scientific Atlanta of the problem immediately providing the model number and serial number of the equipment plus details of the problem On receipt of this information service information and shipping instructions will be provided 2 On receipt of instructions return the product by prepaid freight Refer to the section Returning Products for details In Case of a Fault If your product requires repair perform the following steps 1 Notify Scientific Atlanta of the problem immediately providing the model number and serial number of the equipment plus details of the problem On receipt of this information service information and shipping instructions will be
313. your system before setting them up ROSA automatically displays the used payload bit rate for the encoder in question see Setting Up the ASI Output Parameters page 5 92 Use the Multi Encoder Manager for setting up the bit rate budget for several encoders For further information see Multi Encoder Manager Application Layer User manual order number 4004150 4019394 Rev B Setup and Monitoring 5 21 Section D Setting Up the Video Setting Up the Video Input To Set Up the Video Input Proceed as follows to set up the Video Input 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the Video tab Summary Video Pre Processor Audio I mrs o S video Video Encoder Input Type SDI 625 v Encoder Rate A Composite Input ClearSight O Basic SDI Resolution O8 bit 10 bit Composite NTSC Pedestal 7 5 v Frame Synchronization Internal Clock v Action on Input Loss Action Black Picture b Delay 0 S seconds CO Copyright O Original Apply 2 Select whether the video input source is PAL PAL N PAL M NTSC 525 lines or 625 lines SDI or SDI Auto Note The PAL N and PAL M video formats are only supported with the onboard composite module If you select SDI Auto the encoder automatically selects the line type detected in the SDI signal For Composite select ClearSight or Basic Note If you select basic quality only Closed captions from the
314. z Bandwidth 8 MHz Constellation 64 QAM Hierarchy Non hierarchical Code rate HP Applies to hierarchical and non hierarchical rateHalf encoding Code rate LP Applies to hierarchical encoding rateTwoThirds Guard interval 1 32 Transmission mode 8k Mode Other frequencies in use Yes 5 120 Setup and Monitoring 4019394 Rev B Section K Working with the System Reading the System Information or Managing the System To Read the System Information or to Manage the System Proceed as follows to read the system information or to manage the System 1 From the user interface of the D9032 Encoder click the System tab and the System icon from the sub pages ap Atlanta k cisco commun summary video Pre Provessor Audo C ver opr Ts ouput pst system CaSystem System Temperatures message Settings System Name D9032 Encoder message Log rTrap Destination Serial Number 3105874282 modules aClock Software Version 02 10 08 option License IP Network Operation Hours 4925 Boot Code Version vo2 00 03 CLEI Code URN CLEI MM375123x Date of Manufacturing 2006 11 27 21 07 00 CLLI Code System Action Default Reset I Lock Front Panel Transfer Settings File m Upgrade System To Device From Device Upgrade Apply Reload Help The GUI automatically displays the serial number software version operating hours the version of the boot
315. zato dalla fabbrica 4019394 Rev B ix Important Safety Instructions Read and Retain Instructions Carefully read all safety and operating instructions before operating this equipment and retain them for future reference Follow Instructions and Heed Warnings Follow all operating and use instructions Pay attention to all warnings and cautions in the operating instructions as well as those that are affixed to this equipment Terminology The terms defined below are used in this document The definitions given are based on those found in safety standards Service Personnel The term service personnel applies to trained and qualified individuals who are allowed to install replace or service electrical equipment The service personnel are expected to use their experience and technical skills to avoid possible injury to themselves and others due to hazards that exist in service and restricted access areas User and Operator The terms user and operator apply to persons other than service personnel Ground ing and Earth ing The terms ground ing and earth ing are synonymous This document uses ground ing for clarity but it can be interpreted as having the same meaning as earth ing Electric Shock Hazard This equipment meets applicable safety standards WARNING To reduce risk of electric shock perform only the instructions that are included in the operating instructions Refer all servicing to qua

Encoder Model D9032 User and Service Manual, Software Version

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents